The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutB14-0012 specs LIONSHEAD PARKING STRUCTURE ENTRY 2014 IMPROVEMENTS VAIL, COLORADO ,� � �n .i�� , _;�- ` �E � _ _- , � ��'.i��_ � . �� '�� -- ��'�� .�-,3*}n„�. _� =�-_- �-- -- .� .� � � . • � - ��,s+.`-'� �±�T _, '�-�il. .��. .,��; �� . � -y`. . r�,�='�� . .n�,�.�` ;�-� �_ - '� .. � �� _ � _ -� � � � + . _ �� _t ,�:�. .;r� � ' - �� " �. � , �� - ...�� . .. . T,� ! , - �:.�� ,� � , ,. : : . � - . _ . . ,._- - �- - �� : �.,. � ^ ,�} ` ..:� �� Proj ect Manual 20122214.00 Issue for Bid/Building Permit FEBRUARY 12, 2014 SANTA BARBARA � � � � R � � V A I L tausiaba�eavo ra.x�nos�esa-eioa r,�+�o��a�uz5�Fax��apyyas-+nsp ..�, .� �,.. „ _,,,. � AND ASSOCIATES.IN�. . � _ �� ARCHITCC'TURE�PLA'vVING•ItiT[:RI[�RS Contract Documents and Specifications For The Lionshead Parking Entry TOWN OF VAIL DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS/TRANSPORTATION 1309 Elkhorn Drive Vail, Colorado 81657 February 12, 2014 A-1 2/L2/2014 Table of Contents Invitation to Bid and Bid Forms Invitation for Bid Instruction to Bidders Bid Form Bid Schedule Measurement & Payment Bidders Qualification Statement Certificate Regarding Employment Of Illegal Aliens Bid Bond Notice of Award Contract Forms Construction Contract Certificate of Insurance Verification Payment and PerFormance Bond Notice to Proceed Change Order Substantial Completion Form Certificate of Final Payment Final Acceptance Form General Conditions Supplemental Conditions (If Any) Technical Specifications DIVISION 1 — GENERAL CONDITIONS Note:All references to Division 1 or General Conditions refer to the General Conditions within the Contract Forms 010000.00 Geo-Technical Report 010000.01 Geo-Technical Report Update 010000.02 Geo-Technical Pavement Report 011000 Summary 012100 Allowances 012200 Unit Prices 012300 Alternates 012500 Substitution Procedures 012500 Substitution Form 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures 013100 Project Management and Coordination 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 013300 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements A-2 2/L2/2014 014200 References 015000 Temporary Facilities and Control 016000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution 017300 RFI Form 017700 Closeout Procedures 017700 Punchlist Form 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documents 017900 Demonstration and Training DIVISION 2 — EXISTING CONDITIONS 024116 Structure Demolition 024119 Selective Demolition DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 04 — MASONRY 044313.13 Anchored Stone Masonry DIVISION 05 — METALS 051200 Structural Steel Framing 051213 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS) 055000 Metal Fabrications 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings 057500 Decorative Formed Metal DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 061000 Rough Carpentry 061600 Sheathing 061800 Glue-Laminated Construction 062013 Exterior Finish Carpentry 064116 Plastic Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071113 Bituminous Dampproofing 072100 Thermallnsulation 072500 Weather Barriers 072600 Vapor Retarders 076100 Sheet Metal Roofing 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 077253 Snow Guards 078123 Intumescent Fireproofing 078413 Penetration Firestopping DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames A-3 2/L2/2014 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 087100 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing DIVISION 09 — FINISHES 092900 Gypsum Board 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 099113 Exterior Painting 099123 Interior Painting 099300 Staining and Transparent Finishing 099600 High-Performance Coatings DIVISION 10 — SPECIALITIES 104416 Fire Extinguishers DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT 111200 Parking Control Equipment 111200.01 Parking Control Equipment Coordination DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS 123623.13 Plastic-Laminate Clad Countertops DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 134213.16 Fabricated Control Booths DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING 220413 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 220423 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties DIVISION 23 — HEATING VENTIALTING and AIR CONDITIONING—BEAUDIN GANZE 230010 Mechanical General Provisions 230050 Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods 230113 Hydronic Piping 230113 Metal Ducts 230123 Facility Natural Gas Piping 230316 Radiant Heating Hydronic Piping 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 230600 Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks 230700 Mechanicallnsulation 230900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL — BEAUDIN GANZE 260010 Electrical General Provisions 260521 Exterior Lighting DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK-MARTIN and MARTIN 311000 Site Clearing 312000 Earth Moving A-4 2/L2/2014 312333 Trenching and Backfilling 312500 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321313 Concrete Paving 321373 Concrete Paving Joints 321723 Pavement Markings 328400 Planting Irrigation 329115 Soil Preparation 329200 TurFs and Grasses 329300 Plants 331100 Water Utility Distribution Piping 334100 Storm Utility Drainage Piping Construction Drawings (As Attached By Reference) A-5 2/L2/2014 INVITATION TO BID AND BID FORMS A-6 2/L2/2014 Invitation to Bid Project: Lionshead Parking Entry Bid Date: March 5, 2014 at 2:OOpm (MST) Bid Location: Submit one hard copy of the Bid, along with one PDF copy to: Mr. Tom Kassmel Vail Public Works Department-Administration Building 1309 Elkhorn Dr. Vail, CO 81657 GPS coordinates and internet maps to the above address frequently are misleading. It is the responsibility of every bidder to insure timely delivery to the correct location. Mandatorv Pre-Bid Meetinq: Date & Time: February 18, 2014 at 1:OOpm (MST) Location: Vail Public Works Department-Administration Building 1309 Elkhorn Dr. Vail, CO 81657 Bidders are required to attend the pre-Bid meeting. Bids will not be accepted from bidders that do not attend. A tour of the Site will follow the pre-Bid meeting for those interested. Brief Description of Work ■ Remove existing parking attendant booths and parking equipment ■ Build new steel, timber and stone parking entry structure with new attendant booths and parking equipment ■ New landscaping and irrigation ■ Re-grade and pave existing entry drive and parking areas and associated utility work ■ New snowmelt system for select entry pavements ■ Selective demolition and paving at top level and lower level of existing parking structure ■ New drive ramp at lover level of existing parking structure ■ Re-stripe lower level of existing parking structure A-7 2/L2/2014 Instructions to Bidders 1.OBidders may obtain Drawings and Specifications for the Project on February 12, 2014 via the Town of Vail Sharefile website in electronic PDF format. Access to the Sharefile site shall be gained only by emailing a request for access to the Town of Vail's Project Manager, Tom Kassmel at TKassmel(a�vailgov.com with subject line "Lionshead Parking Entry Bid Documents". Please provide name, company name, address, phone number, email address and trade in the body of the email. Bidders must print their own copies. 1.1 Printed copies are not available. It is the Bidder's responsibility to assure that it has a complete set of the Bid Documents. General contractors are responsible for assuring that their subcontractors and suppliers receive the Bid Documents and Addenda thereto. 1.2 Bidders shall carefully examine the Contract Documents and the construction site to obtain first-hand knowledge of existing conditions, surrounding areas, and local conditions. 1.2.1 All questions regarding the Bid and the Contract Documents shall be addressed in writing via email, to: Tom Kassmel at TKassmel@vailgov.com 1.3 The final date for questions will be February 28, 2014 at, 12:00 pm MST. Replies will be issued only by Addenda. Only answers to questions answered by formal Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. Addenda will be posted on the Town of Vail Sharefile site in electronic PDF format for all parties having received the Bid Documents. No Addenda will be issued later than March 3, 2014, except for an addendum, if necessary, postponing the Bid date or withdrawing the Invitation for Bids. 1.4 Bids may be disqualified at any time upon evidence of collusion with intent to defraud or other illegal practices upon the part of the Bidder. 1.5 A "Bid" is a responsive, conforming, unconditional, complete, legible, and properly executed offer by a Bidder on the form supplied by the Town to provide the Work specified in the Request for Bids for the compensation specified. Partial Bids will not be accepted unless otherwise specifically stated within the Bid Documents. 1.6 Bids shall be contained within a sealed envelope clearly marked with the project name, Bidder's name and contact person, mailing address, and telephone number of the Bidder. A printed original hard copy of the Bid along with a compiled, single, exact duplicate PDF file shall be provided to the Town. The Bidder may e-mail the PDF copy directly to the Town's Project Manager in lieu of providing it in the Bid envelope if the PDF file is emailed within 24 hours of and not before the designated Bid Date and time. Failure to provide a PDF copy of the bid within the Bid envelope or within an e-mail within the stated timeframe may be grounds for disqualification. 1.7 The following information shall be submitted with the Bid as provided in the Bid A-8 2/L2/2014 Documents, and printed by the Bidder in exact form provided in the Bid Documents.: 1.7.1 Completed Bid Form. 1.7.2 Complete Bid Schedule. 1.7.3 Completed Bidders Qualifications Statement. 1.7.4 Bid Bond. 1.7.5 The names and resumes of key staff personnel who will be assigned to the Work; 1.7.6 A complete graphical representation of the proposed scope of Work and schedule, including all relevant activities and critical milestones. Any alternatives included in the Bid Schedule shall be included as separate Work items to identify the change in project duration as a result of the requested alternatives. 1.7.7 The names and addresses of any subcontractors who will be hired for the Work. 1.8 It shall be the responsibility of the Bidder to ensure that the Bid is in proper form and in the Town's possession by or before the designated time and date. Bids will not be accepted after the designated time and date, as defined by the clock at the place of Bid opening. Any Bid received late will be returned to the Bidder unopened, if possible. 1.9 The Town of Vail Building Department will issue a construction permit for the Project. All Town Building Permit fees will be paid by the Town. The contractor's licensing fee with the Town shall be paid by Contractor. 1.10 This Project is Tax Exempt. No Bid shall include federal excise taxes or state or local sales or use taxes. The Town's Tax Exempt Indemnification number is 98- 02395. 1.11 A Notice of Award is anticipated on or about March 19, 2014. Restrictions to construction activity outlined in the "Vail Village and Lionshead Construction Hours Information Handout" updated yearly are applicable to the Project. Construction activity on the Project may not commence until April 21, 2014 and must be completed no later than November 15, 2014, with a suspension of all work impacting public areas from June 25, 2014 to September 2, 2014 with work resuming on September 2, 2014 until the completion date. 1.12 If a mistake is made or discovered during or after the Bid review, the Town reserves the right to determine which party made the mistake and whether the mistake is material and, after these determinations, the Town, in its sole reasonable discretion, shall decide whether to accept or reject the Bid. No advantage shall be A-9 2/L2/2014 taken by any party of manifest clerical errors or omissions in any Bid or the Contract Documents. Bidders shall notify the Town immediately of any errors or omissions that are encountered. 1.13 Any interlineation, alteration, or erasure shall be initialed by the Bidder. In the case of conflict between the indicated sum of any addition of figures and the correct sum, the correct sum shall control. 1.14 The Town shall not reimburse any Bidder for any cost incurred in preparing a Bid or attending equipment demonstrations, inspections, pre-Bid conferences, or interviews. 1.15 Any amplification, clarification, explanation, interpretation, or correction of the Bid Documents prior to the Bid shall be made only by written addendum(s), and a copy of the addendum(s) shall be made available to the prospective bidders. The Town is not responsible for any amplification, clarification, explanation, or interpretation or correction of a Bid not contained in written addenda. The Town is not responsible for failure of any Bidder to receive any addenda; it is the responsibility of the prospective bidders to confirm that they have all addenda. 1.16 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or a corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign), and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, and the legal address of the partnership shall be shown. Bids by limited liability companies shall be executed in the company's name and signed by a member, and the legal address of the company shall be shown. Names and titles shall be typed or printed below each signature. 1.17 The submission of a Bid shall be conclusive evidence and a legal admission that the Bidder: (1) has no questions, complaints, or objections in connection with the Contract Documents, subject to any requests made by the Bidder for amplification, clarification, explanation, interpretation, or correction; (2) has no questions, complaints, or objections as to the completeness, sufficiency, scope, or detail of the Bid; (3) has full knowledge of the scope, nature, quality, and quantity of the equipment to be provided, the perFormance criteria, the requirements of the Contract Documents, the site and conditions of delivery, the Vail Town Code, and other applicable law; (4) has complied with all requirements of the Bid and Contract Documents; (5) and that the Bid and Contract Documents provide, without limitations, sufficient scope and detail to allow for the complete construction of the desired Project with complete and finished operable systems. 1.18 The Contract will be awarded to the lowest responsible and responsive Bidder complying with the terms and conditions, guidelines, and specifications presented in the Request for Bids and these Instructions to Bidders. The Town reserves the right to determine, in its sole reasonable discretion, whether any Bid meets the needs or purposes intended and is within the approved budget. The Town does A-10 2/L2/2014 not base its award on prices alone. Also to be considered are: quality of product; past experience with the Bidder or any subcontractors, consultants, products or suppliers; qualifications of the Bidder and/or subcontractors or suppliers; services offered; warranties; maintenance considerations; long-range costs; schedule and delivery; bid and or contract qualifications and similar conditions. 1.19 The Town reserves the right to conduct such investigations as it deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid to establish the experience, responsibility, reliability, references, reputation, qualifications, or financial ability of any Bidder, manufacturer or supplier. The purpose of such investigation is to satisfy the Town that the Bidder has the experience, resources, and commercial reputation necessary to supply the specified equipment and to perForm the necessary warranty and product support in accordance with the Contract Documents in the prescribed manner and time. 1.20 The Town reserves the right, if it deems such action to be in its best interests, to reject any and all Bids or to waive any irregularities or informalities therein. Any incomplete, false, or misleading information provided by any Bidder shall be grounds for rejection of the Bid. If Bids are rejected, the Town further reserves the right to investigate and accept the next best Bid in order of ranking, or to reject all Bids and re-solicit for additional Bids. 1.21 In the event of any claim, suit, or demand which may result from any Bid, or the award of any contract as a result of submission of a Bid, Colorado law shall govern. 1.22 Once access is gained to the Sharefile site, all communications shall be made through the contact provided, unless specifically in regards to access to the Sharefile site. No other communication by a Bidder/subcontractor/supplier may be made with the Town or its representatives. Failure to comply with this direction may result in disqualification, at the Town's discretion. 1.23 All parts not specifically mentioned which are necessary in order to provide a complete unit shall be included in the Bid. Any item listed as "Standard" in the manufacturer's published specification, furnished by the Bidder, is assumed to be included in the Bid. Any variations shall be outlined in writing, noting cost factors where applicable. 1.24 All labor, material, tools, supplies, equipment, supervision, coordination, and all incidentals required to provide the complete improvements and complete operable systems as indicated in the Contract Documents shall be included in the Bid. 1.25 The submission of a Bid implies the required warranty for all installed components of the design, and compatibility of said components with adjacent surFaces and materials. Each Bid shall include a statement of standard warranty of the manufacturer, 1.26 Bids shall be in accordance with the specifications contained in the attached Contract Documents. Should any requirement in the specifications not be included in manufacturer's specification sheets, the Bidder shall include with its Bid a A-11 2/L2/2014 statement of compliance. Failure to do so shall be grounds for disqualification of the Bid. 1.27 The Town requires a Bid Bond in the form of a corporate surety bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total Bid amount before the Town can accept and consider any Bid. Upon award, such Bid Bonds shall be returned to the unsuccessful Bidder(s). For the successful Bidder, the Bid Bond will be returned upon receipt of the required Payment Bond and PerFormance Bond, in the full amount of the Contract Price. 1.28 A Bid is prepared at the Bidder's expense and becomes Town property and is therefore a public record upon opening by the Town. No Bid may be withdrawn for a period of si�y (60) days after the deadline for Bids. 1.29 If the Bidder takes exception to any requirements or component of the Bid and Contract Documents, a written letter of exceptions with explanations shall be provided with the Bid. Any exception to the Bid and Contract Documents is grounds for disqualification, at the sole discretion of the Town. A-12 2/L2/2014 BID FORM The undersigned offers and agrees to furnish all items, upon which the prices are quoted, at the price set opposite each item, if this Bid is accepted within sixty (60) days of the due date. The undersigned also agrees to make delivery, or render service, within ten (10) days of receipt of the Notice to Proceed. The undersigned certifies that no federal, state, or local tax is included in the quoted prices and that none will be added. Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: Name of Bidder: Address: Telephone Number: BID SUMMARY Total Base Price: $ (in words) BIDDER: By: STATE OF COLORADO ) ) ss. COUNTY OF ) The foregoing instrument was subscribed, sworn to and acknowledged before me this day of , 20_, by , as of A-13 2/L2/2014 My commission expires: (S E A L) Notary Public A-14 2/L2/2014 BID SCHEDULE To: Mr. Tom Kassmel Town of Vail 1309 Elkhorn Drive Vail, CO 81657 Work: Lionshead Parking Entry BID: Pursuant to the request for bids for the above-named work and being familiar with all contractual requirements, therefore, the undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, tools, supplies, equipment, plant, transportation, services, and all other things necessary for the completion of the contractual work. All other work to complete the work but not specifically itemized shall also be included as incidental to the work cost. Bidder also agrees to perForm the work in accordance with the time of completion set forth herein, for and in consideration of the following unit and lump sum prices: February 12, 2014 Project Out to Bid February 18, 2014 (1:OOpm MST) Mandatory Pre-Bid meeting February 28, 2014 (12:OOpm MST) Last opportunity to submit questions March 3, 2014 Last addendum issued March 5, 2014 Bid Opening March 12, 2014 Recommendation to Town Council March 18, 2014 Anticipated Town Council Approval March 19, 2014 Anticipated Notice of Award April 21, 2014-November 15, 2014 Construction as scheduled in Section 2.02 of the General Conditions attached hereto. BIDDER: By: STATE OF COLORADO ) ) ss. COUNTY OF ) The foregoing instrument was subscribed, sworn to and acknowledged before me this day of , 20_, by , as of My commission expires: (S E A L) Notary Public B-1 2/12/2014 BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT A Statement showing the qualifications of Bidder shall be a prerequisite to the Bidder being awarded the Contract. The qualification statement is intended to assure the Town that a high degree of overall workmanship can be expected, and that the Work will be completed within the time limits contained in the Contract Documents. All items on the statement must be answered in full and submitted with the Bid. The qualification statement will be reviewed by the Town after all Bids have been received and opened and prior to award. The Bidder shall answer and furnish the following items for review: 1. Name of Bidder: 2. Permanent address and phone number of Bidder: 3. Date Company was organized. 4. If a corporation, where incorporated. 5. Number of years engaged in contracting business under present firm or trade name: 6. Certified copy of financial statement prepared during current fiscal year as prepared for bank or bonding company. 7. List of current jobs new under contract, indicating client and telephone number, size, type of job and percentage of completion of each and date of completion. (Use additional sheets if necessary). 8. List of projects of this size and complexity completed within the last three (3) years along with contract amount, client's name and address. C-1 2/L2/2014 9. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, when, where, and why? 10. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, when, where, and why? BIDDER: By: STATE OF COLORADO ) ) ss. COUNTY OF ) The foregoing instrument was subscribed, sworn to and acknowledged before me this day of , 20_, by , as of My commission expires: (S E A L) Notary Public G2 2/L2/2014 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT , (hereinafter called Principal) as PRINCIPAL, and, (hereinafter called the SURETY) as SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto the Town of Vail, Colorado, hereinafter called OWNER, as Obligee, in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ), for the payment of which sum in lawful money of the United States, well and truly to be made, said PRINCIPAL and SURETY bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the PRINCIPAL has submitted a Bid to OWNER for certain Work or services generally described as follows: NOW, THEREFORE, (a) if said Bid shall be rejected, or (b) if said Bid shall be accepted and the PRINCIPAL is awarded the Contract and, within the time and manner specified in the Contract Documents, enters into a written Contract in the prescribed form and shall give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the Contract Documents to guarantee faithful performance of such Contract and to guarantee prompt payment of labor and materials furnished in the prosecution thereof, and shall provide to OWNER a Certificate of Insurance as required by the Contract Documents, and shall in all other respects perForm the Contract created by the acceptance of said Bid, or (c) in the event of the failure of the PRINCIPAL to enter such Contract and to give such bond or bonds, and Certificate of Insurance, if the PRINCIPAL shall pay to OWNER the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said Bid and such larger amount for which the OWNER may in good faith contract with another party to perForm the Work covered by said Bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. The SURETY, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said SURETY hereunder shall be in no way impaired or affected by any alteration or irregularities in the bid or in the bidding procedure or by any extension of time within which OWNER may accept such Bid, and does hereby waive notice of same. Dated this day of , 20_ (SURETY) (PRINCIPAL) By: By: Title: Title: (ACKNOWLEDGMENTS AND POWER OF ATTORNEY TO BE ATTACHED) CORPORATE SEAL MUST BE AFFIXED IF PRINCIPAL IS A CORPORATION. E-1 2/L2/2014 NOTICE OF AWARD Date: Contractor Name Address RE: Dear � Thank you for submitting a Bid for the Your firm submitted the most qualified Bid and you have been selected as the successful Contractor. Accordingly, this is your Notice of Award for the Enclosed please find an original and duplicate original Construction Contract. Please review and sign both, then, within ten (10) days of receipt of this letter, return both to me along with your certification of insurance, payment and perFormance bond, each in the full amount of the Contract Price, and appropriate powers of attorney. When dating the above documents, please make sure that all dates, on all documents, are the same and that the insurance policy reflects the requirements of the Contract Documents. Please return all of the documents at the same time, in the same envelope. Upon receipt of the signed Contracts, the Town will execute both and return one fully executed original to you. Should you have any questions, please call me at Sincerely, , Project Manager E-2 2/L2/2014 CONTRACT FORMS E-3 2/L2/2014 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT THIS CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT is made and entered into this day of , 20_, by and between the TOWN OF VAIL, 75 South Frontage Road, Vail, Colorado 81657, a Colorado municipal corporation (the "Town"), and , a ("Contractor") (collectively the "Parties"). For the consideration described herein, the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, the Parties hereby agree as follows: 1. Scope of Work. Contractor shall perForm the following described work (the "Work"), in accordance with this Contract and the Contract Documents, attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference: 2. Bonds. Within ten (10) days of the date of this Contract, Contractor shall provide the payment and perFormance bond and certificate of insurance required by the Contract Documents. 3. Commencement and Completion of Work. Contractor shall commence the Work within ten (10) days of date of the Notice to Proceed. Substantial Completion of the Work shall be accomplished by the day of , 20_, unless the period for completion is extended otherwise in accordance with the Contract Documents. Final Completion of the Work shall be accomplished within (_) days of the date of Substantial Completion. 4. Compensation/Contract Price. The Town agrees to pay Contractor, subject to all of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, for the Work, an amount not to exceed ($ ). The Town shall pay Contractor in the manner and at such times as set forth in the Contract Documents. 5. Illeqal Aliens. A. Certification. By entering into this Contract, Contractor hereby certifies that, at the time of this certification, it does not knowingly employ or contract with an illegal alien who will perForm work under this Contract and that Contractor will participate in either the E-Verify Program administered by the United States Department of Homeland Security and Social Security Administration or the Department Program administered by the Colorado Department of Labor and Employment in order to confirm the employment eligibility of all employees who are newly hired for employment to perForm work under this Construction Contract. B. Prohibited Acts. Contractor shall not: 1. Knowingly employ or contract with an illegal alien to perForm work under this Contract; or E-4 2/L2/2014 2. Enter into a contract with a subcontractor that fails to certify to Contractor that the subcontractor shall not knowingly employ or contract with an illegal alien to perform work under this Contract. C. Verification. 1. If Contractor has employees, Contractor has confirmed or attempted to confirm the employment eligibility of all employees who are newly hired for employment to perForm work under this Construction Contract through participation in either the E-Verify Program or the Department Program. 2. Contractor shall not use the E-Verify or Department Program procedures to undertake pre-employment screening of job applicants while this Construction Contract is being perFormed. 3. If Contractor obtains actual knowledge that a subcontractor perForming work under this Construction Contract knowingly employs or contracts with an illegal alien who is perForming work under this Construction Contract, Contractor shall: a. Notify the subcontractor and the Town within three (3) days that Contractor has actual knowledge that the subcontractor is employing or contracting with an illegal alien who is perForming work under this Construction Contract; and b. Terminate the subcontract with the subcontractor if within three (3) days of receiving the notice required pursuant to subsection 1 hereof, the subcontractor does not stop employing or contracting with the illegal alien who is perForming work under the contract; except that Contractor shall not terminate the contract with the subcontractor if during such three (3) days the subcontractor provides information to establish that the subcontractor has not knowingly employed or contracted with an illegal alien who is perForming work under this Construction Contract. D. Duty to Comply with Investigations. Contractor shall comply with any reasonable request by the Colorado Department of Labor and Employment made in the course of an investigation conducted pursuant to C.R.S. § 8-17.5-102(5)(a) to ensure that Contractor is complying with the terms of this Construction Contract. E. Affidavits. If Contractor does not have employees, Contractor shall sign the attached "No Employee Affidavit." If Contractor wishes to verify the lawful presence of newly hired employees who perform work under this Construction Contract via the Department Program, Contractor shall sign the "Department Program Affidavit" attached hereto. E-5 2/L2/2014 6. Governinq Law and Venue. This Construction Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Colorado, and any legal action concerning the provisions hereof shall be brought in Eagle County, Colorado. 7. No Waiver. Delays in enforcement or the waiver of any one or more defaults or breaches of this Construction Contract by the Town shall not constitute a waiver of any of the other terms or obligation of this Construction Contract. 8. Integration. This Construction Contract and the Contract Documents constitute the entire agreement between Contractor and the Town, superseding all prior oral or written communications. 9. Third Parties. There are no intended third-party beneficiaries to this Construction Contract. 10. Notice. Any notice under this Construction Contract shall be in writing, and shall be deemed sufficient when directly presented or sent pre-paid, first class United States Mail, addressed to: The Town: Mr. Tom Kassmel Town of Vail 1309 Elkhorn Drive Vail, Colorado 81657 Contractor: 11. Severabilitv. If any provision of this Construction Contract is found by a court of competent jurisdiction to be unlawful or unenforceable for any reason, the remaining provisions hereof shall remain in full force and effect. 12. Modification. This Construction Contract may only be modified upon written agreement of the Parties. 13. Assignment. Neither this Construction Contract nor any of the rights or obligations of the Parties hereto, shall be assigned by either party without the written consent of the other. 14. Governmental Immunitv. The Town, its officers, and its employees, are relying on, and do not waive or intend to waive by any provision of this Construction Contract, the monetary limitations (presently one hundred fifty thousand dollars ($150,000) per person and six hundred thousand dollars ($600,000) per occurrence) or any other rights, immunities, and protections provided by the Colorado Governmental Immunity Act, E-6 2/L2/2014 C.R.S. § 24-10-101, et seq., as amended, or otherwise available to the Town and its officers or employees. 15. Rights and Remedies. The rights and remedies of the Town under this Construction Contract are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law. The expiration of this Construction Contract shall in no way limit the Town's legal or equitable remedies, or the period in which such remedies may be asserted, for work negligently or defectively performed. 16. Subject to Annual Appropriation. Consistent with Article X, § 20 of the Colorado Constitution, any financial obligation of the Town not performed during the current fiscal year are subject to annual appropriation, and thus any obligations of the Town hereunder shall extend only to monies currently appropriated and shall not constitute a mandatory charge, requirement or liability beyond the current fiscal year. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Construction Contract has been executed by the Parties as of the date first above written. TOWN OF VAIL, COLORADO Stan Zemler, Town Manager ATTEST: Lorelei Donaldson, Town Clerk APPROVED AS TO FORM: Matt Mire, Town Attorney CONTRACTOR By: STATE OF COLORADO ) ) ss. COUNTY OF ) The foregoing instrument was subscribed, sworn to and acknowledged before me this day of , 20_, by , as of My commission expires: (S E A L) Notary Public E-7 2/L2/2014 NO EMPLOYEE AFFIDAVIT (To be completed only if Contractor does not have any employees] 1. Check and complete one: ❑ I, , am a sole proprietor doing business as . I do not currently employ any individuals. Should I employ any individuals during the term of my Contract with the Town of Vail (the "Town"), I certify that I will comply with the lawful presence verification requirements outlined in that Contract. OR ❑ I, , am the sole owner/member/shareholder of , a [specify type of entity — i.e., corporation, limited liability company], that does not currently employ any individuals. Should I employ any individuals during the term of my Contract with the Town, I certify that I will comply with the lawful presence verification requirements outlined in that Contract. 2. Check one. ❑ I am a United States citizen or legal permanent resident. The Town must verify this statement by reviewing one of the following items: ■ A valid Colorado driver's license or a Colorado identification card; ■ A United States military card or a military dependent's identification card; ■ A United States Coast Guard Merchant Mariner card; ■ A Native American tribal document; ■ In the case of a resident of another state, the driver's license or state- issued identification card from the state of residence, if that state requires the applicant to prove lawful presence prior to the issuance of the identification card; ■ Any other documents or combination of documents listed in the Town's "Acceptable Documents for Lawful Presence Verification" chart that prove both the contractor's citizenship/lawful presence and identity. ■ OR ❑ I am otherwise lawfully present in the United States pursuant to federal law. Contractor must verify this statement through the federal Systematic Alien Verification of Entitlement program, the "SAVE" program, and provide such verification to the Town. Signature Date E-8 2/L2/2014 DEPARTMENT PROGRAM AFFIDAVIT (To be completed if Contractor participates in the Department of Labor' Lawful Presence Verification Program] I, , as a public contractor under contract with the Town of Vail (the "Town"), hereby affirm that: 1. I have examined or will examine the legal work status of all employees who are newly hired for employment to perForm work under this public contract for services ("Contract") with the Town within twenty (20) days after such hiring date; 2. I have retained or will retain file copies of all documents required by 8 U.S.C. § 1324a, which verify the employment eligibility and identity of newly hired employees who perForm work under this Contract; and 3. I have not and will not alter or falsify the identification documents for my newly hired employees who perform work under this Contract. Signature Date STATE OF COLORADO ) ) ss. COUNTY OF ) The foregoing instrument was subscribed, sworn to and acknowledged before me this day of , 20 , by as of My commission expires: (S E A L) Notary Public E-9 2/L2/2014 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE STATE OF ) ) ss. COUNTY OF ) I, , being first duly sworn, state and affirm, under penalty of law, that I am familiar with the insurance coverages maintained by the Insured, , and the coverage requirements set forth in the foregoing Certificate of Insurance, that I have completed or caused to be completed and subsequently reviewed the foregoing Certificate of Insurance and that the information provided contained therein is true and correct to the best of my knowledge. I further understand that the Town of Vail shall rely on the information provided. This information is provided for the Town of Vail, Project Name: By: Title: Agency: STATE OF COLORADO ) ) ss. COUNTY OF ) The foregoing instrument was subscribed, sworn to and acknowledged before me this day of , 20_, by , as of My commission expires: (S E A L) Notary Public F-1 2/L2/2014 PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (Firm) (Address) (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as "the Principal", and (Firm) (Address) hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the Town of Vail, Colorado, a Municipal Corporation, hereinafter referred to as "the Owner", in the penal sum of Dollars in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Contract with the Owner, dated the day of ,20 , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the perFormance of the Work, NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perForm its duties, all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Contract during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the Owner, with or without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty or warranty period, and shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Contract, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all cost and damages which it may suffer by the Principal's failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the Owner all outlay and expense which the Owner may incur in making good any default, and make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors and corporations furnishing materials for or perForming labor in the prosecution of the work provided for in such Contract, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such work, and all insurance premiums on said work, and for all labor performed in such work, whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this Bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any J-1 2/12/2014 such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Principal shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in five (5) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this day of , 20 ATTEST: PRINCIPAL By: By: Title: Title: Address: (Corporate Seal) SURETY ATTEST: Surety: By: By: Attorney-in-Fact: Title: Address: (Surety Seal) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract and Surety must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the Town. J-2 2/12/2014 NOTICE TO PROCEED Date: Contractor Name Address RE: Dear � This letter is your Notice to Proceed, effective as of the date cited below. This notice is in reference to the Construction Contract between you and the Town of Vail concerning the Please note that in accordance with the Construction Contract, Work must commence within ten (10) days of the date of this Notice, and all Work must be substantially completed within ( ) days of the date of this Notice, which shall be the day of , 20 , and finally completed within ( ) days of the date of this Notice, which shall be the day of , 20_. If you have any questions, please call me at Sincerely, Project Manager Date J-3 2/12/2014 CHANGE ORDER Date: Order No.: Base Contract Date: Name of Project: Lionshead Parking Entry Owner: Town of Vail, Vail, Colorado Contractor: The following changes are hereby made to the Contract Documents: Justification: Original Contract Price: $ Current Contract Price adjusted by previous Change Order(s): $ This Change Order will increase/decrease the Contract Price by: $ The new Contract Price, including this Change Order, is: $ The Contract Time will be increased/decreased by calendar days. The date for completion of all Work will be (Date) If additional compensation is determined due Contractor under this Change Order, it shall be in full payment of all extra work and/or materials as set forth in the Change Order to the date of the Change Order, including compensation for all claims, direct or indirect, for the extended overhead and profit, and damages of any type whatsoever, including delay and impact damages. Any additional costs to Contractor resulting from delays caused by the Town shall be presumed to be included in this Change Order adjusted for time and price. ACCEPTED: (Contractor): Date: Printed Authorized Name K-1 2/!2/2014 Z:1201211222141IV.CURRENTDOCUMENTSI03.SPECIFICATIONSIDIV-OIITOVICONTRACTDOCUMENTS-FINALLONGFORM.DOC Town of Vail: Date: Stan Zemler (Architect/Engineer): Date: Printed Authorized Name: K-2 ait2i2ota Z:1201211222141IV.CURRENTDOCUMENTSI03.SPECIFICATIONSIDIV-OIITOVICONTRACTDOCUMENTS-FINALLONGFORM.DOC CERTIFICATE OF FINAL PAYMENT With reference to Contract Number dated , 20_, between the undersigned Contractor and the Town of Vail, for: at Vail, Colorado Contractor hereby certifies that all costs, charges and expenses incurred by it on its behalf for work, labor, services, materials and equipment supplied to the foregoing premises, and/or used in connection with its Work under the Contract have been duly paid. Contractor further certifies that to its best knowledge and belief (based upon reasonable investigation) each of its subcontractors and material suppliers have duly paid all costs, charges and expenses incurred by them or on their behalf for work, labor, services, materials and equipment supplied to the foregoing premises and/or used by them in connection with Contractor's Work under the Contract. In consideration of dollars ($ ) representing final payment under the Contract, Contractor hereby releases and discharges the Town and the Town's property from all claims, liens and obligations of every nature arising out of or in connection with the perFormance of the Work. As additional consideration for the final payment, and to the fullest extent permitted by law, the undersigned indemnifies and holds the Town and its employees, officials, agents and representatives harmless from and against all costs, losses, damages, claims, causes of action, judgments and expenses arising out of or in connection with claims which may be asserted by Contractor or any suppliers, subcontractors of any tier or any of their representatives, officers, agents and employees for the costs, losses, damages, claims, causes of action, judgments and expenses and expenses that are attributable to the act, omission, error, professional error, mistake, negligence or other fault of Contractor. The foregoing shall not relieve Contractor of its obligations under the provisions of the Contract as amended, which by their nature survive completion of the Work including without limitation warranties, guarantees and indemnities. Executed this day of , 20_ Contractor K-3 ait2i2ota Z:1201211222141IV.CURRENTDOCUMENTSI03.SPECIFICATIONSIDIV-OIITOVICONTRACTDOCUMENTS-FINALLONGFORM.DOC CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Date: TO: Project: Title: This is to advise you that substantial completion for the referenced Work has been obtained and that all substantially complete work and material has been found to be satisfactory, unless otherwise noted below. Therefore, the work is considered to be substantially complete in accordance with the approved plans, specifications and contract documents. In accordance with the Contract, all Warranty periods for substantially complete Work shall begin as of the date of this letter. Warranty periods for those portions of Work remaining incomplete, as noted below, shall begin upon Final Acceptance. Incomplete Work Remaining; TOWN OF VAIL By: Title: L-1 ait2i2ota Z:1201211222141IV.CURRENTDOCUMENTSI03.SPECIFICATIONSIDIV-OIITOVICONTRACTDOCUMENTS-FINALLONGFORM.DOC CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE Date: TO: Project Title: This is to advise you that a final inspection of the referenced Work has been made and all work and material was found to be satisfactory. Therefore, the Work is considered to be complete in accordance with the approved plans, specifications and contract documents. In accordance with the Contract, all Warranty periods shall begin as of the date of this letter. TOWN OF VAIL By: Title: L-1 ait2i2ota Z:1201211222141IV.CURRENTDOCUMENTSI03.SPECIFICATIONSIDIV-OIITOVICONTRACTDOCUMENTS-FINALLONGFORM.DOC GENERAL CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1. DEFINITIONS 1.01 BID All documents and information supplied by Contractor to bid on the Project, including the Bid Bond. 1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The documents related to the Work, which are the property of the Town and are not to be used for any purpose not related to the Work without the prior written consent of the Town, including the following; A. Invitation to Bid; B. Instructions to Bidders; C. Bid Form (Including Bid Summary); D. Bid Schedule; E Measurement and Payment; F. Bidder's Qualification Statement; G. Construction Contract; H. General Conditions I. Supplemental Conditions; J. Technical Specifications; K. Construction Drawings; L. Certificate of Insurance Verification; M. Notice of Award; N. Notice to Proceed; O. Bid Bond; P. Payment and PerFormance Bond; Q. Certificate of Final Payment; R. Final Acceptance Form; S. Documentation submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award; and T. Addenda as identified in the Bid Form and Construction Drawings. 1.03 CHANGE ORDER: A written order issued by the Town in the form of a Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Amendment to the Contract after execution of the Contract authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time. Other written or verbal correspondence, including without limitation Requests For Information ("RFIs"), Submittals and e-mails do not constitute a Change Order or change or amendment to the Contract, or relieve Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.04 TOWN: The Town of Vail, Colorado. 1.05 CONTRACT: The entire written agreement covering the perFormance of the Work described in the Contract Documents, including all Change Orders. 1.06 CONTRACT PRICE: The amount set forth in Paragraph 4 of the Construction Contract, as amended by Change Order. 1.07 CONTRACT TIME: The time for completion of the Work as set forth in Paragraph 3 of the Construction Contract. 1.08 DAY: Calendar day, unless otherwise specified. When the last day for the occurrence of an event falls on a Sunday or legal holiday as recognized by the Town, the time for perFormance shall be automatically extended to the next business day. 1.09 DRAWINGS: The graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work and generally include plans, elevations, sections, details, diagrams, schedules, and quantities. 1.10 FINAL COMPLETION: The date as certified by the Project Manager when all of the Work is completed and final payment may be made. 1.11 MAJOR ITEM: Any item having a Bid value, determined by multiplying the Bid quantity by the unit Bid price that exceeds ten percent (10%) of the original Contract Price. 1.12 PRODUCT DATA: Illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 1.13 PROJECT MANAGER: The Town's duly authorized representative in connection with the Work, or his or her designee. 1.14 SITE The physical location where the Work is being perFormed. 1.15 SPECIFICATIONS: The written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards of workmanship, and perFormance of the Work. 1.16 SUBCONTRACTOR: Any person, firm or corporation with a direct contract with Contractor who acts for or in behalf of Contractor in executing any part of the Contract, excluding one who merely furnishes material. 1.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: The date as certified by the Project Manager when the Town occupies or takes possession of all or substantially all of the Work, or when the Town may occupy or take possession of all or substantially all of the Work and put it to beneficial use for its intended purposes. 1.18 WORK: All the work specified, indicated, shown or contemplated in the Contract Documents, including all alterations, amendments or extensions thereto made by supplemental agreements or Change Orders. PART 2. TIME 2.01 TIME OF THE ESSENCE: All times stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. 2.02 TIMING OF WORK: A. General. Subject to the restrictions set forth in this Section, the Project shall be completed within the following timeframe: Spring Construction Period: April 21, 2014 through June 25, 2014 Fall Construction Period: September 2, 2014 through November 15, 2014 Project shall be completed enough by October 1, 2014 to allow vending equipment (Ticket dispensers, automatic gates, pass readers and credit card Pay stations) to be installed by others. B. Exceptions. The Project schedule shall be further limited to periods and restrictions as follows: The Contractor may close the Lionshead Parking Structure main vehicular entry during the Spring and Fall construction periods in order to complete the work. Access to the parking structure may be relocated to the lower level access off of East Lionshead Circle. The Contractor will be responsible to provide adequate signage for the relocation of this access and coordinate with the Town as appropriate. The Lionshead Parking Structure South Frontage Road main vehicular entry shall be reopened to the public for the Summer between the Spring and Fall construction periods. The surFace for this entry shall be at finished grades and finished surface materials. The Contractor shall provide reasonable access for the Town to pass through the site with a flatbed semi-trailer, forklift and frontend loaders in order to erect the Lionshead Skate Park on top of the Lionshead Parking Structure. This access period shall be coordinated with the Town of Vail Public Works Department, and shall be anticipated to occur during a 3 day mid-week continuous period at some point that can be agreed upon by the Town and the Contractor between May 12, 2014 and May 23, 2014. The Contractor shall provide reasonable access for the public vehicular access to the Lionshead Parking Structure through the site during the `Go-Pro Games' Special Event from June 5, 2014 through June 8, 2014. Reasonable access shall be at a minimum, defined as: two 12'-0" lanes (one entrance, one exit lane), accessible by standard 16 passenger van vehicles or smaller, with hard surface lanes, or at a minimum, compacted asphalt millings, with maximum grades of 5% and cross slopes of 3%. Asphalt millings are available at the Town of Vail Public Works yard and can be coordinated for use. C. Summer Season Restrictions. No Work shall occur in or around the Site during the Summer Season from June 25 through September 2, 2014. By the end of day on June 25, 2014 the Site shall be clear of all construction debris, staging, materials, equipment and other construction incidentals. All surFaces noted in the Construction Drawings as finish hardscape (pavers, asphalt, concrete) shall be completed or left with a smooth asphalt surface. All hardscape surFaces shall be clear and swept clean, with no pedestrian or vehicular hazards, and all penetrations within these open areas shall be at grade. Where elevated finish surfaces must transition to an asphalt surFace within a pedestrian or vehicular area, a temporary asphalt transition shall be installed with a maximum grade break of five percent (5%), unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager. All landscape areas shall be complete or mulched with wood chips. Wood chip mulch is available for use and pick up at the Town of Vail Public Works Department storage yard. Other areas left with permanent hazards shall be fenced in order to secure the hazard in an appropriate manner; examples may include the foundation and column work, Boiler building and like areas of work not complete. 2.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: A. When Contractor considers the Work ready for its intended use, Contractor shall certify to the Town, in writing, that the Work is substantially complete. The certification shall include a punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final acceptance. B. If the Project Manager considers the Work to be substantially complete, the Project Manager will issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. 2.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE: Upon written notice from Contractor that the Work is complete, the Town will make a final inspection and notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to remedy such deficiencies within a timeframe and schedule approved by the Project Manager. After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of the Project Manager and as required by the Contract Documents, the Town shall issue a certificate of Final Acceptance. 2.05 CHANGES IN THE WORK: In addition to the Requirements set forth in Specification Section 012600: A. The Town reserves the right to order changes in the Work, in the nature of additions, deletions or modifications, without invalidating the Contract, and to make corresponding adjustments in the Contract Price and the Contract Time. All changes shall be authorized by a written Change Order signed by the Project Manager. The Change Order shall include appropriate changes in the Contract Documents and the Contract Time. The Work shall be changed and the Contract Price and Contract Time modified only as set forth in the written Change Order. Any adjustment in the Contract Price resulting in a credit or a charge to the Town shall be determined by mutual agreement of the parties before the Work set forth in the Change Order is commenced. If a Change Order results in an increase in the Contract Price, approval of the Town shall be required, and if such approval is not obtained, the Town shall have no payment obligation regardless of whether the Work pursuant to the Change Order has been perFormed. B. Execution of a Change Order shall constitute a final settlement of all matters relating to the change in the Work, including any and all claims and adjustments to the Contract Price and Construction Schedule. 2.06 DELAYS: A. If Contractor is delayed in the progress of the Work by fire, unusual delay in transportation, unanticipated adverse weather conditions, or other unavoidable casualties beyond Contractor's control other than unanticipated adverse weather conditions, the Contract Time shall be extended for a reasonable period of time. Reasonable "Unanticipated adverse weather conditions" extensions shall be granted only when such conditions are more severe than the monthly average temperatures and/or precipitation recorded in Vail, as provided for at http://www.wrcc.dri.edu/cqi-bin/cIiMAIN.pI?covail. As these average weather conditions are to be anticipated during construction, and that reasonable extensions may be granted for any monthly adverse conditions, so will reasonable accelerations be expected to be given to the Town for monthly weather conditions that are more favorable than the provided averages. B. Any request for extension of the Contract Time shall be made in writing to the Project Manager not more than seven (7) days after commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. Any such request shall contain an estimate of the probable effect of such delay on the progress of the Work. C. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price, or to damages, or to additional compensation as a consequence of any such delays. D. If Contractor falls behind the Town-approved schedule, Contractor at its own expense shall take all necessary extraordinary measures to accelerate the current progress of the Work to meet the Town-approved schedule. 2.07 NO DAMAGES FOR DELAY: In strict accordance with C.R.S. § 24-91-103.5, the Town shall not amend the Contract Price to provide for additional compensation for any delays in performance which are not the result of acts or omissions of the Town or persons acting on behalf of the Town. PART 3. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 3.01 COMPLETION/SUPERVISION OF WORK: A. Contractor shall be responsible for completion of all Work in a timely and workmanlike manner in accordance with the terms and specifications of the Contract Documents, including the techniques, sequences, procedures and means. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of all Work. Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work and give it all attention necessary for proper supervision and direction. Contractor shall maintain a supervisor on Site at all times when Contractor or any subcontractor is perForming Work. The Town and its representatives are not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to be complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; and that the Work shall be at Final Completion a complete, operational and functional project and provide the intended or specified perFormance. Contractor shall provide all incidental items and parts necessary to achieve this intent. C. The Project Manager, architects, engineers, consultants, and artists will visit the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Project Manager is authorized to reject Work which is defective, and to require special inspection or testing of the Work, whether the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. D. Contractor shall employ at all times a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without prior written notice to the Project Manager. Such superintendent shall be capable of reading and thoroughly understanding the Plans and Specifications and shall be able to communicate with the Project Manager. The superintendent shall have full authority to execute the Work specified in the Contract Documents without delay and promptly to supply materials, tools, plant equipment and labor as may be required to perform such Work. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications given to the superintendent shall be as if given to Contractor. If the superintendent is not present, the Project may be shut down. E. Contractor acknowledges that it has not acted or relied upon any express or implied representation or warranty of the Project Manager or representative of the Town. F. Unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager, Contractor shall provide all normal maintenance on all items of the Work through Substantial Completion. 3.02 COORDINATION, INSPECTIONS AND TESTING: A. Town-provided Documents. Contractor shall be furnished, free of charge, an electronic set of the Contract Documents in .pdf format. The Town shall also provide one electronic (in .pdf format) of each report and test of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the Site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness. Contractor shall inspect all Contract Documents, tests and reports, including soil tests, materials tests and engineering tests, if applicable, and shall conduct a Site or field review prior to executing the Contract. Contractor assumes the risk of all conditions which are disclosed, or which are reasonably suggested by any such tests or reports, or which would be disclosed by a field or Site review. Contractor shall have the affirmative duty to advise the Town of any concerns which Contractor may have regarding construction conditions prior to executing the Contract. Contractor shall be responsible for all additional geotechnical investigations necessary to perform the Work. B. Easements. Contractor shall identify any and all necessary easements for construction and maintenance of the Work. C. Coordination of Inspections. Contractor shall coordinate its construction schedule with all testing agencies and the Town so that key inspection points may be observed. If Contractor fails to provide reasonably adequate notice or proceeds without the required inspection, the subject Work shall be re-exposed or redone in its entirety, while the inspector is present. No extra compensation shall be awarded to Contractor for extra Work due to Contractor's failure to coordinate inspections with the testing agency or the Town. All costs associated with Contractor's failure to coordinate inspections shall be borne by Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating, requesting, receiving, documenting, and passing all required Inspections from/for all regulatory agencies that are related to the Work. E. Construction Inspections. Contractor shall perForm construction inspections. Contractor shall attend any pre-construction meeting(s) and be available to provide technical assistance during the course of construction as necessary. Contractor shall provide Site visits and reviews upon request from the Town during the construction phase to ensure compliance with the intent of the plans and to resolve any potential conflicts. Contractor shall provide a written summary after each Site visit. F. Final Inspection. Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the final inspection with the Town. G. Quality Control Testinq. Contractor shall be responsible for contracting for, providing payment for, and performing all necessary Quality Control materials testing necessary to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations. Frequency of testing shall be as necessary to comply with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall provide timely notice to the Project Manager so that the Project Manager may be present. Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with copies of all materials testing reports. In addition to the materials testing perFormed by Contractor, the Town may conduct Quality Assurance testing in its own discretion. H. Coordination of Subcontractors. Contractor shall coordinate all Subcontractors to complete the Work. Weekly Subcontractor meetings shall be held by Contractor, and the Project Manager shall be notified of these weekly meetings and provided the recorded minutes from these meetings. 1. Coordination Drawings. To allow Contractor to coordinate the installation of Contractor and Subcontractor work, some Drawings are shown schematically. Typical schematic Drawings may include without limitation mechanical, electrical, plumbing and special systems installations, showing schematic installations of pipes, conduits, ductwork, wiring, and equipment. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of this Work and submit Coordination Drawings in accordance with the Contract Documents showing exact locations of all installations, prior to installation. Coordination Drawings shall be provided as a submittal to the Project Manager. Any conflicts within the Coordination Drawings or with the Contract Documents shall be brought to the attention of the Project Manager immediately for resolution prior to installation. 2. Pre-Installation Meetings. Contractor shall coordinate Pre-Installation Meetings in accordance with the Contract Documents and the Project Manager shall be notified of the pre-installation meetings. 3. Failure to Coordinate Subcontractors. No extra compensation shall be awarded to Contractor for extra Work due to Contractor's failure to coordinate Subcontractors, Coordination Drawings, and pre-installation meetings. All costs associated with Contractor's failure to coordinate shall be borne by Contractor. 3.03 FURNISHING OF LABOR AND MATERIALS: A. Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials and equipment, including: tools; construction equipment and machinery; utilities, including water; transportation; and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper completion of the Work. B. In all purchases of supplies, materials and provisions to be incorporated or otherwise used by Contractor in the Work, Contractor shall use supplies, materials and provisions produced, manufactured or grown in Colorado if such supplies, materials and provisions are not of inferior quality to those offered by competitors outside of Colorado. C. While engaged in the perFormance of the Work, Contractor shall maintain employment practices that do not violate the provisions of the Colorado Antidiscrimination Act of 1957, C.R.S. § 24-34-301, et seq., as amended. 3.04 PHOTO AND VIDEO DOCUMENTATION: A. Video. Contractor shall provide the Town with a video of the entire Site, including all adjacent areas, prior to beginning the Work, at Contractor's own expense. The copy provided to the Town shall become the property of the Town. Existing conditions shall be documented. The video shall be time and date stamped. B. Photography. Contractor shall provide the following color photography in printed and electronic .jpg format unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager: Printed color photos , 4" x 6"; and electronic photos at a resolution for clear visibility of the pictures intent within the size range of 0.5 MB and 1.5 MB, unless otherwise required or approved by the Project Manager. Photos shall include pre-existing photo documentation prior to the start of Work, progress photo documentation at all stages of the Work documenting progress of Work for each day, encountered conflicts and issues, discovery, and final photo documentation showing the completed Work. Photos shall be organized and ordered by date, and time and date stamped. 3.05 EMPLOYEES AND SAFETY: A. Contractor shall maintain at all times strict discipline of its employees, and Contractor shall not employ on the Work any person unfit or without sufficient knowledge, skill, and experience to perForm properly the job for which the employee was hired. B. Contractor shall be responsible to the Town for the acts, negligence and omissions of all direct and indirect employees and Subcontractors. The Contract Documents shall not be construed as creating any contractual relation between any subcontractor and the Town. C. Contractor shall provide for and oversee all safety orders and precautions necessary for the safe perFormance of the Work. Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for the safety of all employees and others whom the Work might affect, all work and materials incorporated into the Work, and all property and improvements on the Site and adjacent property. D. Catcalling or harassment of any persons in or adjacent to the Site by Contractor's workforce will not be tolerated. Any incidents shall result in immediate dismissal of the individual(s) involved. 3.06 SATURDAY, SUNDAY AND HOLIDAY WORK: A. Work shall normally not be perFormed on Saturdays, Sundays, observed holidays, or outside of the daytime working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., or as indicated on the construction schedule. Lane closures are restricted to normal working hours on streets, except for such Work as may be necessary for proper care, maintenance, and protection of Work already completed, or in cases where the Work would be endangered or if hazards to life or property would result. B. If Contractor believes it necessary to work on Saturdays, Sundays, holidays, or at night, Contractor shall make prior arrangements with the Town and receive written approval at least forty-eight (48) hours before such time so that inspection and engineering services can be provided. Such approval may be revoked by the Town if Contractor fails to maintain adequate equipment and lighting at night for the proper prosecution, control, and inspection of the Work. If Work is perFormed without the Town's prior approval, and as a result the Town had not assigned inspectors to the Work, the Town may declare Work perFormed during this period of time defective, solely on the grounds that it was not properly inspected. C. Any Work perFormed on a Saturday, Sunday, holiday, or night shall be at Contractor's risk in terms of extra costs, extra Work, or unforeseen conditions. 3.07 TEMPORARY FENCING AND BARRICADES: A. General. Contractor shall provide temporary fencing and barricades as necessary to complete the Work and shall be included in the contract price, unless otherwise specified. B. Materials. Fences and barriers may be new or used, but shall be suitable for intended purpose, structurally adequate and neat in appearance, and shall be maintained in such manner for the duration of the Project. C. Barrier Fencinq. Barrier fencing may be used when approved by the Project Manager for short duration Work areas. 1. Barrier fencing shall be free standing steel pedestrian barricades with a minimum height of 4'-0" and able to withstand a wind load of eighty (80) m.p.h. Barrier fencing is the preferred method of delineation between pedestrians and construction in the pedestrian Village and mall areas. The intent is to provide a barrier without restricting the openness of the Village and mall areas to maintain the appearance that the Village and mall areas are open to our guests. 2. Traffic cones and barrier tape shall only be allowed as a temporary barriers and restricted to durations of four (4) hours or less. Contractor shall use Banner Guard, imprinted with "CAUTION: CONSTRUCTION AREA", or an approved equal. 3. Where required or as directed by the Project Manager, Contractor shall provide adequate plywood construction barrier fencing to enclose partially completed areas of construction that pose a safety hazard to the public. Where necessary there shall be a lockable entrance. 4. Barrier fencing may be removed only upon approval of the Project Manager. D. Portable Chain Link Fencinq. Portable chain link fencing shall be used to enclose and protect the Site as needed for the duration of the Project. Portable chain link fencing shall be open mesh, 6 feet in height, with top and bottom rails, with green screen coverings unless safety or sight distances for pedestrians and/or vehicles is impaired, and lockable gates. Posts shall be spaced a maximum of 8 feet on center, and be equipped with cross bar bases for stability. Bases shall be weighed down with sandbags if required. E. Barricades, Warninq Signs and Liqhts. 1. Contractor shall erect and maintain barricades, lights, danger signals, and warning signs in accordance with ANSI D6.1 and the approved Traffic Control Plan, and where applicable the "Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways", U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, including State of Colorado supplements. 2. Contractor shall adequately barricade and post all open cuts in the project area. Illuminate barricades and obstructions at night; keep safety lights burning from sunset to sunrise. 3. Contractor shall use street plates over open cuts and position excavation equipment to minimize any open trenches. 4. Contractor shall install barrier tape where necessary, and keep a minimum of two rolls on Site at all times. 5. Contractor shall cover pipes, hoses, and power lines crossing sidewalks and walkways with troughs using beveled edge boards. 6. Contractor shall remove barriers no longer needed upon approval by the Project Manager. 3.08 TEMPORARY PEDESTRIAN WALKWAYS AND ACCESS: Contractor shall provide temporary walkways and ramps, in compliance with the Traffic Control Plan, that are constructed of wood, asphalt, or other reasonable material, and signed to provide safe access to businesses and residences during the Project. Walkways shall be a minimum of six feet (6') in width, and comply with ADA requirements. 3.09 SIGNAGE: Temporary informational and directional signs shall be provided as necessary to redirect pedestrians and vehicles and be mounted for easy reading. 3.10 PRIVATE PROPERTY: Contractor shall not enter upon private property for any purpose without first obtaining permission, and Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and private property, trees, fences, monuments and underground structures on and adjacent to the Site and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage or injury thereto. Property damaged by Contractor shall be, at Contractor's expense, repaired or replaced and left in as good condition as found. 3.11 DAMAGE DUE TO CRIMINAL ACTIVITY: Contractor shall take all necessary steps to protect the Site from vandalism, theft, and other criminal activity. Contractor shall be solely responsible to repair any damage caused by vandalism, including the removal of graffiti, at Contractor's own cost. The Contract Price shall not be increased to reimburse Contractor for such costs. 3.12 CLEANUP AND DUST CONTROL: A. Contractor shall keep the Site and adjoining ways free of waste material and rubbish caused by its employees or subcontractors. Contractor shall also keep the Site clear and free of all weather impediments (i.e. snow, hail, ice and water) as necessary to complete the Work. Contractor shall remove all such waste material, rubbish, and impediments daily during construction, together with all tools, equipment, machinery and surplus materials. Each day, Contractor shall establish and enforce a daily system for collecting and disposing of waste materials from the Site. Hauling of debris to a legal dump or landfill is required at least weekly. Contractor shall take measures to prevent spread of waste materials off the Site by wind. B. Contractor shall provide suitable trash containers at a central collection point on the Site. Burning or burying of waste materials is prohibited. Disposal of volatile fluids and wastes in storm sewers, sanitary sewers, septic systems, or into streams or waterways is prohibited. Hazardous materials shall be immediately removed from the Site, and all volatile wastes shall be kept in covered containers. Contractor shall recycle as much as possible. All excavated material shall be used as soon as possible. Waste concrete shall be removed from the Site and legally disposed of by masonry and concrete installers. C. Contractor shall use measures to prevent and control dust within the area affected by the Work. D. At completion of the Work, Contractor shall remove from and about the Site all Work-related materials, equipment, machinery, tools, fencing, waste, and rubbish, and Contractor shall also conduct general cleanup operations on adjacent properties which were disturbed by the Work. E. If Contractor fails to perForm the cleanup or dust control required by this Section, after written notice, the Town may cause the cleanup to be performed at Contractor's expense. Upon receipt of a statement for such cleanup, Contractor shall pay to the Town the costs incurred by the Town for such cleanup, or the Town shall have the right to withhold said amount from any payment due to Contractor. F. If a dispute arises among Contractor, others performing Work at the Site and the Town as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the Site and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Town may clean up and may back charge proportionate costs to each of the involved parties. 3.13 SANITARY FACILITIES: A. Sanitary facilities for the use of all persons employed on the Project, properly screened from public observation, shall be provided in sufficient numbers and in such a manner and at such points as approved by the Town. The contents shall be removed and disposed of in a satisfactory manner. B. The sanitary conveniences specified above shall be the obligation and responsibility of Contractor. The facilities shall be made available to all other contractors, subcontractors, and inspection personnel in the Site. C. Contractor shall supply sufficient drinking water from approved sources to all of its employees. D. Full compensation for compliance with this Section is included in the Contract Price, and no additional compensation shall be provided. 3.14 PROTECTION OF WORK: A. General. Contractor shall obtain the advice and recommendations of subcontractors for procedures to protect their Work. When the subcontractor is no longer working in an area, Contractor shall provide protective measures and materials to ensure that each element will be protected from damage or deterioration until Final Acceptance. B. Cold Weather Protection. Contractor shall provide temporary heat or blanket heating required by construction activities, for curing or drying of completed Work or protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Contractor shall provide freeze protection for all temporary water service piping. C. Existing Trees and Vegetation. Contractor shall protect existing trees and other vegetation to remain in place, against damage to roots, trunks or branches, and fence or guard areas not to be disturbed. Contractor shall not stockpile materials within drip line. D. Environmental Protection. Contractor shall conduct the Work to comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted 3.15 CONSTRUCTION STAGING: All construction staging areas shall be located within the Site. The boundaries of construction staging areas shall be approved by the Town. Construction staging areas shall be used for material storage, parking for equipment, and employees' vehicles. A construction trailer shall not be required, but may be used if the location of the trailer is approved by the Town. Upon Final Completion, all staging areas shall be clean and restored to their original condition. No additional compensation shall be provided to Contractor for cleaning of construction staging areas. 3.16 PAYMENT OF ROYALTIES AND LICENSE FEES: Contractor agrees to pay all royalties and license fees necessary for the Work, and to defend against all actions for infringement of copyright or patent rights, and to save and hold the Town harmless from such actions. 3.17 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS AND REGULATIONS: A. Contractor shall comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders in any manner relating to the Work, including without limitation the Urban Drainage and Flood Control District Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, CDOT Specifications, AASHTO Specifications, International Building Code as adopted by the Town of Vail, International Fire Code as adopted by the Town of Vail, International Mechanical Code as adopted by the Town of Vail, International Plumbing Code as adopted by the Town of Vail, International Fuel Gas Code as adopted by the Town of Vail, International Energy Conservation Code as adopted by the Town of Vail, International PerFormance Code as adopted by the Town of Vail, Uniform Code for the Abatement of Dangerous Buildings (1997), National Electrical Code, Americans with Disabilities Act, and the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways, all current editions as of the Bid Due Date. If any provision of the Contract Documents is at variance therewith, Contractor shall notify the Project Manager promptly. B. In case of any discrepancy between any of the requirements set forth in paragraph A above, the more stringent requirement shall apply. If any questions arise as to which requirement is more stringent than another, the Project Manager shall be authorized to determine which is more stringent, and the Project Manager's decision shall be final. C. Contractor shall take all reasonable measures to reduce noise pollution from construction operations and to be in compliance with the Town's noise ordinance. 3.18 SUBCONTRACTORS: A. Contractor shall furnish to the Project Manager at the time the Construction Contract is executed, a list of names of subcontractors to whom Contractor proposes to award the portions of the Work to be subcontracted by Contractor. B. Contractor shall not employ a subcontractor to whose employment the Town reasonably objects, nor shall Contractor be required to hire a subcontractor to whose employment Contractor reasonably objects. C. All Work perFormed by subcontractors shall be perFormed under a written contract between Contractor and subcontractor that conforms to the provisions of the Contract Documents, and shall incorporate the relevant provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.19 CORRECTIVE WORK: When any Work does not conform to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall make the necessary corrections so that the Work will so conform. Such corrections shall be accomplished within the time period approved by the Project Manager. Failure to complete such required corrections within the time period required shall constitute a breach of the Contract. 3.20 TAXES, LICENSES AND PERMITS: A. Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses necessary for the prosecution of the Work. The obtaining of all permits and licenses shall be coordinated with the schedule so as to not delay the Work. The Town shall pay all costs of permits and licenses obtained from the Town, but all such permits and licenses shall be obtained and all typical procedures shall be followed. B. This Project is exempt from state and local sales tax (98-02395). C. Contractor and all subcontractors shall be registered in the Town, and shall obtain and pay for contractor's registration at the Town of Vail Department of Community Development, 75 S. Frontage Road, Vail, CO 81657. 3.21 SURVEYING & LAYOUT: A. The Town will furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, and legal limitations for the Project, and a legal description of the Site. The Town will provide base datum, including control points for reference. Contractor shall check all Town- established control points, and verify and document their accuracy prior to using them for surveying control. Contractor shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Town. Contractor shall report to the Project Manager when any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel. B. Contractor shall perform all necessary construction surveying and staking. The required surveying shall consist of the office preparation, construction surveying, calculating, drafting, and staking necessary for of all elements of the Project. Layout of Site elements will be accomplished either by means of coordinates or traditional baseline method or a combination of both. Contractor shall furnish all personnel, materials, traffic control, and incidentals necessary to perForm the required construction surveying. C. The contractor is solely responsible for the coordination of all layout required for the proper installation of all material and labor incorporated in to the project and to ensure that the work is installed in accordance with the contract documents including such material and labor that may be supplied and installed by the owner under separate contract D. All surveying equipment, including Electronic Distance Meters ("EDMs"), tapes, tribrachs, theodolites, total stations, GPS receivers and levels shall be calibrated prior to the start of Work. EDMs, total stations, and GPS receivers shall be checked on a National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration ("NOAA") calibrated baseline. Equipment calibration accuracy and adjustments made to meet requirements specified in the CDOT Survey Manual shall be documented. E. The surveying shall be done under the supervision of a Professional Land Surveyor ("P.L.S.") who is experienced and competent in construction surveying and registered in the State of Colorado. Referencing, setting and restoring land monuments and the determination of property lines shall comply with Section 629 of the CDOT specifications. The P.L.S. shall be available to review Work, resolve problems and make decisions in a timely manner. F. Contractor shall: 1. Establish horizontal and vertical control for the Project; 2. Provide all construction surveying for line and grade; 3. Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, establish and maintain benchmarks and other dependable markers to set the lines and levels for the Work and elsewhere on the Site as needed to properly locate every element of the Work; 4. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb; 5. Calculate and measure required dimensions as shown within recognized tolerances; 6. Advise entities engaged in construction activities of the marked lines and levels provided for use; 7. Establish all necessary benchmarks on Site for layout and grading based on the control points shown on the plans; and 8. Locate and lay out Site improvements, including pavements, paver patterns, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility line gradients and elevations, invert, planters, irrigation lines, and other features by instrumentation and similar appropriate means. G. For layout procedures, Contractor shall: 1. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks, before proceeding with the layout; 2. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points; 3. Preserve permanent reference points during construction; 4. Refrain from changing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval; 5. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points, or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations; 6. Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points; 7. Base replacements on the original survey control points; and 8. Establish and maintain a minimum of two temporary benchmarks on the Site, referencing data established by survey control points. H. A Pre-survey Conference shall be held prior to performing any surveying. The Project Manager, Contractor's Superintendent and the P.L.S. shall attend. A surveying schedule shall be submitted to the Project Manager prior to the conference. Acceptable staking placement intervals for the various construction survey control operations shall be reviewed by the Project Manager at the Pre-Survey Conference. I. Accuracy of surveys and survey tolerances shall be as specified in the CDOT Survey Manual. J. All changes in lines and grades required by field conditions and all discrepancies in grades, alignment, location or dimensions detected by Contractor shall be immediately submitted to the Project Manager in writing and documented. K. At Substantial Completion, Contractor shall supply the Project Manager with a digital file of as-built survey information of all installed and discovered Site and utility improvements including all primary and secondary services for water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, gas, electrical, snowmelt and fountain mechanical systems, utility trenches and vaults, irrigation systems, telecommunications and fiber optics (cable and telephone) and all conduit connections. This does not relieve Contractor from providing other as-built information. The as-built survey shall be provided in AutoCAD 2004 or newer version, unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager. 3.22 UTILITIES A. The Work shall be coordinated with all impacted utility companies, districts, associations, agencies, and residents located near the Site. Contractor shall conduct the coordination meeting and provide summary minutes. B. Contractor shall determine the actual location of all existing utilities prior to starting any Work. Contractor shall contact utility companies for field locations prior to the start of Construction Work, and shall contact all utilities at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to beginning excavation or grading. If the exact location and depth of existing underground utilities are unknown, Contractor shall perform all necessary exploratory excavation to locate these facilities which may affect the Work prior to beginning construction. Contractor shall obtain required locates and Contractor shall include the information on the plans. Contractor shall resolve any utility discrepancies. Contractor shall be liable for all damage done to existing utilities in the perFormance of the Work. C. If Contractor requests that utility companies relocate utilities for Contractor's convenience, such relocation shall be at Contractor's expense. D. The time of performance under the Contract shall not be extended to account for repair of utilities which are damaged by Contractor. E. Contractor shall engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to or maintain an existing service, and arrange with the company for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary service. F. Contractor shall maintain utility services (including water, gas, sewer, cable, electric, and telephone) to all abutting property. Any interruptions and the duration of the interruption shall be approved by the Project Manager at least five (5) days prior to interruption. All combined utility interruptions shall be limited to a maximum of six (6) hours per day with any single utility service interrupted for a maximum of four (4) hours per day. Contractor shall endeavor to best coordinate the utility disruptions with the impacted businesses and residents. Contractor shall coordinate all disruptions in all utilities with all Town departments, emergency service entities including the Fire Department, Police Department, Vail Dispatch, alarm companies, and Village businesses and residents. G. Contractor shall provide and maintain, at its own expense, an adequate supply of water and electricity required for the Work. Contractor shall install and maintain supply connections and lines satisfactory to the Project Manager, and prior to Final Completion, Contractor shall remove the supply lines at its expense. 3.23 WATER CONTROL: A. Contractor shall take such precautions as necessary to construct the Work in a dry condition, and Contractor shall provide for drainage, dewatering, and control of all surFace and subsurface water and shall erect any necessary temporary structures or other facilities at its own expense. B. Contractor, at its own expense, shall furnish all necessary equipment and materials required to control the surface and subsurFace water in all the areas from the commencement of Work through Final Completion. C. Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing, transporting, and installing all materials and equipment, well points, pumping, channelization, diversion, damming, or other means of controlling surFace water and ground waters. D. At least ten (10) days prior to the first anticipated date of discharge, Contractor shall obtain a Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity Permit from the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment ("CDPHE). E. At least thirty (30) days prior to the first anticipated date of dewatering discharge, Contractor shall obtain a Construction Dewatering Permit from the CDPHE. 3.24 EROSION CONTROL: A. Contractor shall provide an erosion/sediment control plan for use during construction. The plan shall include Site specific details showing the type, location, and quantity of BMP's to be used. The erosion/sediment control plan shall be designed to prevent sediment from leaving the construction area, and shall comply with all applicable law, including without limitation the Urban Drainage and Flood Control "Erosion Control Manual." Special attention shall be given to prevent sediment from entering into any wetland area. The Project Manager may direct Contractor to modify the erosion and sediment control plan during construction as conditions warrant. B. Contractor shall furnish, install, clean, and maintain all erosion control measures during the Work and vegetation establishment, and remove and dispose of all erosion control measures upon completion of the Work. C. Contractor shall clean any soil, dirt, or debris tracked onto any adjacent streets. Within two (2) hours of notification by the Town that any adjacent streets require cleaning, Contractor shall clean such streets or the Town may have the streets cleaned and deduct the cost of such cleaning from the Contract Price. D. Contractor shall assign an employee to serve as the Erosion Control Supervisor (ECS). The ECS shall be experienced in all aspects of construction and have satisfactorily completed an ECS training program authorized by the State of Colorado. Proof that this requirement has been met shall be submitted to the Project Manager at least ten (10) days prior to the beginning of any Work. A list of authorized ECS training programs will be provided by the Project Manager upon request. E. Riprap for check dam shall be 4-6" angular rock. All other materials, including bales, silt bags, and sediment fencing shall be designated on the erosion and sediment control plan. F. Contractor shall remove sediment from upstream of check dams, silt fence and sediment traps on an as needed basis as determined by the Project Manager. Sediment removed shall be disposed of by Contractor. G. The erosion and sediment control features shall be installed prior to clearing and grubbing and shall remain in place throughout construction. Contractor shall clean sediment deposited at the check dams during the Work, and that material shall be removed and disposed of by Contractor. H. Contractor shall provide mud traps, rugs, or other features to prevent the tracking of dirt and mud into businesses and residences. I. All erosion control materials shall be removed upon completion of the Project. 3.25 TRAFFIC CONTROL: A. At the Pre-construction Conference, Contractor shall submit five (5) copies of a Traffic Control Plan for review by the Town. The Traffic Control Plan shall discuss all requirements of this Section. B. Contractor shall furnish all necessary flag persons; erect and maintain warning lights, advance warning signs, detour signs, barricades, temporary fence, and sufficient safeguards around all excavations, embankments, obstructions; and perForm any other Work necessary for the protection of all Work being perFormed, and for the safety of the public and pedestrian traffic, as well as motor vehicles. All signs and barricades shall conform to the current Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. C. Contractor shall at all times take proper precautions for the protection of and replacement or restoration of landscaping, driveway culverts, street intersection culverts or aprons, irrigation crossings and systems, mailboxes, driveway approaches, signs, existing utilities, and all other public and private installations that may be encountered during the Work. D. No driveway or private alley shall be blocked without prior written permission from the resident who would be affected by such blocking, with a copy to the Town. E. No road shall be closed at any time. F. Contractor shall advise the Police Department, school districts, trash services, and homeowners of any lane closures, including dates and times. G. It is anticipated that a large number of employees will use automobiles for transportation to and from the Site. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to: maintain, protect, and control traffic in the vicinity of and in the Site; restrict parking on streets near the Site; and provide necessary parking areas for all employees in suitable locations as approved by the Town. H. Contractor shall be limited to existing roadways and streets for access to the Project. All construction related equipment, material handling, and deliveries shall access the project site by means identified by the Project Manager. 1. Contractor shall keep clean and free from debris all access roads and streets at all times. This includes hauled materials and supplies, rubbish and engine fluids. 2. Contractor is strongly encouraged to use diapers on all vehicles to prevent engine and other fluid spills on the streets and roadways. 3. All spills of engine and other fluids on the streets and roadways shall be cleaned by Contractor promptly. I. Parking for construction equipment shall be set forth in the Traffic Control Plan. J. Employees of Contractor and subcontractors shall park their personal vehicles in designated area. Vanpooling from designated park and ride sites is encouraged. No parking fees will be waived for this Project. K. Parking of any vehicle or equipment is not permitted within the Site that has not been approved in the Traffic Control Plan. L. All Town bus stops shall be maintained and free of construction activity to allow for public use and through bus traffic. If a bus stop or bus stop area must be under construction, a temporary bus stop, including Town benches, trash receptacles and bus stop sign post, shall be located within one hundred feet (100') of the existing bus stop and be maintained for the duration of the Work. The bus stop location shall be approved by the Project Manager. Bus Shelters need not be relocated or constructed unless specifically noted in the Contract Documents. 3.26 INSTALLATION: A. Contractor shall ensure that the subcontractor of each element of the Work examines the conditions of the substrate to receive the Work, dimensions and spaces adjacent, tolerances, interFacing with other elements and services, and the conditions under which the Work will be performed. Contractor shall require each subcontractor to notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper or timely completion of the Work, and ensure that they do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the subcontractor. B. Contractor shall inspect materials prior to installation, and reject damaged and defective items. Contractor shall re-check measurements and dimensions before starting each installation. C. Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, if those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. D. Contractor shall provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Work shall be secured true to line and level, allowing for expansion and building movement. E. Contractor shall install each component during weather conditions that will ensure the best possible results for quality and the Project schedule. Completed Work shall be isolated from incompatible materials as necessary to prevent deterioration. F.: Contractor shall provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work, and arrange joints in exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Contractor shall refer questionable choices to the Project Manager for final decision. G. Where mounting heights are not indicated, Contractor shall install individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Contractor shall refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Project Manager for final decision. H. The Contract Documents are diagrammatic, showing certain physical relationships of the various elements and systems and their interFacing with other elements and systems. Establishment and coordination of these relationships is the exclusive responsibility of Contractor. Drawings shall not be scaled. Contractor shall lay out and arrange all elements to contribute to safety, efficiency and to carry the harmony of design throughout the Work. In case of conflict or un-dimensioned locations, Contractor shall verify required positioning with the Project Manager. I. Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, patching, and repairing damage as a result of completing the Work or making its parts fit together properly. 3.27 COMMUNICATION: A. Contractor shall direct all communications to the Town regarding the Work to the attention of the Project Manager. B. Contractor shall have at the Site at all times as its agent, a competent superintendent capable of reading and thoroughly understanding the Contract Documents and being thoroughly experienced in the type of Work being perFormed. C. Progress reports and progress/manpower schedules shall be updated and submitted to the Project Manager on a weekly basis, or at such other times as the Project Manager may request. Contractor shall also forward to the Project Manager, at the end of each month, an itemized report of the delivery status of major and critical items of purchased equipment and material, including Drawings and the status of shop and field fabricated Work. If the completion of any part of the Work or the delivery of materials is behind the approved schedule, Contractor shall submit a plan acceptable to the Project Manager for bringing the Work up to schedule. The Town shall have the right to withhold progress payments for the Work if Contractor fails to update and submit the progress/manpower schedule and reports as specified. Any changes to the approved schedule shall be reviewed and approved by the Town. 3.28 MEETINGS, SCHEDULES AND COORDINATION: A. General. All construction activities shall be coordinated with the Project Manager. Contractor, Project Manager and other key design and project personnel shall have coordination meetings at least weekly. Contractor shall, where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures required for coordination, including such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. Contractor shall provide minutes of all meetings and submit to attendees for review and record keeping. B. Pre-Construction Conference. 1. Contractor shall coordinate the Pre-Construction Conference. Contractor's designated supervisor(s) assigned to the Work and all necessary key design and Project personnel shall attend this meeting. Contractor shall, at a minimum, provide the following to the Town at the Pre-Construction Conference: the construction schedules; a detailed estimate of partial payments for the Work; the Traffic Control Plan; a detailed plan showing Site access and staging areas; and names and contact phone numbers of all subcontractors. 2. The suggested agenda topics are as follows: Tentative construction schedule Work priorities Critical Work sequencing Designation of responsible personnel Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders Procedures for processing Applications for Payment Distribution of Contract Documents Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples Preparation of Record Documents Use of the premises Office, Work and storage areas Equipment deliveries and priorities Community impact mitigation: maintaining access, loading deliveries, etc Public Information Program Safety procedures Security Housekeeping Working days and hours Temporary construction facilities and utilities 3. Contractor shall submit to the Town for review and approval a construction schedule including: proposed daily construction hours; details of all construction items; start and finish dates; confirmation and dates for coordinating all utility relocation and/or interruptions; installation and removal of temporary facilities, preparation and timing of submittals; timing of progress meetings; Project close-out activities; and the same information for all subcontractor(s). The schedule shall not be changed without prior notification and review by the Town. The schedule shall be in the form of a chart of suitable scale to indicate approximately the percentage of Work scheduled for completion at any time. Contractor shall enter on the chart the actual progress on a weekly basis and shall deliver said progress schedule to the Town prior to the weekly Contractor/Project Manager coordination meetings. 4. Contractor shall also submit a schedule of the anticipated manpower by title and duty. The manpower proposed shall be adequate for orderly flow of Work and completion within the time specified in the Contract Documents. C. Space. Contractor shall administer the allocation of available space at the Site equitably among entities needing access and space, so as to produce the best overall efficiency in the perFormance of the Work. Contractor shall schedule deliveries so as to minimize the space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment within the Site, but shall not unduly risk delays in the Work. All equipment and material shall be removed from the Site during No Construction Activity periods. 3.29 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: A. Within 10 days after the Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall prepare a separate listing and schedule organized by related specification section number, showing the principal submittals and initial submittal dates. The schedule shall be in chronological order. B. Contractor shall coordinate the preparation and processing of submittals with the perFormance of Work items, and shall transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of perFormance of related Work to avoid delay. C. Contractor shall coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. The Project Manager may withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. D. Contractor shall allow seven (7) days for processing of each submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Project Manager at least seven (7) days in advance of the Work to permit processing. A review of a submittal causing a resubmittal constitutes a new submittal and consequently an additional seven (7) days for processing shall be accommodated by Contractor with no extension of Contract Time. E. Submittals are not Contract Documents. Contractor shall review all submittals for compliance with the Contract Documents. The review by the Project Manager shall not constitute a change to the Contract Documents or relieve Contractor from compliance to any part of the Contract Documents. F. Contractor shall package each submittal appropriately, and use a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than Contractor will be returned without action. The transmittal shall record relevant information and requests for data, and shall note deviations from Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. G. Contractor shall review all submittals for compliance with the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work. Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by Contractor may be returned without action. H. Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Project Manager. I. All submittals subject to review and approval by the Town of Vail Building Department or other regulatory agency shall be submitted in a form as required by the Town of Vail Building Department or regulatory agency. 3.30 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Contractor shall submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale, highlighting deviations from the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Shop Drawings shall include the following information: Dimensions; Identification of products and materials included; Compliance with specified standards; Notation of coordination requirements; and Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. B. Acceptance of Shop Drawings by the Project Manager is not meant to be a review for completeness or accuracy of details, dimensions, quantities, installation or construction means, methods, techniques, processes, sequences, procedures, safety issues, nor performance, all of which remain the responsibility of Contractor. C. Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of each Shop Drawing. 3.31 PRODUCT DATA: A. Contractor shall assemble Product Data into a single submittal for each element of Work. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, Contractor shall submit such data as Drawings. Where applicable include maintenance manual. B. Contractor shall mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, Contractor shall mark copies to indicate the applicable information. C. Product Data shall include the following information: Manufacturer's printed recommendation; Compliance with recognized trade association standards; Application of testing agency labels and seals; Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement; and Notation of coordination requirements. D. Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of Product Data. 3.32 SAMPLES: A. Contractor shall submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed, including partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components. B. Samples shall include the following: Generic description of the Sample; Sample source; Product name or name of manufacturer or supplier. Compliance with recognized standards; and Availability and delivery time. C. Where variation in characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, Contractor shall submit multiple units (not less than three (3)), that show approximate limits of the variations. D. Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, Contractor shall submit three (3) sets, and one (1) will be returned marked with the action taken. The transmittal shall indicate special requests regarding disposition of Samples. E. The Project Manager shall review Samples for a final check of elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. F. Contractor shall maintain one (1) complete set of Samples, as returned, at the Site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of Work. 3.33 RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. Contractor shall maintain on a weekly basis, drawings and specifications for all disciplines of Work that depict the details of all Work on the Project. Drawings shall be marked in red pencil with any sketches attached, each with date of modification. The as-built set shall be kept on Site and become the basis for the Record Documents. B. Contractor shall maintain a clean, undamaged set of black line prints of Drawings, and shall: 1. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown; 2. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately; 3. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date; 4. During construction, mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work; 5. Mark new information that is important to the Project Manager, but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings; 6. Keep Record Documents current, by updating at least weekly, and avoid permanently concealing any Work until required information has been recorded; 7. Include horizontal and vertical location of all underground utilities and appurtenances, including storm sewer, referenced to permanent surFace improvements; 8. Include horizontal and vertical locations of underground irrigation and electrical sleeving referenced to permanent surface improvements; 9. Provide the locations of both ends identified with locatable discs in the field, on a reproducible mylar drawing with a field log of all survey data; 10. Provide the location of clean-outs and other items requiring access or maintenance; and 11. At Substantial Completion, supply a digital computer file of the record drawings and one hard copy to the Project Manager. C. Contractor shall maintain on Site, separate from documents used for construction, one complete set of Contract Documents, including all Change Orders, correspondence and reports. D. In addition to a hard copy, Record Drawings shall be provided in AutoCAD format acceptable to the Project Manager. 3.34 PROJECT CLOSEOUT AND TRAINING A. Documents. Upon completion of the Work and prior to Final Acceptance, Contractor shall provide the following Closeout documents in hard copy and electronic copy for review and approval: 1. As-Built Record Drawings. 2. Operating and Maintenance Manuals and documentation for all installed equipment, systems and furnishes. 3. All Manufacturer Warranties as required within the Contract Documents where they shall be held in the name of the Town. 4. Photographic and video documentation as required by the Contract Documents. 5. All other documentation pertinent to the Work as required by the Contract Documents and deemed pertinent by Contractor or Town. B. Trainin . Contractor shall provide training on all systems constructed and installed as part of the Work. The training shall be provided to the Town by a qualified technician/trainer for each specific portion of the Work. The training sessions shall be scheduled with the Project Manager and videotaped by Contractor for future use by the Town. All operating and maintenance manuals and warranties shall be reviewed with the Town at this time. 3.35 ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND HISTORICAL DISCOVERIES: A. Contractor shall inform the Town of any evidence which might suggest to a layperson that archaeological or historical materials may be present in the Site. Upon making such a discovery, Contractor shall do whatever is necessary to avoid disturbing the Site. This may require that Contractor's activities be redirected or stopped until the Town determines how to proceed. B. As a result of Contractor's efforts to preserve the potential discovery at the Site, if Contractor's activities are delayed for longer than eight (8) normal Work hours, Contractor shall prepare accounting information to support an adjustment to the Contract Price. 3.36 RESTORATION: A. Contractor has field inspected the Site and fully understands that existing landscaping and improvements are present within the Site. Such existing improvements shall be protected. Any damage or disruption to the public right-of-way, drainage easements, Town property, or private property related to the Work shall be restored to pre- existing or better condition. B. Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all existing improvements, including irrigation systems and landscaping, damaged during Contractor's activities, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.37 FINAL CLEANING: Contractor shall be responsible for professionally cleaning all components of the Work prior to turnover to the Town. All Work shall be turned over in a new and operational condition, free from all dirt, debris, smudges, scratches, dents, dings, grease, oil, discolorations and hazards. This includes all internal and external mechanical, electrical, plumbing and special systems. PART 4. TOWN'S RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES 4.01 PROJECT MANAGER: The Project Manager shall administer the Work, including the finalization of any change orders, pay estimates and payments of such, acceptance of Work, and other matters as stipulated in the Contract Documents. The Project Manager will issue with reasonable promptness such written interpretations of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as the Project Manager determines necessary. 4.02 TESTING: In addition to the materials testing performed by Contractor, the Town may conduct Quality Assurance testing at its own discretion. 4.03 TOWN'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK: If Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Town to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Town may, without prejudice to other remedies the Town may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including the Town's expenses and compensation for any additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If payments due Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Town. 4.04 STOP WORK ORDER: If Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Town may issue a written order to Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated. However, the right of the Town to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other person. 4.05 OTHER CONTRACTS: A. The Town reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with the Work. Contractor shall cooperate with all other contractors so that their work is not impeded by the Work, and Contractor shall give other contractors access to the Site necessary to perForm their contracts. Specifically, Contractor shall afford utility service companies and other contractors, reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of Work, and shall properly connect and coordinate its Work with theirs, and shall conduct his operations so as to minimize the interFerence with theirs, as directed by the Project Manager. Contractor shall conduct its operations and cooperate with the other parties so as to minimize interference with this other work. B. If any part of the Work depends on proper execution or results upon the work of another contractor or utility service company, Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Project Manager in writing any patent or apparent defects or deficiencies in such work. Contractor's failure so to report shall constitute an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper for integration with the Work, and such acceptance by Contractor shall render Contractor responsible for subsequent correction of any such work. C. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the Work required to make it come together properly and integrate with work by other contractors. Contractor shall not cut, excavate or otherwise alter work of others without written consent of the Project Manager. D. Should a dispute arise as to the rights of Contractor and another, the Project Manager shall be the sole decision maker and the Project Manager's decision shall be final and binding on Contractor. 4.06 PUBLIC INFORMATION PROGRAM: A. General. An extensive public process has been utilized in the planning and design of this Project. The public process, considered an integral part of the Project, will continue throughout the Work. Contractor shall be integrated into the process prior to and during construction. The intent of the Public Information Program is to work together with the businesses and residents towards a common goal. B. Community Meetinqs. Contractor's superintendent shall attend community meetings during the Project. Contractor shall present information on impacts and mitigation in terms of equipment, material deliveries, excavation and backfill operations, utility disruptions, pedestrian and vehicle access and traffic control, and a detailed season schedule, with updates on overall project progress. C. Notifications. Contractor shall provide hand delivered fliers/door hangers to the impacted public businesses and residents with Project information and contacts prior to the commencement of Work, and provide critical information (i.e. traffic control changes, access impacts and utility impacts) as needed in the same manner throughout the duration of the Project. D. Media. The Town of Vail Public Information Officer will be responsible for updating the media and general public with project status information, provided that Contractor shall cooperate with the efforts of the Town of Vail Public Information Officer. 4.07 PARTIAL UTILIZATION: A. The Town may use completed portions of the Work that may be accomplished prior to Substantial Completion, subject to the following: 1. The Town may request permission to use any part of the Work which the Town believes to be substantially complete and which may be so used without significant interference with the Work. If Contractor agrees, Contractor will certify to the Town that said part of the Work is substantially complete. The Town shall thereafter have the right to exclude Contractor from any part of the Work which the Town uses. 2. The Town may also take over operation of a facility constituting part of the Work whether or not it is substantially complete if such facility is functionally and separately useable; provided that prior to any such takeover, the Town and Contractor have agreed as to the division of responsibilities between the Town Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance, correction period, heat, utilities and insurance with respect to such facility. 3. No occupancy of part of the Work or taking over of operations of a facility will be accomplished prior to acknowledgment from the insurers providing the property insurance on the Work that notice of such occupancy has been received and that said insurers, in writing, have effected the changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent to such use or occupancy by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. B. Partial use or occupancy of the Project by the Town shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in compliance with the Contract Documents. PART 5. TERMINATION 5.01 LABOR DISPUTES: Notwithstanding any other provision contained in this Contract, in the event of any picket or other form of labor dispute at the Site, Contractor shall continue to perForm the Work without interruption or delay. If Contractor ceases perFormance of the Work because of such picket or other form of labor dispute, the Town may terminate the services of Contractor after giving forty-eight (48) hours' written notice of its intent to do so. 5.02 DEFAULT: The Town may terminate this Contract upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor if Contractor defaults in the timely performance of any provision of the Contract Documents, or otherwise fails to perform the Work, or any part thereof, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Termination of the Contract by the Town shall not be the Town's exclusive remedy, and the Town may pursue such other remedies and actions lawfully available to the Town including, but not limited to, an action at law for damages against Contractor or any bonding agency issuing a bond hereunder, or an action in equity for injunctive relief. 5.03 CONVENIENCE: The Town may terminate this Contract for convenience upon seven (7) days written notice to Contractor. Contractor shall be paid for portions of Work completed, and if any portion of the Work was suspended, the appropriate adjustments for increases in costs and time caused by the suspension shall be made. PART 6. WARRANTIES: 6.01 WARRANTY OF FITNESS OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: Contractor represents and warrants to the Town that all equipment and materials used in the Work, and made a part of the Work, or placed permanently in the Work, shall be new unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. All equipment and materials used shall be of good quality, free of defects and in conformity with the Contract Documents. All equipment and materials not in conformity with the Contract Documents shall be considered defective. 6.02 GENERAL WARRANTY: A. Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all material furnished and Work performed by Contractor for a period of two (2) years from the date of Substantial Completion. Under this warranty, Contractor agrees to repair or replace, at its own expense and under the direction of the Project Manager, any portion of the Work which fails or is defective, unsound, unsatisfactory because of materials or workmanship, or which is not in conformity with the provisions of the Contract. Should Contractor fail to perForm any such Work within the warranty period after a request by the Town, the Town may withdraw from the Warranty Bond any and all amounts necessary to complete the required Work. The expiration of the warranty period shall in no way limit the Town's legal or equitable remedies, or the period in which such remedies may be asserted, for Work negligently or defectively perFormed. B. For any items of the Work not completed at Substantial Completion, the warranty for such Work shall not begin until such Work has been completed. The Project Manager shall note such items at Substantial Completion, and as they are completed, shall note the commencement dates for the warranty on such items. 6.03 REINSTATED WARRANTY: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected, Contractor shall reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty. 6.04 MANUFACTURERS' WARRANTIES: A. Written warranties made to the Town are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Town can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. B. The Town reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. C. The Town reserves the right to refuse to accept Work where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. D. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with Contractor. E. When a special warranty is required to be executed by Contractor, or Contractor and a Subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, Contractor shall prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties, and submit a draft to the Project Manager for approval prior to final execution. F. At Substantial Completion, Contractor shall compile each required warranty and bond and include the warranty documents in the Record Documents. PART 7. BONDS, INSURANCE AND INDEMNIFICATION 7.01 INDEMNIFICATION: A. Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Town and its officers, insurers, volunteers, representatives, agents, employees, heirs and assigns from and against all claims, liability, damages, losses, expenses and demands, including attorney fees, on account of injury, loss, or damage, including, without limitation, claims arising from bodily injury, personal injury, sickness, disease, death, property loss or damage, or any other loss of any kind whatsoever, which arise out of or are in any manner connected with this Contract or the Contract Documents, to the extent that such injury, loss or damage is attributable to the act, omission, error, professional error, mistake, negligence or other fault of Contractor, any subcontractor of Contractor, or any officer, employee, representative, or agent of Contractor or of any subcontractor of Contractor, or which arise out of any worker's compensation claim of any employee of Contractor or of any employee of any subcontractor of Contractor. B. Contractor, to the fullest extent permitted by law, shall defend, investigate, handle, respond and provide defense for and defend against any such liability, claims, damages, losses, expenses or demands at the sole expense of Contractor, or at the option of the Town, Contractor agrees to pay the Town or reimburse the Town for defense costs incurred by the Town in connection with any such liability, claims, damages, losses, expenses or demands. Contractor, to the fullest extent permitted by law, shall defend and bear all other costs and expenses related thereto, including court costs and attorney fees, whether or not such liability, claims or demands alleged are groundless, false or fraudulent. C. This indemnification provision is intended to comply with C.R.S. § 13-21-111.5(6), as amended, and shall be read as broadly as permitted to satisfy that intent. 7.02 NOTICE OF CLAIM: If Contractor receives any claim arising from the perFormance of the Work, Contractor shall notify the Town in writing of the nature of the claim within twenty-four (24) hours of receipt of the claim by Contractor. In this notice, Contractor shall provide evidence that Contractor has notified Contractor's insurer of the claim. Contractor shall keep the Town apprised of the disposition of the claim, and Contractor shall take all necessary action to resolve the claim and make restitution, if required, as quickly as possible. 7.03 INSURANCE: A. Contractor agrees to procure and maintain, at its own cost, a policy or policies of insurance sufficient to insure against all liability, claims, demands, and other obligations assumed by Contractor pursuant to this Contract. Such insurance shall be in addition to any other insurance requirements imposed by law. B. Contractor shall procure and maintain, and shall cause any subcontractor of Contractor to procure and maintain, the minimum insurance coverage listed below. Such coverage shall be procured and maintained with forms and insurers acceptable to the Town. In the case of any claims-made policy, the necessary retroactive dates and extended reporting periods shall be procured to maintain such continuous coverage. 1. Worker's compensation insurance to cover obligations imposed by applicable law for any employee engaged in the perFormance of Work under this Contract, and Employer's Liability insurance with minimum limits of one hundred thousand dollars ($100,000) each accident, five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000) disease — policy limit, and one hundred thousand dollars ($100,000) disease — each employee. Evidence of qualified self-insured status may be substituted for the worker's compensation requirements of this paragraph. 2. Commercial general liability insurance with minimum combined single limits of at least one million ($1,000,000) each occurrence and two million dollars ($2,000,000) general aggregate. The policy shall be applicable to all premises and operations. The policy shall include coverage for premises-operations, independent contractors protective, bodily injury, broad form property damage (including completed operations), personal injury (including coverage for contractual and employee acts), blanket contractual, products, and completed operations. The policy shall contain a severability of interests provision, and, to the extent that liability results from the acts or omissions of Contractor, the policy shall be endorsed to include the Town and the Town's officers, employees, and consultants as additional insureds. No additional insured endorsement shall contain any exclusion for bodily injury or property damage arising from completed operations. 3. Business Automobile liability insurance (including owned, non-owned and hired vehicles) with minimum combined single limits for bodily injury and property damage of at least one million dollars ($1,000,000) each person and one million ($1,000,000) each occurrence. 4. Umbrella insurance to protect Contractor against all claims in excess of the limits provided under the primary insurance policies. The liability limits of the umbrella liability policy shall not be less than five million dollars ($5,000,000). The umbrella liability should be written on an "Occurrence Form," with no more than ten thousand dollars ($10,000) retention for self-insured hazards, each occurrence. C. Any insurance carried by the Town, its officers, its employees, or its consultants shall be excess and not contributory insurance to that provided by Contractor. D. Contractor shall provide to the Town a certificate of insurance as evidence that policies providing the required coverages, conditions, and minimum limits are in full force and effect. Contractor shall not cancel, terminate or materially change the coverages afforded under the policies until at least thirty (30) days prior written notice has been given to the Town. The Town reserves the right to request and receive a certified copy of any policy and any endorsement thereto. E. Contractor shall name the following list as additional insureds under its Comprehensive or Commercial General Liability insurance: Town of Vail; Zehren and Associates, Inc, including all its officers, employees, consultants and agents. 7.04 SURETY BONDS: Contractor shall furnish a Payment and PerFormance Bond in the full amount of the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents, including the warranty. This bond shall remain in effect for the duration of the Project. After Final Completion and Acceptance, Contractor shall provide the Town with a Warranty Bond in the amount of thirty-three percent (33%) of the Contract Price, and this bond shall remain in effect for the full extent of the warranty period. The form and substance of all Surety Bonds shall be satisfactory to the Town. PART 8. PAYMENT 8.01 GENERAL PAYMENT REQUIREMENTS: A. Bid prices, as quoted in the Bid Schedule, shall constitute full compensation for labor, materials, equipment, rentals, overhead, profit and incidentals to complete all Work for each pay item and for all risk, loss, damage, or expense of whatever nature arising from the nature of the Work or prosecution thereof. B. Work or materials that are essential to the Work, but for which there are no pay items, will not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be included in other items of Work. C. Payment for Work listed as lump sum Bid items shall be paid for on a lump sum fixed price basis. A schedule of values shall be provided to the Project Manager for approval upon execution of the Contract. The schedule of values shall be the basis for reviewing Contractor's applications for Payment. D. Total overhead and profit on Contractor self-perFormed Work shall not exceed ten percent (10%). Total overhead and markup by Subcontractors shall not exceed ten percent (10%). Total overhead and markup for Contractor on Work perFormed by the Subcontractor shall not exceed five percent (5%). 8.02 MEASUREMENT: A. All measurements and payments will be based on Work completed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The method of ineasurement and basis of payment described are for the Work itemized in the Bid Form and in the Specifications. C. The determination of quantities of Work acceptably completed under the terms of the Contract Documents will be made by the Project Manager. Measurements will be taken according to the United States standard measure. Unless otherwise specified, all longitudinal measurements will be made horizontally, and computations will be based on the dimensions shown on drawings and details. Quantities will be rounded off to the nearest whole number. Measurement by cubic dimension shall be measured using mean length, width and height or thickness. Measurements by area shall be measured by square dimensions using mean length and width or radius, measured horizontally. Linear measurements shall be measured by linear dimension at the item centerline or mean chord. Lump sum or per each measurements shall be made as specified by the Bid description. Measurements by weight shall be measured by certified scales at the source of material or by certified truck tickets. When base course, topsoil, surface course, or any materials are measured by the cubic yard in the vehicle, such measurement shall be taken at the point of delivery. D. Contractor shall, in the presence of the Project Manager, verify all measurements and quantities required for payment by the unit price method. Contractor shall provide necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required for measurements. E. The capacity of all vehicles shall be plainly marked on said vehicle and the capacity or marking shall not be changed without permission of the Project Manager. The Project Manager may require all vehicles to have uniform capacity. F. The determination of payment for lump sum or fixed fee Work shall be made based on the approved schedule of values and percentages of Work completed within the timeframe of the pay application. 8.03 PROGRESS PAYMENTS: A. The Town shall make periodic progress payments to Contractor within thirty (30) days following the Project Manager's approval of the Work completed and pay application. 1. A progress payment shall be made only after Contractor has submitted an application for a progress payment on a form approved by the Project Manager, and if requested by the Project Manager, Contractor shall submit copies of invoices from subcontractors or supplies and partial waivers executed by each. 2. Each application for progress payment shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments have been applied to discharge in full all of Contractor's obligations reflected in prior Applications for Partial Payment. 3. Applications for progress payments may not include request for payment for portions of the Work for which Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor, unless such Work has been perFormed by another that Contractor intends to pay. 4. The Project Manager may request additional information to support the progress payment application. B. Progress payments shall be in an amount equal to ninety-five percent (95%) of the Work actually completed as determined by the Project Manager. The remaining five percent (5%) shall be held as retainage. Upon Final Acceptance, Contractor may request the release of retainage. C. If Contractor fails to complete any required Work within the time period agreed between Contractor and the Project Manager, or within any time period set forth in the Contract Documents, as modified or extended, the Town is expressly authorized to withhold any progress payment for such Work until such Work is completed. The Town may also refuse to make any progress payment because of subsequently discovered evidence of defective Work. D. No progress payment except final payment will be made for a sum of less than one thousand dollars ($1,000.00). 8.04 FINAL PAYMENT: A. Final payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities accepted by the Town multiplied by the unit price for Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. B. Upon final acceptance, Contractor may apply for final payment. The application shall include valid releases or waivers of all claims in connection with the Work. C. If the Town is satisfied that the Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents, the Town shall cause publication to commence of Notice of Final Settlement pursuant to C.R.S. § 38-26-107. If no claims are made, the Town shall make final payment, including any retainage, by the Owner's Representative in accordance with the Notice of Final Settlement. If any claim is made, the Town may withhold up to twice the amount of any asserted claim against Contractor until said claim has been resolved. 8.05 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: A. Because time is of the essence and delayed perFormance constitutes a compensable inconvenience to the Town and its residents, the liquidated damages established in this Section shall be enforced. Such damages are not a penalty. The following Liquidated Damages shall be due the Town from the Contractor for each calendar day the following milestones are not met, and damages shall accrue until said milestones are met, according to the following schedule: Liquidated Damages of $1,000 per day shall be assessed for each calendar day after June 27, 2014 if the Spring construction date is not per Section 2.02 and further described in Section 20.2.D. Liquidated Damages of $1,000 per day shall be assessed for each calendar day after October 1, 2014 if the Site is not ready for the Town to install the vending equipment as described in Section 2.02 Liquidated Damages of $1,000 per day shall be assessed for each calendar day after November 15, 2014 if the entire Project is not substantially complete. The Liquidated Damages shall increase to 2,500 per day if the entire project is not substantially complete by November 28, 2014 and will continue until substantial completion is attained. B. Allowing Contractor to continue and finish the Work or any part thereof after the Final Completion date shall not operate as a waiver on the part of the Town of any of its rights under the Contract Documents. Any liquidated damages assessed shall not relieve Contractor from liability for any damages or costs of other contractors caused by a failure of Contractor to complete the Work in the Contract Time. Liquidated damages may be deducted from any payment due Contractor or the retainage. If the liquidated damages exceed the amount owed to Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse the Town. 8.06 ORAL AGREEMENTS PROHIBITED: This Contract is expressly subject to the provisions of C.R.S. § 29-1-110(1), and Contractor acknowledges that neither the Town nor any employee or agent thereof is authorized to expend or contract for the expenditure of any monies in excess of those appropriated by the Vail Town Council. The Town acknowledges that sufficient funds have been appropriated to pay the Contract Price, but Contractor shall not rely upon the appropriation of any funds in addition to those already appropriated unless and until the same are lawfully appropriated by the Vail Town Council. 8.07 ITEMS NOT INCLUDED IN BID: No additional compensation shall be paid for any costs or services listed in the Contract Documents, but not specifically listed in the Bid as a Bid item. 8.08 CHANGES IN QUANTITY: A. Except as otherwise provided in this Part 8, the unit Bid price shown in the Bid Schedule shall be used to determine the payment owed Contractor for any changes in quantity. B. The actual quantity placed, as determined by the Project Manager, shall be used to calculate the payment due to Contractor. C. Prior to any Work being perFormed in excess of any of the Bid Schedule quantities, Contractor shall notify the Town, in writing, of every quantity that will exceed one hundred five percent (105%) of the quantity listed on the Bid Schedule. D. Except as otherwise provided in this Part 8, Contractor shall not be entitled to compensation for any increased expense, loss of expected reimbursement or loss of anticipated profits, directly or indirectly caused by any changes in quantity. 8.09 BID PRICE ADJUSTMENTS: When a Major Item is increased to more than one hundred thirty-three percent (133%) or decreased to less than sixty-seven percent (67%) of the original quantity stated on the Bid Schedule, the unit Bid price shall be modified by written change order. Payment for major items shall be calculated by multiplying the actual quantity placed by the modified Bid price. 8.10 ELIMINATED ITEMS: Should any items contained in the Bid Schedule be found unnecessary for completion of the Work, the items shall be eliminated. The Contract Price shall be modified by Change Order, and the amount of the change order shall be the eliminated quantity multiplied by the unit Bid price stated in the Bid Schedule, minus any reasonable costs incurred by Contractor for the eliminated items. Reasonable costs shall be determined by the Project Manager based on information provided by Contractor, and may include mobilization of eliminated materials and equipment mobilization costs if the sole purpose of the equipment was to place the eliminated material. In no case shall the costs exceed the amount of the eliminated items. 8.11 MATERIALS STORED BUT NOT INCORPORATED: Payments may be made to Contractor for materials stored on the Site but not incorporated into the Work as evidenced by invoices or cost analyses of material produced, if the material has been fabricated or processed and are ready for installation into the Work and conform to the Contract Documents. Payments shall not exceed eighty-five percent (85%) of the price shown in the Bid Schedule or one hundred percent (100%) of the certified invoice cost of the stockpiled material, whichever is less. Payment for stockpiled materials shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for loss or damage to the material. Payment for living plant materials or perishable materials shall not be made until the living or perishable material is made an integral part of the finished Work. 8.12 COST RECORDS: Contractor shall make cost records available to the Town if the Town deems it necessary to determine the validity and amount of any item claimed. PART 9. MISCELLANEOUS 9.01 PUBLICATIONS: Any and all publications relating to the Work and authored by Contractor or any of its subcontractors shall be submitted to the Town for its prior written approval of the content of the publication. If the Town disapproves of the content of the publication, the author shall withdraw it from publication. The term "publication" as used herein shall include articles or letters to be published in any newspaper, magazine, trade journal or other periodical. 9.02 CONFIDENTIALITY: Any and all reports, information, date, statistics, forms, designs, plans, procedures, systems, studies and any other communication form of knowledge given to or prepared or assembled by Contractor under this Contract shall, to the extent authorized and permitted by law, be kept as confidential and not be made available by Contractor to any individual, company or organization without the prior written consent of the Town. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor shall not be restricted from releasing information in response to a subpoena, court order, or legal process, but Contractor shall notify the Town in writing before responding. 9.03 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR: Contractor, for all purposes arising out of this Contract, is an independent contractor and not an employee of the Town. It is expressly understood and agreed that Contractor shall not be entitled to any benefits to which the Town's employees are entitled, such as overtime, retirement benefits, worker's compensation, injury leave or other leave benefits. 9.04 INTERPRETATION AND CONFLICTS: A. When words, which have a technical or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words shall be interpreted in accordance with such meaning. Reference to standard specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code of any governmental authority, whether such reference is specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code in effect at the time of opening of Bids, unless otherwise specifically stated. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification manual or code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shall change the duties and responsibilities of Contractor from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Town. B. Should a conflict occur in or between Drawings and Specifications, Contractor is deemed to have estimated on the more expensive way of doing the Work unless Contractor obtained a written decision from the Town before submission of the Bid as to which method or materials will be required. 9.05 REFERENCES The following abbreviations, which may be used in the Contract Documents, refer to the organizations and specifications of the organizations listed below: AA Aluminum Association 900 19th Street, NW, Suite 300 Washington, D.C. 20006-2168 AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1518 K Street, NW, Suite 503 Washington, D.C. 20005 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 104 Schaumberg, Illinois 60173-4268 AAN see ANLA AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, NW, Suite 249 Washington, D.C. 20001 AATSA American Traffic Safety Services Association 15 Riverside Parkway Suite 100 Fredericksburg, VA 22406-1717 ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association 950 N. Glebe Road, Suite 160 Arlington, Virginia 22203-1824 ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 9094 Farmington Hills, Michigan 48333-9094 ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association 222 West Las Colinas Boulevard, Suite 641 Irving, Texas 75039-5423 ADC Air Diffusion Council 11 South LaSalle Street, Suite 1400 Chicago, Illinois 60603 AFPA American Forest and Paper Association 1111 19th Street, NW, Suite 800 Washington, D.C. 20036 AGA American Gas Association 1515 Wilson Boulevard Arlington, Virginia 22209 AHA American Hardboard Association 1210 W. Northwest Highway Palatine, Illinois 60067-1897 AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers 20 N.Wacker Drive, Suite 1500 Chicago, Illinois 60606 AI Asphalt Institute Research Park Drive P.O. Box 14052 Lexington, Kentucky 40512-4052 AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20006-5292 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 1 East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100 Chicago, Illinois 60601-2001 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1101 17th Street, NW Washington, D.C. 20036-4700 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 7012 S. Revere Parkway, Suite 140 Englewood, Colorado 80112 ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee P.O. Box 210 Germantown, Maryland 20875 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. 30 W. University Drive Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004-1893 ANLA American Nursery and Landscape Association 1250 I Street, NW, Suite 500 Washington, D.C. 20005 ANSI American National Standards Institute 11 West 42nd Street, 13th Floor New York, New York 10036 APA American Plywood Association (See EWA) APWA American Public Works Association 106 West 11th Street, Suite 1800 Kansas City, Missouri 64105-1806 ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 4301 Fairfax Drive, Suite 425 Arlington, Virginia 22203 ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association Center Park, 4041 Powder Mill Road, Suite 404 Calverton, Maryland 20705 ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council 1627 K Street, NW, Suite 1000 Washington, D.C. 20006-1707 ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive Reston, Virginia 20191-4400 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle, NE Atlanta, Georgia 30329-2305 ASLA American Society of Landscape Architects 4401 Connecticut Avenue, NW Fifth Floor Washington, D.C. 20008-2369 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, New York 10017 ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 3617 Thousand Oaks Boulevard, Suite 210 Westlake, California 91362-3649 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering 28901 Clemens Road, Suite 100 Westlake, Ohio 44145 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 100 Barr Harbor Drive West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania 19428-2959 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 1952 Isaac Newton Square Reston, Virginia 20190 AWPA American Wood-Preservers'Association 3246 Fall Creek Highway, Suite 1900 Granbury, Texas 76049-7979 AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute 1945 Old Gallows Road, Suite 550 Vienna, Virginia 22182 AWS American Welding Society, Inc. 550 NW LeJeune Road Miami, Florida 33126 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 W. Quincy Avenue Denver, Colorado 80235 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc. 355 Lexington Avenue, 17th Floor New York, New York 10017-6603 BIA Brick Institute of America 11490 Commerce Park Drive Reston, Virginia 22091-1525 BOCA Building Officials Code Administrators 4051 W. Flossmoor Road Country Club Hills, Illinois 60478-5795 CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers 1422 Euclid Avenue, Suite 402 Cleveland, Ohio 44115-2851 CDA Copper Development Association, Inc. 260 Madison Avenue, 16th Floor New York, New York 10016-2401 CDOT Colorado Department of Transportation 4201 Arkansas Avenue Denver, CO 80222 CE Corps of Engineers 20 Massachusetts Avenue, NW Washington, D.C. 20314 CID Commercial Item Description See contract clauses CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 5959 Shallowford Road, Suite 419 Chattanooga, Tennessee 37421 CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 9891 Broken Land Parkway, Suite 300 Columbia, Maryland 21046 CRA California Redwood Association 405 Enfrente Drive, Suite 200 Novato, California 94949 CRI Carpet and Rug Institute 310 S. Holiday Avenue Dalton, Georgia 30722-2048 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 N. Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60173-4758 CS Commercial Standard of NBS (U.S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office Washington, D.C. 20402 CSSB Cedar Shingle and Shake Bureau 515 116th Avenue, NE, Suite 275 Bellevue,Washington 98004-5294 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 14170 Newbrook Drive Chantilly, Virginia 22021-2223 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 401 M Street, SW Washington, D.C. 20460 EWA APA-The Engineered Wood Association P.O. Box 11700 Tacoma,Washington 98411-0700 FHA Federal Housing Administration (U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development) 451 7th Street, SW Washington, D.C. 20410 FHVA Fine Hardwood Veneer Association 260 S. First Street, Suite 2 Zionsville, Indiana 46077 FHWA Federal Highway Administration 555 Zang Street Lakewood, CO 80228 FM Factory Mutual System 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike P.O. Box 9102 Norwood, Massachusetts 02062-9102 FS Federal Specifications See contract clauses GA Gypsum Association 810 First Street, NE, Suite 510 Washington, D.C. 20002 GANA Glass Association of North America 3310 SW Harrison Street Topeka, Kansas 66611-2279 HI Hydronics Institute 35 Russo Place P.O. Box 218 Berkeley Heights, New Jersey 07922 HMA Hardwood Manufacturers Association 400 Penn Center Boulevard, Suite 530 Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15235-5605 HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association P.O. Box 2789 Reston, Virginia 22090-2789 IA Irrigation Association 1911 N. Fort Myer Drive, Suite 1009 Arlington, Virginia 22209-1630 IBC International Building Code (International Code Council) 5203 Leesburg Pike, Suite 600 Falls Church, VA 22041 ICBO International Conference of Building Officials 5360 S. Workman Mill Road Whittier, California 90601 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. P.O. Box 440 South Yarmouth, Massachusetts 02664 IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 345 E. 47th Street New York, New York 10017-2394 IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America 120 Wall Street, 17th Floor New York, New York 10005-4001 IGCC See ITS ILIA Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. Stone City Bank Building, Suite 400 Bedford, Indiana 47421 ITS Internek Testing Services 3393 Route 11 P.O. Box 2040 Cortland, New York 13045-7902 KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association 1899 Preston White Drive Reston, Virginia 22091-4326 LIA Lead Industries Association, Inc. 295 Madison Avenue New York, New York 10017 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association c/o Thomas Associates, Inc. 1300 Sumner Avenue Cleveland, Ohio 44115-2851 MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association 60 Revere Drive, Suite 500 Northbrook, Illinois 60062 MIA Marble Institute of America 30 Eden Alley, Suite 201 Columbus, Ohio 43215 MIMA Mineral Insulation Manufacturers Association 1420 King Street Alexandria, Virginia 22314 MLSFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association -A Division of NAAMM 8 South Michigan Avenue, Suite 1000 Chicago, Illinois 60603 MS Military Standardization Documents See contract clauses MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration 4015 Wilson Boulevard, Room 601 Arlington, Virginia 22203 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry 127 Park Street, NE Vienna, Virginia 22180-4602 NAAMM The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 8 South Michigan Avenue, Suite 1000 Chicago, Illinois 60603 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers 1440 South Creek Drive P.O. Box 218340 Houston, Texas 77218-8340 NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association 44 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 310 Alexandria, Virginia 22314 NAPA National Asphalt Pavement Association NAPA Building 5100 Forbes Boulevard Lanham, Maryland 20706-4413 NAPCA National Association of Pipe Coating Applicators 8th Floor, Commercial National Bank Building 333 Texas Street, Suite 800 Shreveport, Louisiana 71101-3673 NBS National Bureau of Standards (U.S. Department of Commerce)(See NIST) NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association 2302 Horse Pen Road Herndon, Virginia 20171-3499 NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA) NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 3 Bethesda Metro Center, Suite 1100 Bethesda, Maryland 20814 NELM Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association 272 Tuttle Road P.O. Box 87A Cumberland Center, Maine 04021-0687 NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc. 185 Bridge Plaza North, Suite 310 Fort Lee, New Jersey 07024 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 1300 N. 17th Street, Suite 1847 Rosslyn, Virginia 22209 NFPA National Fire Protection Association 1 Batterymarch Park P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, Massachusetts 02269-9101 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association P.O. Box 34518 Memphis, Tennessee 38184-0518 NHPMA Northern Hardwood and Pine Manufacturers Association, Inc., c/o Northern Softwood Lumber Bureau Box 217 Dear River, Minnesota 56636 NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH Building 1, Room 3007 1600 Clifton Road, NE Atlanta, Georgia 30333 NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (US Department of Commerce) Building 101, #A1134 Route I-270 and Quince Orchard Road Gaithersburg, Maryland 20899 Send requests for publications to: Superintendent of Documents Government Printing Office Washington, D.C. 20402 NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association P.O. Box 3009 Memphis, Tennessee 38173-0009 NPA National Particleboard Association 18928 Premiere Court Gaithersburg, Maryland 20879-1569 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association O'Hare International Center 10255 W. Higgins Road, Suite 600 Rosemont, Illinois 60018-5607 NSF NSF International (Formerly National Sanitation Foundation) 3475 Plymouth Road P.O. Box 130140 Ann Arbor, Michigan 48113-0140 NTMA The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association 3166 Des Plaines Avenue, Suite 121 Des Plaines, Illinois 60018 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association 1400 East Touhy Avenue, Suite G-54 Des Plaines, Illinois 60018 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, NW Washington, D.C. 20210 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, Illinois 60077-1083 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute 175 W. Jackson Boulevard Chicago, Illinois 60604 PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute 45 Briston Drive, Suite 101 South Euston, Massachusetts 02375 PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute, Inc. 4004 Hillsboro Pike, Suite 224-B Nashville, Tennessee 37215 PI Perlite Institute, Inc. 88 New Dorp Plaza Staten Island, New York 10306 PS Product Standard of NBS (U.S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office Washington, D.C. 20402 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute 966 Hungerford Drive, Suite 12-B Rockville, Maryland 20850-1714 RIS Redwood Inspection Service (Grading Rules) 405 Enfrente Drive, Suite 200 Novato, California 94949 RMMI Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute 1780 South Bellaire Street, No. 602 Denver, Colorado 80222 SCMA Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association 400 Penn Center Blvd., Suite 530 Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15235 SDI Steel Deck Institute P.O. Box 25 Fox River Grove, Illinois 60021 SDI Steel Door Institute 30200 Detroit Road Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967 SFPA Southern Forest Products Association P.O. Box 52468 New Orleans, Louisiana 70152 SGCC See ITS SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 401 N. Michigan Avenue Chicago, Illinois 60611-4267 SJI Steel Joist Institute 3127 10th Avenue, North Ext. Myrtle Beach, South Carolina 29577-6760 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. 4201 Lafayette Center Drive P.O. Box 221230 Chantilly, Virginia 20151-1209 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (Grading Rules) 4709 Scenic Highway Pensacola, Florida 32504-9094 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 40 24th Street, 6th Floor Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15222-4643 SWI Steel Window Institute c/o Thomas Associates, Inc. 1300 Sumner Avenue Cleveland, Ohio 44115-2851 TCA Tile Council of America 100 Clemson Research Boulevard Anderson, South Carolina 29625 TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (See NAIMA) TPI Truss Plate Institute 583 D'Onofrio Drive, Suite 200 Madison, Wisconsin 53719 UBC Uniform Building Code (by ICBO) UDFCD Urban Drainage and Flood Control District 2480 West 26th Avenue, Suite 156-B Denver, CO 80211 UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook, Illinois 60062 USDA U.S. Department of Agriculture 14th Street and Independence Avenue, SW Washington, D.C. 20250 WCLB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (Grading Rules) P.O. Box 23145 Portland, Oregon 97281-3145 WIC Woodwork Institute of California P.O. Box 980247 West Sacramento, California 95798-0247 WMMPA Wood Moulding and Millwork Producers Association 507 First Street Woodland, California 95695 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc. 203 Loudoun Street, SW Leesburg, Virginia 20175-2718 WSFI Wood and Synthetic Flooring Institute (See MFMA) WWPA Western Wood Products Association (Grading Rules) Yeon Building 522 SW 5th Avenue Portland, Oregon 97204-2122 WWPA Woven Wire Products Association 2515 Nordica Avenue Chicago, Illinois 60635 WWPI Western Wood Preservers Institute 7017 NE Highway 99#108 Vancouver,Washington 98665 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work by Owner. 5. Work under separate contracts. 6. Future work. 7. Purchase contracts. 8. Owner-furnished products. 9. Contractor-furnished, Owner-installed products. 10. Access to site. 11. Coordination with occupants. 12. Work restrictions. 13. Specification and drawing conventions. 14. Miscellaneous provisions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: New Lionshead Parking Entry 1. Project Location: 350 South Frontage Road West Vail, CO 81357 B. Owner: Town of Vail, Colorado C. c/o Public Works Department D. 1309 Elkhorn Drive SUMMARY 011000 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 E. Vail, CO 81657 F. 1. Owner's Representative: Mr. Tom Kassmel, PE, Town Engineer 970-479-2235 tkassmel@vailgov.com G. Architect: Zehren and Associates H. PO Box 1976 I. Avon, CO 81620 J. 970-949-0257 K. Mr. Tim Losa L. tlosa@zehren.com M. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. Civil Engineer: Martin and Martin, Inc. Consulting Engineers 225 Main Street, Unit C101 Edwards, CO 81632 970-926-6007 Mr. Mark Luna mluna@martinmartin-mtn.com 2. Structural Engineer: Martin and Martin, Inc. Consulting Engineers 225 Main Street, Unit C101 Edwards, CO 81632 970-926-6007 Mr. Sean Molloy smolloy@martinmartin-mtn.com 3. Mechanical and Electrical Engineer: Beaudin Ganze Consulting Engineers, Inc. 110 E Beaver Creek Blvd., # 202 Avon, CO 81620 970-949-6108 Mr. Marc Sacconi masacconi@bece.com 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: SUMMARY 011000 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. To include but not be limited to: a new entrance canopy, parking attendant booths, supervisor's office/boiler room, parking equipment and associated site and landscape work to the entrance of the Lionshead Parking Structure. B. Type of Contract: a. Reference the enclosed Town of Vail Documents. 1.5 WORK BY OWNER A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner. B. Preceding Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins. 1. N/A. C. Concurrent Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1. N/A. D. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract. 1. N/A. 1.6 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. B. Preceding Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins. 1. Parking Management Systems and Equipment— Selective Demolition. C. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1. Parking Management Systems and Equipment— Procurement and Installation. SUMMARY 011000 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Subsequent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following additional work to be perFormed at site following Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract. 1. Parking Management Systems and Equipment— Installation and Programming. 1.7 PURCHASE CONTRACTS A. General: Owner has negotiated purchase contracts with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Owner will assign these purchase contracts to Contractor. Include costs for purchasing, receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment in the Contract Sum, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor had negotiated purchase contracts, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final purchasing agreements. B. Purchase Contracts Information: 1. N/A: See Section N/A. a. Purchase Contract Firm and Representative: N/A. b. Purchase Contract Scope: N/A. c. Purchase Status: N/A. d. Quantity: N/A. e. Other Requirements: N/A. 1.8 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections. B. Owner-Furnished Products: 1. N/A. 1.9 CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED, OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Contractor shall furnish products indicated. The Work includes unloading, handling, storing, and protecting Contractor-furnished products as directed and turning them over to Owner at Project closeout. B. Contractor-Furnished, Owner-Installed Products: 1. N/A. SUMMARY 011000 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.10 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. C. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas where work is permitted. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways parking garage, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. D. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.11 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing adjacent building(s) during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. SUMMARY 011000 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy. 3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work. 1.12 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations indicated in the enclosed Town of Vail Documents. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. C. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted. F. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times. G. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site. 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative. SUMMARY 011000 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.13 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. 1.14 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 SUMMARY 011000 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of ineasurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of ineasurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. UNIT PRICES 012200 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price No. 1: 1. Description: Removal and disposal of unsuitable soils according to the Geo- Technical Reports bound herein. 2. Unit of Measurement: cubic yard. B. Unit Price No. 2 : 1. Description: Replace unsuitable soils with imported fill according to the Geo- Technical Reports bound herein. 2. Unit of Measurement: cubic yard. C. Unit Price No. 3: 1. Description: Provide imported topsoil in accordance with Specification Section 39115 Soil Preparation 2. Unit of Measurement: cubic yard. END OF SECTION 012200 UNIT PRICES 012200 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. ALTERNATES 012300 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. (Deduct) Alternate No. 1: Charter Bus Lot Grading and Paving 1. Base Bid: Provide grading and asphalt paving south of noted line as indicated in the Documents and specifically on Drawing C3. 2. (Deduct) Alternate: a. Sawcut existing paving; b. Adjust new subgrade and paving section to match existing grades; c. Patch paving along sawcut line in accordance with the General Notes and Specifications. B. (Deduct) Alternate No. 2: Upper Level (East) Ramp 1. Base Bid: a. Removal of existing topping slab and retaining wall as indicated in the Documents and specifically in Drawing C2; b. Replacement of existing topping slab with snowmelted concrete topping and trench drain as indicated in the Documents and specifically on Drawings C3, C8, S102, S303, and M2. c. Regrade and landscaping as indicated in the Documents and specifically in Drawings on C4 and L1.1 2. (Deduct) Alternate: a. Delete the above noted scope of Work in its entirety. C. (Deduct) Alternate No. 3: Snowmelt Boiler and Pumps 1. Base Bid: a. Provide a complete and functioning hydronic snowmelt system for concrete pavement as indicated in the Documents and specifically on Drawings M1, M2 and M3. 2. (Deduct)Alternate: a. Delete all associated snowmelt equipment located in the boiler room including the boiler, controls, flue piping, tanks, and pumps. ALTERNATES 012300 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 b. Provide and install all items penetrating the architectural and structural enclosure including, but not limited to, exhaust fans, mechanical louvers, drains, flue terminations, gas piping, water piping, electrical connections (in sealed junction boxes), unit heaters, etc. as indicated in the Documents and specifically on Drawings M1, M2 and M3. 1) Cap, seal and insulate all penetrations as appropriate to prevent freezing and the intrusion of air, moisture, insects, animals etc. c. Provide and install all embedded snowmelt tubing, buried and exposed snowmelt piping and manifold boxes. 1) Test, cap, seal and insulate as appropriate to prevent freezing and the intrusion of air, moisture, insects, animals etc. all snowmelt tubing and piping for future installation of a complete and functioning system. D. (Deduct) Alternate No. 4: Lower Level (West) Ramp 1. Base Bid: a. Removal of existing structural wall and concrete pavement as indicated in the Documents and specifically in Drawings C20, C21, AD1.1 and S102; b. Provide a snowmelted concrete slab on grade, retaining walls, structural support of the upper deck, two hour rated intumescent paint, and paint striping as indicated in the Documents and specifically on Drawings C20, C21, A1.1, S102, S300, S301, S302. 2. (Deduct)Alternate: a. Delete the above noted scope of Work in its entirety. E. (Deduct)Alternate No. 5: Structural Steel Beams 1. Base Bid: Provide four, (4), tapered architectural exposed steel beams as indicated in the Documents and specifically in Drawings A2.1, A2.2, S103 and S322. 2. Alternate: Provide four, (4), W27x94 structural steel beams in lieu of tapered steel beam indicated on Sheets A2.2, A2.2 and S322. F. (Deduct)Alternate No. 6: AESS - High Performance Coatings 1. Base Bid: AESS and High Performance Coatings as indicated in the Documents and specifically in Specification Sections 051213 and 099600. a. Category 2 AESS: AESS that is exposed to view and not to receive intumescent mastic fireproofing. b. SurFace Preparation for Non-galvanized Steel: SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning." c. High-Build Epoxy System: ALTERNATES 012300 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1) Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. 2) Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, high-build, low gloss, MPI #108. 3) Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77. 2. Alternate: Structural Steel and Exterior Painting as indicated in the Documents and specifically in Specification Sections 051200 and 099113. G. (Deduct) Alternate No. 7: Structural Glue Laminated Members 1. Base Bid: Structural Glued Laminated Members as indicated in the Documents and specifically in Drawing S002 consisting of: a. Single Span: 20E-V12, Alaskan Cedar, Premium, free of heart centers. b. Multi- Span: 20E-V13, Alaskan Cedar, Premium, free of heart centers. 2. Alternate: Structural Glued Laminated Members as noted below in lieu of those specified: a. Single Span: 24F-V4, Douglas Fir, Premium, free of heart centers. b. Multi- Span: 24F-V8, Douglas Fir, Premium, free of heart centers. H. (Deduct) Alternate No. 8: Non-Structural Glue Laminated Members 1. Base Bid: Timber Framing Species and Grade: a. Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (north), or pouglas fir-south; Select Structural grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA: b. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Select Structural grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA 2. Alternate: Non-Structural Glued Laminated Members in species and Grade to match Structural Glued Laminated Members in lieu of the Timber Framing specified. a. Alaskan Cedar, Premium, free of heart centers. I. (Deduct)Alternate No. 9: Non-Structural Glue Laminated Members 1. Base Bid: Timber Framing Species and Grade: a. Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (north), or pouglas fir-south; Select Structural grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA: b. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Select Structural grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA 2. Alternate: Non-Structural Glued Laminated Members in species and Grade to match Structural Glued Laminated Members in lieu of the Timber Framing specified. a. Douglas Fir, Premium, free of heart centers. ALTERNATES 012300 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 J. Alternate No. 10: Exterior Soffit Material 1. Base Bid: Species and Grade: Grade A western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA and specifically in Drawing A4.1 and Specification Section 062013. 2. Alternate: Species and Grade: Clear VG (Vertical Grain) Douglas Fir; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. K. Alternate No. 11: Exterior Soffit Material 1. Base Bid: Species and Grade: Grade A western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA as indicated in the Documents and specifically in Drawing A4.1 and Specification Section 062013. 2. Alternate: Species and Grade: Grade B western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or W W PA. L. Alternate No.12: Exterior Soffit Material 1. Base Bid: Species and Grade: Grade A western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA and specifically in Drawing A4.1 and Specification Section 062013. 2. Alternate: Species and Grade: Grade B Douglas Fir; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. END OF SECTION 012300 ALTERNATES 012300 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012100 "Allowances"for products selected under an allowance. 2. Section 012300 "Alternates"for products selected under an alternate. 3. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICGES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. I. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 7 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 15 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 -4 � Advancement of Construction C�7 TB S�`T�`T TTTOI�T Technology �7 V 1 V 1 1� REQUEST (After the Bidding Phase) Project Substitution Request Number: From: To: Date: A/E Project Number: Re: Contract Far: Specification Title: Description: SecYion: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone: Histary: ❑ New product ❑ 2-5 years old ❑ 5-10 yrs old ❑ Mare than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: ❑ Point-by-point comparative data attached-REQUIRED BY A/E Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation: Project: Architect: Address: Owner: Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Wark: ❑ No ❑ Yes;explain Savings to Owner far accepting substitution: ($ ). Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ❑ No ❑ Yes [Add] [Deduct] days. Supparting Data Attached: ❑ Drawings ❑ Product Data ❑ Samples ❑ Tests ❑ Reparts ❑ Copyright 1996,Construction Specification Institute, Page of September]996 601 Madison Street,Alexandria,VA 22314-179] CSI Form 13.1A SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (Continued) The Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts,as applicable,is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the subsriturion. • Coardination,installation,and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: Attachments: A/E's REVIEW AND ACTION ❑ Substitution approved-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. ❑ Substitution approved as noted-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. ❑ Substitution rejected-Use specified materials. ❑ Substitution Request received too late-Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: ❑ Contractar ❑ Subcontractar ❑ Supplier ❑ Manufacturer ❑ A/E ❑ Copyright 1996,Construction Specification Institute, Page of SeptemUer 1996 601 Madison Street,Alexandria,VA 22314-1791 CSI Form 13.1 A Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change, including additional municipal reviews and approvals required. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, additional permit and municipal review fees, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time, including additional municipal reviews and approvals required. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate app�icable taxes, additional permit ad municipal review fees, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012100 "Allowances"for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances. 2. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices. 3. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 4. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the 10th of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner. I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of pre-construction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project Web site. 5. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for a description of the division of work among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section. 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 4. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures"for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 5. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the Work with Owner's Commissioning Authority. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of inechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 3. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 4. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 5. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. 6. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 7. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 8. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." 9. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in AutoCad 2013. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect. 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Frivolous RFIs: Contractor will be liable for Architects costs as scheduled below, to review and process RFIs determined to be frivolous as defined below. 1. RFIs for which the information is included in the contract documents or can be readily and/or reasonably inferred in the documents, as determined by the Architect will be considered Frivolous 2. Architect will be compensated at the rate of$500/hour, in one hour increments, 2 hour minimum to review and process Frivolous RFIs 3. Pay Applications will not be reviewed or processed until all Frivolous RFI charges have been paid in full. C. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. D. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect]. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log [weekly] <Insert time>. [Use CSI Log Form 13.2B.] [Use software log that is part of Project Web site.] [Include the following:] [Software log with not less than the following:] 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date ArchitecYs response was received. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 G. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner,Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. I. Preparation of record documents. m. Use of the premises and existing building. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. u. Parking availability. v. Office, work, and storage areas. w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. x. First aid. y. Security. z. Progress cleaning. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. I. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. I. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of ineetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedu�e revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 11 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for preparing a combined Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures"for submitting schedules and reports. 3. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. F. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file. B. Startup construction schedule. C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment. F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. H. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. I. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. J. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. K. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing work stages area separations interim milestones and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be inc�uded in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Use of premises restrictions. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 e. Provisions for future construction. f. Seasonal variations. 7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. I. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enc�osure. c. Completion of inechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical instal�ation. e. Substantial Completion. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. See Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node)format. B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice of Award. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for the Notice of Award. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time- scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values). G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.3 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in perFormance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and disp�ay resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and Construction Manager and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for ArchitecYs final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD 2013. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal fi�e as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS- 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. I. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks. E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests perFormed by a qualified testing agency. T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include �oad diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perForm services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with perFormance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in perForming these services. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on perFormance of the Work. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service perFormance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service perFormance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for perFormance and test methods, comply with the following: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect or Construction Manager. 2. Notify Architect and Construction Manager seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's and Construction Manager's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard forjudging the completed Work. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality- assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's, and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "d i rected." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and REFERENCES 014200 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 2. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 3. ICGES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200 REFERENCES 014200 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. General Conditions for work restrictions temporary facilities. 2. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 3. Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt pavement for temporary roads and paved areas. 4. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire- prevention program. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8- inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails. B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1- 5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts. C. Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, 6 feet high, framed with four 2-by-4-inch rails, with preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet apart. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water. 4. Heating equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with perFormance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted. F. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. H. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service for use by all construction personnel. 1. At each workstation, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers' offices. g. Owner's office. h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. K. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. 2. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 3. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 4. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. 5. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving." C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Project Signs: Provide Project sign. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide color Project identification sign with project name, Architect's rendering and other critical project information. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution." H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree-or plant- protection zones. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project. 4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. I. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect. c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interFerence with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012100 "Allowances"for products selected under an allowance. 2. Section 012300 "Alternates"for products selected under an alternate. 3. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures"for requests for substitutions. 4. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, se�ect product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. ArchitecYs decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures"for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary"for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures"for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 4. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building. 5. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. EXECUTION 017300 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least (10] days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted. a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems. D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. E. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: EXECUTION 017300 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Mechanical systems piping. c. Control systems. d. Communication systems. e. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. f. Electrical wiring systems. g. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Equipment supports. d. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. e. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surFaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. EXECUTION 017300 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." EXECUTION 017300 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Construction Manager. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect or Construction Manager. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect and Construction Manager before proceeding. EXECUTION 017300 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work leve�. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product perFormance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. EXECUTION 017300 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. EXECUTION 017300 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary." F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following perFormance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surFaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. EXECUTION 017300 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surFaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. EXECUTION 017300 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements." B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. EXECUTION 017300 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 017300 EXECUTION 017300 - 11 � Advancement of Construction Technology �QUEST FOR INTERPRETATION Project: R.F.I.Number: From: To: Date: A/E Project Number: Re: Contract For: SpecificaYion SecYion: Paragraph: Drawing Reference: Detail: Request: Signed by: Date: Response: ❑ Attachments Response From: To: Date Rec'd: Date Ret'd: Signed by: Date: Copies: ❑ Owner ❑ Consultants ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ File Copyright 1994,Construction Specifications Insritute, Page of July 1994 601 Madison Street,Alexandria,VA 22314-1791 CSI Form 13.2A Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution"for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to �ocation designated by Construction Manager. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Construction Manager's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test/adjust/ba�ance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 8. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 9. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surFace to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even- textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surFaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision- obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 k. Wipe surfaces of inechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. I. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surFaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 -6 � Advancement of Construction Technology PUNCH LIST Project: From(A/E): Site Visit Date: To(Contractor): A/E Project Number: Contract Far: The following items require Yhe attention of'the Contractor for completion or correction. This list may not be all-inclusive, and the failure to include any items on this list does not alter the responsibility of Yhe Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Item Room Location Correction/Completion Verification Number Number (Area) Description DaYe A/E Check ❑ Attachments Signed by: Date: Copies: ❑ Owner ❑ Consultants ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ File Copyright 1996,Construction Specifications Institute, Page of September 1996 601 Madison Street,Alexandria,VA 22314-179] CSI Form 14.1A Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating operation and maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 2. One paper copy. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross- referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 5. Power failure. 6. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 7. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. PerFormance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating project record documents covering the Work of multiple contracts. 2. Section 017300 "Execution"for final property survey. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures"for general closeout procedures. 4. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints or 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three set(s) of prints. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Locations of concealed internal utilities. i. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. j. Changes made following Architect's written orders. k. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. I. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. m. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect and Construction Manager. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previous�y marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a. See Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files. b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers. C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. 2. Consult Architect and Construction Manager for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAW ING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect . e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file and paper copy. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file and paper copy. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file and paper copy. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals and in PDF electronic file format on compact disc. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. I. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner, with at least seven days' advance notice. C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test. E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. END OF SECTION 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 024116 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of buildings and site improvements. 2. Removing below-grade construction. 3. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning in-place site utilities. 4. Salvaging items for reuse by Owner. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 011000 "Summary"for use of the premises and phasing requirements. 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preconstruction photographs taken before building demolition. 3. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. 4. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade site improvements not part of building demolition. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024116 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit informational report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection , for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. 1. Adjacent Buildings: Detail special measures proposed to protect adjacent buildings to remain. B. Schedule of Building Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of demolition work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Temporary interruption of utility services. 3. Shutoff and capping or re-routing of utility services. C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished. 2. Review and finalize building demolition schedule and verify availability of demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review and finalize protection requirements. 4. Review procedures for noise control and dust control. 5. Review procedures for protection of adjacent buildings. 6. Review items to be salvaged and returned to Owner. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work. B. Buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied. Conduct building demolition so operations of occupied buildings will not be disrupted. STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024116 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent occupied buildings. 2. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings. a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 2. Before building demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. Parking and IT equipment. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materia�s will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations or operations of adjacent occupied buildings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS[ (Not Used)] 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations. B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. Comply with Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024116 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving buildings and structures to be demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent occupied buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Existing Utilities: See plumbing and electrical Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings. B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. a. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to occupants of affected buildings if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated. 1. Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities. 2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. 4. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 5. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures. STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024116 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place. 3.4 DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish indicated buildings and site improvements completely. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 2. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 3. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, wa►kways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. C. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. 3.5 DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS A. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. B. Salvage: Items to be removed and salvaged are indicated. C. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction. 1. Remove below-grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and footings, completely. D. Existing Utilities: Abandon existing utilities and below-grade utility structures. Cut utilities flush with grade. STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024116 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 E. Existing Utilities: Demolish existing utilities and below-grade utility structures that are within 5 feet outside footprint indicated for new construction. Abandon utilities outside this area. 1. Fill abandoned utility structures with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 2. Piping: Disconnect piping at unions, flanges, valves, or fittings. 3. Wiring Ducts: Disassemble into unit lengths and remove plug-in and disconnecting devices. 3.6 SITE RESTORATION A. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 3.7 REPAIRS A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations. 3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site. See Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal" for recycling and disposal of demolition waste. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Do not burn demolished materials. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition operations began. 1. Clean roadways of debris caused by debris transport. END OF SECTION 024116 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024116 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner- occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 017300 "Execution"for cutting and patching procedures. 3. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 2. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de-tensioning. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs and preconstruction videotapes. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 7. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting wal�s, floors, or framing. 8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burying: Do not bury demolished materials on site. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving"for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving"for concrete pavement and walks. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Concrete Subcontractor. 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semi-rigid joint fillers, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. E. Samples: For vapor retarder. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Floor and slab treatments. 6. Vapor retarders. 7. Semi-rigid joint filler. 8. Joint-filler strips. D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency: 1. Aggregates. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Minutes of pre-installation conference. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI- certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M. D. Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build panel in the mechanical room. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 117. 2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number ofjoints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch bar length. C. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated. C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M. D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless- steel bar supports. 2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer- coated wire bar supports. 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II, gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: as indicated on drawings. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M. E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. F. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. G. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non- set-accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete. H. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.6 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. 2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. F. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. 2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than Portland cement in concrete as follows: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. 2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Proportion structural normal-weight mixture as noted on Drawings, unless aggregates are "potentially reactive" with alkalis based on the ASTM C295 or ASTM C1260 or ASTM C1293 testing limits of Section 5.1 of "Guide Specifications of Concrete Subject to Alkali-Silica Reactions" (2007 Portland Cement Association). When aggregates are "potentially reactive", compliance with Section 5.2 of"Guide Specifications for Concrete Subject to Alkali-Silica Reactions" (2007 Portland Cement Association) must be established through ASTM C1567 testing for proposed alternate concrete mixture. Submit test reports in accordance with Part 1 of this Specification 2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.14 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Limit concrete surFace irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reg�ets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. I. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. J. Re-tighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. K. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303. 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing materials are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surFaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam- girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surFaces. 7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surFaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surfiace and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surFaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surFaces uniformly to drains where required. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open- textured surface plane, before excess bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surFace irregularities. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, re-straightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surFaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Re-straighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and re-straightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surFaces to receive trowel finish. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and re-straighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to all interior surfaces. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs. 3. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch. D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, walks, drives and elsewhere as indicated. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete substrate. 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture- retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture- retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENT APPLICATION A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 14 days' old. 3. Apply liquid until surFace is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.13 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. C. Install semi-rigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surFace. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surFaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surFaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 16 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surFace. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4- inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surFaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perForm tests and inspections and to submit reports. B. Inspections As indicated on Drawings 1. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28- day tests. 2. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 3. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 17 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 4. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 5. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.16 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer. END OF SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 18 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 044313.13 -ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Stone masonry anchored to concrete backup. 2. Stone masonry anchored to wood framing and sheathing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for stone masonry. 2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. 1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product. B. Samples for Verification: 1. For each stone type indicated. Include at least three Samples in each set and show the full range of color and other visual characteristics in completed Work. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, supply sources, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and source of aggregates. ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.13 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockups constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect approves such deviations in writing. B. Material Test Reports: 1. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone. Include interpretation of test results and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs experienced stonemasons and stone fitters. B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximate�y 48 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. a. Include stone coping at top of mockup. b. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup. c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit stone masonry above half of flashing). d. Include wood studs, sheathing, veneer anchors, flashing, and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup. 2. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. Always retain first paragraph below if Contractor uses a preblended, dry mortar mix. ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.13 - 2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store pre-blended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, in a dry location, or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining stone masonry face. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter using coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surFace. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry. C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of reinforcement, veneer anchors, flashing, and similar items to be built into stone masonry. ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.13 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from single quarry, whether specified in this Section or in another Section of the Specifications, with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality for each cementitious component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 2.2 QUARTZ-BASED STONE A. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Field Stone - `Telluride Gold' — To Match Existing. 2. Stone Caps —To Match Existing. B. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects on existing parking structure buildings. 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction; natural color or white cement may be used as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory perFormance in stone masonry mortar. 1. '�?�;�uble click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and ;;��cts.> _ _. D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows: 1. For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. 2. White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone. 3. Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color. ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.13 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 a. Match Architect's sample on existing buildings. E. Cold-Weather Admixture: Non-chloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. ��ouble click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and ��roducts.> F. Water: Potable. 2.4 VENEER ANCHORS A. Materials: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled, carbon- steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. B. Size: Sufficient to extend at least halfway, but not less than 1-1/2 inches, through stone masonry and with at least a 5/8-inch cover on exterior face. C. Corrugated-Metal Veneer Anchors: Not less than 0.060-inch- thick by 7/8-inch- wide hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet with corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch and an amplitude of 0.06 to 0.10 inch. D. Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Wood Studs: Self-drilling, bugle-head or wafer- head wood screws recommended by veneer anchor manufacturers for fastening to wood studs; not less than No. 10, 1-1/2 inches long, and with organic polymer coating with more than 500-hour, salt-spray resistance to red rust per ASTM B 117. E. Polymer-Coated, Steel Tapping Screws for Concrete Masonry: Self-tapping screws with specially designed threads for tapping and wedging into masonry, with hex washer head and neoprene washer, 3/16-inch diameter by 1-1/2-inch length, and with organic polymer coating with more than 800-hour, salt-spray resistance to red rust per ASTM B 117. 1. �i�v't,i�i�i: l,�V^:�� ii,fi; tv iiiu�.i, i:'vc+iihc+ei�:, caV�ti.+ iii�,;i� ii3� vi iV�ui��auui,�i�Vdioi:� ui'iu ,�roducts.> 2.5 STONE TRIM ANCHORS A. Stone Trim Anchors: Units fabricated with tabs or dowels designed to engage kerfs or holes in stone trim units and holes for fasteners or postinstalled anchor bolts for fastening to substrates or framing as indicated. _.�,�iJi.�iJ{E; i�{Il;k ri(:I'v� i� i II iia, �'Vc��l,9<a�i:, �i utl ii i�i�i"i +i�i CJi i u"ucii'�uui�L . . llau°�i� �i its ��_sroducts.> ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.13 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Materials: Fabricate anchors and dowels from stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. C. Fasteners for Stone Trim Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1. 2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows: 1. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 2. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing. 3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior wall face and down into joint 3/8 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. B. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following: 1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond wall face, use metal flashing. 3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at wall face, use metal flashing with a drip edge. 4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing. C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flexible Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC. ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.13 - 6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Asphalt Dampproofing: Cut-back asphalt complying with ASTM D 4479, Type I or asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1227, Type III or Type IV. C. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8 inch in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity behind stone masonry. Use only for weeps. 2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer. 2.9 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated. B. Select stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on Drawings and pattern specified in "Setting Stone Masonry"Article. C. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. Shape beds to fit supports. D. Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication p�ant for comp�iance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment. E. Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following: 1. Thickness: 4 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch. Thickness does not include projection of pitched faces. F. Finish exposed stone faces and edges to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups. 1. Finish: Natural cleft to match existing buildings. 2. Finish for Sills: Smooth to match existing buildings. 2.10 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride. 2. Use Portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.13 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. 4. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches required consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. B. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Mortar for Setting Stone: Type S. 2. Mortar for Pointing Stone: Type N. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone masonry. B. Examine wall framing, sheathing, weather-resistant sheathing paper and insulation to verify that stud locations are suitable for spacing of veneer anchors and that installation will result in a weatherproof covering. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of weather-resistant sheathing paper before beginning stone installation. B. Install perimeter insulation with a maximum 1/8" gap around masonry anchors. C. Coat concrete and unit masonry backup with asphalt dampproofing. D. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. 3.3 SETTING STONE MASONRY A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set. ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.13 - 8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces. Make edges straight and true, matching similar surfaces that were shop or quarry fabricated. 2. Pitch face at field-split edges as needed to match stones that are not field split. B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable for intended use. C. Arrange stones in broken-range ashlar pattern with uniform course heights, random lengths, and uniform joint widths to match Lionshead Transit Center and Lionshead Welcome Center. D. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance to match Lionshead Transit Center and Lionshead Welcome Center. E. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Install supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone masonry in place. Set stone accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. F. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 1/4 inch at narrowest points or more than 3/8 inch at widest points to provide a `dry-stack' appearance matching the Lionshead Transit Center and Lionshead Welcome Center. G. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Sealing joints is specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." H. Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. 1. At stud-framed walls, extend flashing through stone masonry, up sheathing face at least 12 inches, and behind weather barrier. 2. At concrete backing, extend flashing through stone masonry, turned up a minimum of 12 inches, and insert in reglet. Reglets are specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing full length of angles but not less than 6 inches into masonry at each end. 4. At sills, extend flashing not less than 4 inches at ends. 5. At ends of head and sill flashing, turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 6. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch beyond masonry face at exterior, and turn flashing down to form a drip. I. Place weep holes and vents in joints where moisture may accumulate, including at base of cavity walls, above shelf angles, and at flashing. ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.13 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Use wicking material to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in stone sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing or wicking material 16 inches o.c. 4. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with exterior wall face after mortar has set. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more. D. Measure variation from level, plumb, and position shown in plan as a variation of the average plane of each stone face from level, plumb, or dimensioned plane. E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated. F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stones: Do not exceed one-half of tolerance specified for thickness of stone. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORED STONE MASONRY A. Anchor stone masonry to concrete with corrugated-metal veneer anchors unless otherwise indicated. B. Anchor stone masonry to wood-stud framing with corrugated-metal veneer anchors unless otherwise indicated. Fasten anchors through sheathing to studs with corrosion- resistant roofing nails. C. Embed veneer anchors in mortar joints of stone masonry at least halfway, but not less than 1-1/2 inches, through stone masonry and with at least a 5/8-inch cover on exterior face. D. Space anchors to provide not less than one anchor per 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals not exceeding 12 inches. E. Set stone in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors into mortar joints as stone is set. ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.13 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 F. Anchor stone trim with stone trim anchors where indicated. Install anchors by fastening to substrate and inserting tabs into kerfs in stone units. Provide compressible filler in bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of kerfs with mortar. G. Fill space between back of stone masonry and rigid insulation with mortar as stone is set. H. Rake out joints joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 3/4 inch before setting mortar has hardened. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. 3.6 POINTING A. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles. Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch deep until a uniform depth is formed. B. Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers of not more than 3/8 inch deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to it become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. C. Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to produce a Smooth, flat face recessed 1/2 inch below edges of stone (raked joint) `dry- stack' appearance to match Lionshead Transit Center and Lionshead Welcome Center. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stone masonry of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective joints. 3. Stone masonry not matching approved samples and mockups. 4. Stone masonry not complying with other requirements indicated. B. Replace in a manner that results in stone masonry matching approved samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.13 - 11 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel un-cleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning stone masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20, Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution. 3.8 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE A. Excess Stone: Stack excess stone where directed by Owner for Owner's use. B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in greatest dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least 2 parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 044313.13 ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.13 - 12 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Grout. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel. 2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not defined as structural steel. 3. Section 078123 "Intumescent Fireproofing" for finishing exposed fire rated steel within the existing garage. 4. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface-preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pre-tensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. E. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout. F. Survey of existing conditions (within existing garage). G. Source quality-control reports. H. Field quality-control and special inspection reports. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD, or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC 172). B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. B. Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. B. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold- finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, Type B. D. Un-headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable. 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain. E. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. F. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. G. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035. H. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030. I. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, Type I, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. C. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, non-asphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: [MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20] [ASTM A 780/A 780M]. 2.4 GROUT A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Minimum compressive strength to be 6000 psi B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Minimum compressive strength to be 6000 psi. Required where grout is exposed to view. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not enlarge bolt holes by burning. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M and manufacturer's written instructions. G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspection: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections as indicated in Drawings. B. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1 M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360- degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1 M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise i nd icated. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surFaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M and manufacturer's written instructions. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: As indicated on drawings B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,"for mill material. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform special inspections as indicated in the Drawings. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections as indicated in the Drawings. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." END OF SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 051213 - ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes architecturally exposed structural-steel (AESS). 1. Requirements in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" also apply to AESS. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements applicable to AESS. 2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 3. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" for surface preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AESS: Structural steel designated as "architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS" in the Contract Documents. B. Category 2 AESS: AESS that is exposed to view and not receive intumescent mastic fireproofing. C. Category 3 AESS: AESS that is not defined as Category 2 or that is designated as "Category 3 architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS-3" in the Contract Documents or that is indicated to receive intumescent mastic fireproofing. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051213 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of AESS components. Shop Drawings for structural steel may be used for AESS provided items of AESS are specifically identified and requirements below are met for AESS. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. Indicate grinding, finish, and profile of welds. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. Indicate orientation of bolt heads. 5. Indicate exposed surfaces and edges and surface preparation being used. 6. Indicate special tolerances and erection requirements. B. Samples: Submit Samples of AESS to set quality standards for exposed welds. 1. Two steel plates, 3/8 by 8 by 4 inches, with long edges joined by a groove weld and with weld ground smooth. 2. Steel plate, 3/8 by 8 by 8 inches, with one end of a short length of rectangular steel tube, 4 by 6 by 3/8 inches, welded to plate with a continuous fillet weld and with weld ground smooth and blended. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISGCertified Plant, Category STD, or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC 172). B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE. ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051213 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P3 or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators." 1. Coordinate intumescent mastic fireproofing requirements with Section 078123 "Intumescent Mastic Fireproofing." 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting, warping, nicking, and other damage. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against other construction, verify actual dimensions by field measurements before fabrication. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, round-head assemblies, consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy- hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. 2.2 FILLER A. Filler: Polyester filler intended for use in repairing dents in automobile bodies. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Comply with Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, Type I, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051213 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.4 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate and assemble AESS to the maximum extent possible. Locate field joints at concealed locations if possible. Detail assemblies to minimize handling and to expedite erection. B. In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, comply with the following: 1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust, scale, and roughness. 2. Fabricate Category 1 and Category 2 AESS with exposed surfaces free of seams to maximum extent possible. 3. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating, and shop priming. 4. Fabricate with piece marks fully hidden in the completed structure or made with media that permits full removal after erection. 5. Fabricate Category 2 and Category 3 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is not designated AESS. 6. Seal-weld open ends of hollow structural sections with 3/8-inch closure plates for Category 1 AESS. C. Coping, Blocking, and Joint Gaps: Maintain uniform gaps of 1/8 inch with a tolerance of 1/32 inch forAESS. D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work, and comply with the following: 1. Use weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment for AESS that limit distortions to allowable tolerances. 2. Make butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surFaces within tolerance of plus 1/16 inch, minus zero inch for Category 2 AESS. Do not grind unless required for clearances or for fitting other components, or unless directed to correct unacceptable work. ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051213 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth for Category 2 AESS. 4. At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed connection of Category 2 AESS occurs, grind distortions and marking of the steel to a smooth profile aligned with adjacent material. 5. Make fillet welds for Category 2 AESS of uniform size and profile with exposed face smooth and slightly concave. Do not grind unless directed to correct unacceptable work. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation for Nongalvanized Steel: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine AESS for twists, kinks, warping, gouges, and other imperfections before erecting. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep AESS secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051213 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1. If possible, locate welded tabs for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling where they will be concealed from view in the completed Work. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. 1. Erect Category 2 and Category 3 AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that is not designated AESS. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Orient bolt heads in same direction for each connection and to maximum extent possible in same direction for similar connections. B. Weld Connections: Comply with requirements in "Weld Connections" Paragraph in "Shop Connections"Article. 1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth for Category 1 and Category 2 AESS. 2. Remove erection bolts in Category 1 and Category 2 AESS, fill holes, and grind smooth. 3. Fill weld access holes in Category 1 and Category 2 AESS and grind smooth. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Architect will observe AESS in place to determine acceptability relating to aesthetic effect. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove welded tabs that were used for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling and that are exposed to view in the completed Work. Grind steel smooth. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051213 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. C. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." END OF SECTION 051213 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051213 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 4. Shelf angles. 5. Metal bollards. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. 2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing." 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of inetal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of inetal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Shelf angles. 3. Metal bollards. 4. Loose steel lintels. 5. Anchor bolts and other imbedded items. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surFace temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. E. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. G. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. E. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with where indicated. 2.7 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. B. Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls. C. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete. 2.8 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch anchor bolts. 1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb alignment of bollards. C. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer. 2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span, but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. 2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron p rod u cts. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel,"for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: PerForm cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surFaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated. G. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel pipe and tube railings. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg Fthermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 2.2 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 STEEL AND IRON A. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 2. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. E. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat. 1. °��uuble click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and �roducts.> PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 F. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat. 1. <��i��al� "i,;,� ;,..�� z ;is��, ��..� ,� �; �, _� �� . � �� .. _ . � , . _ �_��,i:;,. . . �±i I��'��zl i�,i , ti�'��`��-.. ..�.1 C` 'l..lEuu.� G. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1. Water-Resistant Product: [At exterior locations] [and] [where indicated] provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. G. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surFace matches contours of adjoining surfaces. H. Form Changes in Direction as Follows: 1. By bending. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 I. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of inember throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. J. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. K. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. L. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. M. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize steel rai►ings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. 4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interFere with paint adhesion. 5. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with [SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."] [SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."] [requirements indicated below:] 1. Exterior Railings: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Railings Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." E. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Shop prime uncoated railings with primers specified in primers specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" are indicated. 2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. F. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime-coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match AESS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surFaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.3 ANCHORING POSTS A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 annular space between post and concrete with anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. C. Galvanized SurFaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair ga�vanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Beam wraps. 2. Closures and trim. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 076100 "Sheet Metal Roofing" for items made of formed metal for roofing. 2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for items made of formed metal for flashings and trim. 3. Section 084113 — "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for adjoining ribbon windows. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative formed metal items. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of decorative formed metal with adjacent construction to ensure that wall assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes of deterioration. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials. DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 057500 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative formed metal. 1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachment details. 2. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative formed metal member, fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch- square Samples of inetal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: For decorative formed metal elements that house items specified in other Sections. Show dimensions of housed items, including locations of housing penetrations and attachments, and necessary clearances. B. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and anodic finisher. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative formed metal similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Anodic Finisher Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying anodic finishes of type indicated and that employs competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance with requirements. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver decorative formed metal products wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces. B. Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location. DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 057500 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other construction contiguous with decorative formed metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Decorative formed metal items, including anchors and connections, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without exceeding the allowable design working stress of materials involved and without exhibiting permanent deformation in any components: 1. Wind Loads on Exterior Items: As indicated on Drawings. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 SHEET METAL A. General: Fabricate products from sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperFections where exposed to view on finished units. B. Aluminum Sheet: Flat sheet complying with ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties of not less than Alloy 5005-H32. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Gaskets: As required to seal joints in decorative formed metal and remain weathertight; as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer. B. Sealants, Exterior: ASTM C 920; elastomeric silicone, polyurethane or polysulfide sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in decorative formed metal and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer. C. Filler Metal and Electrodes: Provide type and alloy of filter metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of inetal to be welded or brazed and as necessary for strength, corrosion resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items. DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 057500 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Use filler metals that will match the color of inetal being joined and will not cause discoloration. D. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined. 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting decorative formed metal items and for attaching them to other work unless otherwise indicated, exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method. 2. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. E. Structural Anchors: For applications indicated to comply with certain design loads, provide fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308. F. Nonstructural Anchors: For applications not indicated to comply with design loads, provide fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICGES AC193. G. Anchor Materials: 1. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594. H. Backing Materials: Provided or recommended by decorative formed metal manufacturer. I. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive recommended by metal fabricator that will fully bond metal to metal, will prevent telegraphing and oil-canning, and is compatible with substrate and noncombustible after curing. J. Isolation Coating: Manufacturer's standard epoxy coating. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble decorative formed metal items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of decorative formed metal items with those of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated. C. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch- wide hem on the concealed side, or DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 057500 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch and support with concealed stiffeners. D. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to stretcher-leveled standard of flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use. 1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment. E. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated items to adjoining construction. Reinforce decorative formed metal items as needed to attach and support other construction. F. Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves, fasteners, and accessories needed to install decorative formed metal items. G. Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed. 1. Use welding and brazing procedures that will blend with and not cause discoloration of inetal being joined. 2.5 BEAM WRAPS A. Form beam wraps from metal of type and thickness indicated below. Fabricate to fit tightly to adjoining construction. 1. Aluminum Sheet: Thickness required to comply with performance requirements. a. Finish: Color anodic to match aluminum framed storefront. B. Fabricate with caulk stop angle to retain backer rod and sealant. 2.6 CLOSURES AND TRIM A. Form closures and trim from metal of type and thickness indicated below. Fabricate to fit tightly to adjoining construction, with weathertight joints at exterior installations. 1. Aluminum Sheet: Thickness required to comply with performance requirements. a. Finish: Color anodic to match aluminum framed storefront. 2. Closures and trim may be fabricated from prefinished metal sheet in lieu of finishing after fabrication provided unfinished edges are concealed from view and not exposed to weather. DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 057500 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Conceal fasteners where possible; otherwise, locate where they are as inconspicuous as possible. Size fasteners to support closures and trim, with fasteners spaced to prevent buckling or waviness in finished surfaces. C. Drill and tap holes needed for securing closures and trim to other surfaces. D. Incorporate gaskets where indicated or needed for concealed, continuous seal at abutting surfaces. E. Miter or cope trim members at corners and reinforce with bent metal splice plates to form tight joints. 2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where possible. After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes to match sheet finish. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptab�e if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Color: Color anodic to match aluminum framed storefront.. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative formed metal. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 057500 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative formed metal. 1. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where needed to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated. D. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, sealants, and flashings, as the Work progresses, to make exterior decorative formed metal items weatherproof. E. Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on concea�ed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finish. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of decorative formed metal items from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 057500 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 057500 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Shear wall panels. 4. Wood blocking and nailers. 5. Wood furring and grounds. 6. Utility shelving. 7. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061600 "Sheathing." 2. Section 061800 "Glued Laminated Construction." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 2. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed and decorative framing. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Engineered wood products. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically perForms inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber fiat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules- writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of inetal fasteners. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Plywood backing panels. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Provide dimension lumber framing as indicated on drawings B. Load-Bearing Partitions: Provide dimension lumber framing as indicated on drawings. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Ceiling Joists: Provide dimension lumber framing as indicated on drawings. D. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. 1. Application: Exposed exterior and interior framing indicated to receive a stained or natural finish. 2. Species and Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type. 2.5 TIMBER FRAMING A. Provide non-structural timber framing complying with the following requirements, according to grading rules of grading agency indicated: 1. Species and Grade: Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (north), or pouglas fir- south; Select Structural grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA 2. Species and Grade: Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Select Structural grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA 3. Maximum Moisture Content: 23 percent. 4. Additional Restriction: Free of heart centers. 2.6 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from a single manufacturer. B. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi for 12-inch nominal- depth members. 2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi. C. Parallel-Strand Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi for 12-inch nominal- depth members. 2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,200,000 psi. D. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 and bonded to flanges. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055. 1. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1. 2. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those indicated. 3. Provide units complying with APA PRI-400, factory marked with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA standard. E. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists. 1. Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I-joists. 2. Material: All-veneer product glued-laminated wood or product made from any combination solid lumber, wood strands, and veneers. 3. Thickness: 1-1/4 inches. 4. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board rim board plus grade, factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with APA standard. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Furring. 3. Grounds. 4. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide as indicated on drawings for framing lumber C. For utility shelving, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine; No. 3 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Standard or No. 3 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Standard or No. 3 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.8 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure- preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemb�ies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. 2.9 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Provide hangers, straps, ties, hold-downs and connectors as indicated on drawings. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. E. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls. F. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. H. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- thickness. I. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interFere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of inember or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. J. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative- treated lumber. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. K. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. L. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. M. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of inembers, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 1. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads. 3.2 WOOD GROUND, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true �ine and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at mid-height of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers as indicated on drawings. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.4 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Rafters: Attach to exterior wall plates as indicated on drawings. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. B. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions if any. 3.5 TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install timber with crown edge up. Provide continuous members unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports as indicated if not continuous. B. Where beams or girders are framed into pockets of exterior concrete or masonry walls, provide 1/2-inch air space at sides and ends of wood members. C. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated. D. Treat ends of timber beams and posts exposed to weather by dipping in water- repellent preservative for 15 minutes. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered labe�. END OF SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing. 2. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry"for plywood backing panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated. B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. SHEATHING 061600 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.2 WALL SHEATHING A. Wall Sheathing: As indicated on drawings 1. Span Rating: As indicated on drawings 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 2.3 ROOF SHEATHING A. Roof Sheathing: As indicated on drawings 1. Span Rating: As indicated on drawings. 2. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on drawngs 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." SHEATHING 061600 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications i nd icated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. END OF SECTION 061600 SHEATHING 061600 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 061800 - GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes framing using structural glued-laminated timber. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for dimension lumber items associated with structural glued-laminated timber. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Glued-Laminated (Glulam) Timber: An engineered, stress-rated timber product assembled from selected and prepared wood laminations bonded together with adhesives and with the grain of the laminations approximately parallel longitudinally. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Full width and depth, 24 inches long, showing the range of variation to be expected in appearance of structural glued-laminated timber including variations due to specified treatment. 1. Apply specified factory finish to three sides of half length of each Sample. B. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, and protection. 2. For preservative-treated wood products. Include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 3. For connectors. Include installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Show layout of structural glued-laminated timber system and full dimensions of each member. 2. Indicate species and laminating combination. GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Include large-scale details of connections. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that structural glued-laminated timber complies with requirements in AITC A190.1. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For structural glued-laminated timber and timber connectors, from ICC-ES. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: An AITC- or APA-EWS-licensed firm. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111. B. Individually wrap members using plastic-coated paper covering with water-resistant seams. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER A. General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC A190.1 and AITC 117 or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Factory mark each piece of structural glued-laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS trademark. Place mark on surfaces that are not exposed in the completed Work. 2. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from single species. 3. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from solid lumber laminations; do not use laminated veneer lumber. 4. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made with wet-use adhesive complying with AITC A190.1. B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: as indicated on drawings. C. Appearance Grade: Premium, complying with AITC 110. 1. For Premium and Architectural appearance grades, fill voids as required by AITC 110. GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.2 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Preservative Treatment: Where preservative-treated structural glued-laminated timber is indicated, comply with AWPA U1, Use Category 3A. 1. Use preservative solution without water repellents or substances that might interfere with application of indicated finishes. B. Preservative: One of the following: 1. Oxine copper (copper-8-quinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent. 2. Pentachlorophenol in light petroleum solvent. 3. Ammoniacal zinc copper arsenate (ACZA) in a water solution. 4. Propiconazole tebuconazole imidacloprid (PTI) in a water emulsion. 2.3 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. Fabricate Structural connectors as indicated on drawings. B. Fabricate Architectural (non-structural) connectors as indicated: 1. Fabricate beam seats from steel with 3/8-inch bearing plates, 3/4-inch- diameter- by-12-inch- long deformed bar anchors, and 0.239-inch side plates. 2. Fabricate arch base shoes from steel with 1-inch baseplates and 3/8-inch side plates. 3. Fabricate beam hangers from steel with 0.179-inch stirrups and 0.239-inch top plates. 4. Fabricate hinge connectors from steel with 0.179-inch side plates and 1-inch top and bottom plates. 5. Fabricate strap ties from steel, 3 inches wide by 0.239 inch thick. 6. Fabricate tie rods from round steel bars with upset threads connected with forged-steel turnbuckles complying with ASTM A 668/A 668M. 7. Provide bolts, 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; nuts complying with ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 8. Provide shear plates, 4 inches (102 mm) in diameter, complying with ASTM D 5933. C. Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. D. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with high perFormance coatings as specified in section 099600. GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. B. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes. 1. Dress exposed surfaces as needed to remove planing and surfacing marks. B. Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span. C. Where preservative-treated members are indicated, fabricate (cut, drill, surface, and sand) before treatment to greatest extent possible. Where fabrication must be done after treatment, apply a field-treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. 1. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. D. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood coated for not less than 10 minutes. E. Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surFaces of each unit. 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. Wiped Stain Finish: Manufacturer's standard, dry-appearance, penetrating acrylic stain and sealer; oven dried and resistant to mildew and fungus. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates in areas to receive structural glued-laminated timber, with Insta�ler present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb and with uniform, close-fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Handle and temporarily support glued-laminated timber to prevent surface damage, compression, and other effects that might interfere with indicated finish. B. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2-inch clearance at tops, sides, and ends of members built into masonry; bevel cut ends 3 inches; and do not embed more than 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Cutting: Avoid extra cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. D. Fit structural glued-laminated timber by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surFacing and finishing. 1. Predrill for fasteners using timber connectors as templates. 2. Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. 3. Coat cross cuts with end sealer. 4. Where preservative-treated members must be cut during erection, apply a field- treatment preservative to comply with AWPA M4. a. Use inorganic boron (SBX) treatment for members not in contact with the ground and continuously protected from liquid water. E. Install timber connectors as indicated or necessary for non-structural connections. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, install bolts with same orientation within each connection and in similar connections. 2. Install bolts with orientation as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged structural glued-laminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose, including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades. GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work. Retain wrapping where it can serve as a painting shield. 2. Slit underside of wrapping to prevent accumulation of moisture inside the wrapping. END OF SECTION 061800 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 062013 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior wood trim. 2. Lumber siding (ceiling). B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry"for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view and for framing exposed to view. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures. B. Samples for Verification: 1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished; 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Compliance Certificates: 1. For lumber that is not marked with grade stamp. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecast weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association, "Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber." 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority, "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber." 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service, "Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber." 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber." 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber." 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules." B. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. 2.2 EXTERIOR TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Semitransparent-Stained Finish: 1. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, A Clear; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 4. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.3 LUMBER SIDING (CEILING) A. Provide kiln-dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20. B. Species and Grade: Grade A Clear western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. C. Pattern: Tongue and Groove, Bevel siding, S1S2E, actual overall dimensions of 7-1/4 by 3/4 inch, measured on the face and thick edge at 19 percent moisture content. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate. 1. For face-fastening siding (blind nail), provide ringed-shank siding nails or hot-dip galvanized-steel siding nails unless otherwise indicated. 2. For applications not otherwise indicated, provide stainless-steel or hot-dip galvanized-steel fasteners. 3. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, provide stainless-steel or hot-dip galvanized-steel fasteners. B. Wood Glue: Waterproof resorcinol glue recommended by manufacturer for exterior carpentry use. C. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry. D. Insect Screening for Soffit Vents: Aluminum, 18-by-16-inch mesh. E. Continuous Soffit Vents: Aluminum hat channel shape with stamped louvers, 2 inches wide and in lengths not less than 96 inches. 1. Net Free Area: 6 sq. in./linear ft.. 2. Finish: Brown paint. F. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834 and with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of substrates for intended application. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches, except members with ends exposed in finished work. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius. EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 3. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install flat-grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. B. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long except where necessary. 1. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members. C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 SIDING (CEILING) INSTALLATION A. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Horizontal Lumber Siding: Begin application at ridge with tongue edge up. Install subsequent courses with tongue-and-groove edges tightly fitted together. Nail at each rafte r 1. Leave 1/8-inch gap at trim and corners unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, and apply sealant. 2. Butt joints only over framing or blocking, nailing top and bottom on each side and staggering joints in subsequent courses. C. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by siding manufacturer. D. Finish: Apply finish within two weeks of installation. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 062013 EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062013 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 064116 - PLASTIGLAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate- faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 2. Section 123623.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops." 1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products high-pressure decorative laminate adhesive for bonding plastic laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. PLASTIGLAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. 2. PVC edge material. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface finish. 2. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For [each type of product.] [the following:] 1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. High-pressure decorative laminate. 3. Adhesives. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AW I Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions"Article. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PLASTIGLAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels and certificates from AW I certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Custom. C. Type of Construction: Face frame. D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed SurFaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 3. Edges: Grade HGS. PLASTIGLAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 G. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC T-mold matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surFace of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to sub-front with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join sub-fronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the fo�lowing requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Solid colors, matte finish. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 4 to 9 percent. B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay. 4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. 5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and PLASTIGLAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)." B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- thick metal, and as follows: 1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521. C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter. E. Catches: Roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B03071 . F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. H. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. J. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. PLASTIGLAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. PLASTIGLAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed. F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 064116 PLASTIGLAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"for bituminous vapor retarders. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions. B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from single source from single manufacturer. Provide auxiliary materials recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials. B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction unless otherwise required. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.2 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. B. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. C. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1. D. VOC Content: [Zero] [30 g/L or less] <Insert value>. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing. B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended in writing by manufacturer. C. Patching Compound: Epoxy or latex-modified repair mortar of type recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting performance of bituminous dampproofing work. 1. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263. B. Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains. B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to the dampproofing work; fill voids, seal joints, and remove bond breakers if any, as recommended in writing by prime material manufacturer. C. Apply patching compound to patch and fill tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection. 2. Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a smooth surface and uninterrupted coverage. B. Where dampproofing exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls, lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe. 1. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that interrupt inner wythe. 2. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto shelf angles supporting veneer. 3.4 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Concrete Backup for Stone Veneer Assemblies: Apply one brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft.. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board. 2. Glass-fiber blanket. 3. Glass-fiber board. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD A. Extruded polystyrene boards in this article are also called "XPS boards." Roman numeral designators in ASTM C 578 are assigned in a fixed random sequence, and their numeric order does not reflect increasing strength or other characteristics. B. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type X for above ground installations: ASTM C 578, Type X, 15-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. C. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type VII for below grade installation: ASTM C 578, Type VII, 60-psi minimum compressive strength; maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Owens-Corninq 2. Certainteed 3. Approved equivalent 2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. 2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84 (interior of steel columns and tube). B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R- value. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 48 inches below exterior grade line. B. On horizontal surFaces, �oosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from exterior walls. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION A. Butt panels together for tight fit. B. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive or press into tacky waterproofing or dampproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. Attics: Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 5. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 Ib/cu. ft.. 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written instructions. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 072500 -WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wrap. 2. Flexible flashing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061600 "Sheathing"for sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. DupontT"^ TyvekO `Homewrap0' or approved equal 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 56 perms per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Air Permeance: Not more than 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. at 0.3-inch wg when tested according to ASTM E 2178. 4. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than 120 days. 5. Fire Propagation Characteristics: ASTM E 84: a. Flame Spread Index 15 Class A b. Smoke Developed Index 15 Class A B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Rubberized-Asphalt, Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch. 1. W.R.Grace: `VYCORO V40 or approved equivalent B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate. C. Nails and Staples: ASTM F 1667. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed. B. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion-or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless otherwise indicated. C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing fianges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. END OF SECTION 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Polyethylene vapor retarders. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"for under-slab vapor retarders. 2. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for vapor retarders integral with insulation products. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests perFormed by a qualified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Sheet with outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 20 Ib/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm. VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. B. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates i nd icated. C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS ON FRAMING A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. B. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives, vapor retarder fasteners, or other anchorage system as recommended by manufacturer. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. C. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs and sealing with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders. E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect vapor retarders from damage until concealed by permanent construction. END OF SECTION 072600 VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 076100 - SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes exposed fastener, overlapping horizontal and vertical flat seam "shingle", sheet metal roofing and underlayments. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry"for wood nailers and blocking. 2. Section 061600 "Sheathing"for plywood panel substrate. 3. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation"for roof insulation. 4. Section 072600 "Vapor Retarders" for sheet vapor retarders separate from self- adhering underlayments. 5. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for gutters, downspouts, fasciae, copings, and flashings that are not part of sheet metal roofing. 6. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured fasciae and copings that are not part of sheet metal roofing. 7. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories"for manufactured roof accessories. 8. Section 077253 "Snow Guards" for prefabricated devices designed to hold snow on the roof surface, allowing it to melt and drain off slowly. 9. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants adjoining sheet metal roofing. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sheet metal roofing layout and seams with sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, equipment provided, and roof penetrations. B. Coordinate sheet metal roofing installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of roofing substrate, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide leak-proof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct two (2) conferences at Project site; at completion of roof sheathing and prior to installation of underlayment, and at completion of underlayment prior to installation of inetal roof for review of mockup. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer, metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment 3. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal roofing. 4. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 5. Review roof observation and repair procedures after sheet metal roofing installation. 6. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal roofing. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion joint locations, fixed points, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include details for forming, including seams and dimensions. 4. Include details for joining and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 5. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 6. Include details of roof penetrations. 7. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counter-flashings. 8. Include details of special conditions. 9. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 10. Detail the following accessory items, at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches: a. Flashing and trim. b. Gutters and downspouts as they relate to adjacent sheet metal roofing. c. Roof curbs. d. Attachment of snow guards. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal with factory-applied finishes. 1. Include Samples of trim and accessories involving finish or color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Sheet Metal Roofing: 4 square feet, in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, and other attachments. 2. Trim and Metal Closures: 24 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Other Accessories: 24-inch- long Samples for each type of other accessory. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Sheet metal roofing, seam locations, and attachments. 2. Equipment supports, pipe supports, and penetrations. 3. Snow guards. 4. Details for penetrations. B. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For roofing sheet metals and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. B. Snow and Ice Management P�an: Indicating techniques and limitations for management and removal of snow and ice to minimize potential for damage. C. Warranties: For special warranties. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: A company specializing in standard and custom fabrication of sheet metal roofing systems with five years of documented experience similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical roof area and eave as shown on Drawings, including, underlayment, attachments, and accessories. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 a. Size: Approximately 12 feet square. b. Include fascia, soffit and gable end and rake. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal roofing materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal roofing materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Store materials on platForms or pallets with weathertight covering. Provide ventilation. Ensure dryness. Avoid contact with material that might cause staining or other surface damage C. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal roofing from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal roofing installation. D. Handling: Avoid bending, gouging, scratching, and denting. Use cotton gloves when handling and installing unprotected panels in order to avoid soiling surface of panels. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Warranty form at end of this Section in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Wrinkling or buckling. c. Loose parts. d. Failure to remain weathertight, including uncontrolled water leakage. e. Deterioration of inetals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering, including nonuniformity of color or finish. f. Galvanic action between sheet metal roofing and dissimilar materials. 2. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Wind Speed Warranty Period: Shingles will resist blow off or damage caused by wind speeds up to 80 mph. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sheet metal roofing system including, but not limited to, metal roof shingles, cleats, anchors and fasteners, sheet metal flashing integral with sheet metal roofing, fascia panels, trim, underlayment, and accessories, shall comply with requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation, or due to other defects in construction. Sheet metal roofing shall remain watertight. 1. Air infiltration: System to provide permanent resistance to air leakage of 0.09 CFM/SF of roof area when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at static air pressure difference of 4 PSF. 2. System shall have no measurable water penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at differential pressure of 20 percent minimum of inward acting windload and windload design pressure of 6.24 PSF minimum and 12.0 PSF inaximum. 3. Roof system, edge metal, and accessories and method of attachment shall be designed in accordance with ASTM E1592 and other applicable codes to adequately resist wind and uplift forces for roof configuration and Project location. B. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated on Drawings. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.2 ROOFING SHEET METALS A. General: Factory formed flat seam, interlocking panels to be held in place by cleats, interlocked with adjacent panel seam flanges, and seam flattened with a mallet. 1. Nominal size: 22-1/2 by 16-1/2 inches. 2. Profile: Panels to have 3/4 inch wide hemmed flanges on all sides. One side and one end flange shall be folded on top surface of panel and other two flanges to be folded onto back surface as detailed on Drawings. Miter cut flange corners at 45 degrees. 3. Provide special sizes and profiles as indicated on Drawings and reviewed shop drawings to accommodate eaves, ridges, corners, penetrations, panel intersections, terminations with other materials, and other special conditions. Form with flat flanged hems similar to other flat seam panels. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with smooth, flat surface; pre-painted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Thickness: Nominal 0.022 inch (24 Ga.) unless otherwise indicated. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surFaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 3. Color: Match Architect's sample as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match adjacent Lionshead Transit Center and Lionshead Welcome Center. a. Coated Metals Group, Ultra-Clad "Burnished Slate" 4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester-backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Cold Applied, Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene-film top surface cross laminated to a layer of butyl- rubber adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer. Basis of design: 1. W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn. "Ultra" B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 Ib/100 sq. ft. minimum. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete roofing system and as recommended by primary sheet metal manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular-threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. General: a. Exposed Fasteners at snow clips: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of roofing at snow clips. b. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed; with hex-washer head. c. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. 2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal roofing and remain watertight. E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide components required for complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of sheet metal roofing unless otherwise indicated. 1. Cleats: Intermittent and continuous concealed type attachment devices for mechanically seaming into joints that does not require any penetration of panels and formed from the following materials and thicknesses unless otherwise indicated: a. Metallic-Coated Steel Roofing: 0.0250-inch- thick stainless steel. 2. Expansion-Type Cleats: Cleats of a two-piece floating assembly as required that allows longitudinal movement of roof panels without stressing panel seams; of same material as other cleats. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and with same finish as sheet metal roofing, minimum 0.018 inch thick. 1. Backing Plates: Plates at roofing splices, fabricated from material recommended by SMACNA. 2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible- closure strips; cut or premolded to match sheet metal roofing profile. Provide closure strips where necessary to ensure weathertight construction. B. Pipe Flashing: Pre-molded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions (panel width and seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of installation. Fabricate sheet metal roofing and accessories in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Metal Shingle Roofing: Form roof shingles with edges of lower panels turned up and extending 1/2 inch above continuous horizontal steps in substrate. 2. Match shingles as detailed at the end of this section B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal roofing that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates with little oil canning; free of buckling and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Lay out sheet metal roofing so transverse seams, if required, are made in direction of flow with higher panels overlapping lower panels. 2. Offset transverse seams from each other 12 inches minimum. 3. Fold and cleat eaves and transverse seams in shop. 4. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings, and other components of inetal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements indicated on Drawings and as required for leak-proof construction. D. Expansion Provisions: Fabricate sheet metal roofing to allow for expansion in running work sufficient to prevent leakage, damage, and deterioration of the Work. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. E. Sealant Joints: Form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to SMACNA standards. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 F. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item required. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. 3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces of accessories exposed to view. 5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking, that tops of fasteners are flush with surface, and that installation is within flatness tolerances required for finished roofing installation. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored, and that provision has been made for drainage, flashings, and penetrations through sheet metal roofing. B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating sheet metal roofing to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of sheet metal roofing before installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Lay out panel arrangement and before installation of sheet metal roofing. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Space fasteners not more than 12 o.c. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free in strict accordance with manufacturer's instuctions. Prime substrate as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Apply 2 layers of self-adhering sheet underlayment: a. Under areas to receive electric heat tape, b. A minimum of nine feet upslope of eaves, c. A minimum of six feet upslope of conditioned structure below roof surface d. Rake edges for a distance of 12 inches (to strip in flashing) e. Hips and ridges for a distance on each side of 12 inches 2. . B. Install Underlayment at roof-to-wall intersections for a distance up wall of 36 inches C. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal roofing and related flashing. D. Install flashings to cover underlayment according to requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to installation characteristics required unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Install fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete roofing system and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing. 1. Install sheet metal roofing true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 3. Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted. 4. Provide metal closures at peaks rake edges eaves and each side of ridge caps. 5. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 6. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Predrill panels for fasteners. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 7. Install ridge caps as sheet metal roofing work proceeds. 8. Locate roofing splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger roofing splices and end laps to avoid four-panel lap splice condition. Install backing plates at roofing splices. 9. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to direct moisture to run over and off roofing. 10. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Thermal Movement: Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at only one location for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. C. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying self- adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or SMACNA. 1. Coat concealed side of sheet metal roofing with bituminous coating where roofing contacts wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Fasciae: Align bottom of sheet metal roofing and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self- tapping screws. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings. 3.5 CUSTOM-FABRICATED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering metal temper and reflectivity. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form hem on concealed side of exposed edges unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install cleats to hold sheet metal panels in position. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners to prevent rotation. 2. Space cleats not more than 12 inches o.c. Bend tabs over fastener head. B. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. For roofing with 3:12 slopes or less, use cleats at transverse seams. 1. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 11 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Metal Roofing Shingles: Attach metal roofing shingles to substrate with cleats, starting at eave and working upward toward ridge. Attach cleats along continuous horizontal steps in substrate, with cleats at 12" o.c. spacing. Lock lower edge of each panel to turned-up upper edge of panel below, folding seam over to engage cleat and panel edges. After first fold, mallet seams against substrate, leaving joint slightly angled over lower panel to form drip. 1. Hook end of each panel to adjacent panel with sealed cross seam. 2. Hook panel at eave edge to continuous cleat. 3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim, copings, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Install accessories integral to sheet metal roofing that are specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" to comply with that Section's requirements. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with perFormance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and install units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. 2. Install continuous strip of self-adhering underlayment at edge of continuous flashing overlapping self-adhering underlayment, where "continuous seal strip" is indicated in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and on Drawings. 3. Install exposed flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates, and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 4. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection. a. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, and filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. b. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. C. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and sheet metal roofing. Fasten and seal to sheet metal roofing as recommended by SMACNA. SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 12 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8- inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal roofing is installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal roofing installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal roofing manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal roofing in clean condition during construction. E. Replace sheet metal roofing components that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.9 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: 1. Owner: <Insert name>. 2. Owner's Address: <Insert address>. 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. 4. Building's Address: <Insert address>. 5. Area of Work: <Insert information>. 6. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. 8. Expiration Date: <Insert date>. B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 13 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. Lightning; b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding <Insert mph>; c. Fire; d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 14 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of<Insert month>, <Insert year>. 1. Authorized Signature: <Insert signature>. 2. Name: <Insert name>. 3. Title: <Insert title>. END OF SECTION 076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 15 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured through-wall flashing with counterFlashing. 2. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 4. Formed equipment support flashing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry"for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 0761000 "Sheet Metal Roofing" for materials and installation of sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials. B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials,joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points. 8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing. 9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. 10. Include details of special conditions. 11. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish. 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical roof edge eave, including fascia trim, approximately 10 feet long, including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and accessories. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet meta� flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure: 1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; pre-painted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Surface: Smooth, flat. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match Lionshead Transit Center and Lionshead Welcome Center. 4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Cold Applied, Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene-film top surface cross laminated to a layer of butyl- rubber adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer. Basis of design: 1. W. R. Grace & Co.-Conn. "Ultra" B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 Ib/100 sq. ft. minimum. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of inetal. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Through-Wall, Ribbed, Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal flashing for embedment in masonry, with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide integral mortar bond. Manufacture through-wall flashing with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as flashing. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." D. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.7 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and flat-stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than three times the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Gutter Profile: Style A according to cited sheet metal standard. 2. Accessories: Continuous, removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and hardware cloth screen. 3. Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.034 inch inch thick and finished to match roofing. B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors. Shop fabricate elbows. 1. Fabricated Hanger Style: Fig 1-35A according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 2. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick and finished to match roofing. 2.8 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick. B. Valley Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch C. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick and finished to match roofing. D. Eave, Rake, and Ridge Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick finished to match roofing. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 E. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick finished to match roofing. F. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick finished to match roofing. G. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick finished to match roofing. 2.9 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12-foot- long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings; and form with 2-inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft.. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wa�l openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2- inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. B. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and trim. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Instal� sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surFaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surFaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre- tin edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet 3.4 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. 2. Anchor and �oose�y lock back edge of gutter to continuous cleat. 3. Anchor gutter with gutter brackets spaced not more than 24 inches apart to roof deck, unless otherwise indicated, and loose�y lock to front gutter bead. 4. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for cleaning gutters. C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. 1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. 2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system. 3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers. C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 6 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 6 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant unless otherwise indicated. E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.6 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 044313.13 "Anchored Stone Masonry Veneer." C. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. 3.7 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. B. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans from structure above, independent of other overhead items such as equipment, piping, and conduit, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage system. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 11 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 12 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 077253 - SNOW GUARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pad-type, flat-mounted snow guards. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for snow guards. B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans showing layouts and attachment details of snow guards. 1. Include calculation of number and location of snow guards based on snow load, roof slope, roof type, components, spacings, and finish. C. Samples: Full-size unit including screws and cap. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of snow guard, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Requirements: Provide snow guards that withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. SNOW GUARDS 077253 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Structural Performance: 1. Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2.2 PAD-TYPE SNOW GUARDS A. Basis of Design: 1. Pad Type Snow Bracket: Type H 5.5-inch length (140 mm) including Snow and Sun Cover Clip for Snow Bracket H 2. Manufacturer: TRA Snow and Sun: 1657 S. 580 East P. O. Box 682 ; American Fork, UT 84003; Toll Free Tel: 800-606-8980; Tel: 801-756-8666; Email: info trasnowandsun.com; Web: www.trasnowandsun.com 3. Material: Hot Dipped Galvanized, Paintlock Steel, 16 gauge. 4. Finish and Color: Powder coat; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, snow guard attachment, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrates for bonding snow guards. B. Prime substrates according to snow guard manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install snow guards according to manufacturer's written instructions. Space rows as recommended by manufacturer. B. Flat-Mounted, Snow Guard Pads: Mechanical anchor and counterflashing sleeve system: SNOW GUARDS 077253 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Flat-Mounted, Snow Guard Pads: Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and engineered layout charts. 2. Bracket Type H: a. Install by placing bracket on exposed roof surface. b. Drill holes through roofing and sheathing through existing holes in bracket ensuring proper hole position. c. Remove bracket and install sealant (calking) in holes and along the underside of bracket. d. Lay bracket in place and fasten to sheathing with fasteners. e. Install sealant (calking) over the screw heads. f. Install cover clip, place enough sealant to secure cover clip, slip on cover clip. END OF SECTION 077253 SNOW GUARDS 077253 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 078123 - INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coatings (MIFRC). 1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, thicknesses, and other performance requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES. C. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following: 1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating. 2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of each structural component and assembly. 4. Treatment of fireproofing after application. D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's standard dimensions in size. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing. INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 078123 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 50 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application. B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing from single source. C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 and UL 263 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise. D. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. 2.2 MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS A. MIFRC: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed formulation, and complying with indicated fire-resistance design. Basis of Design: INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 078123 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. ISOLATEK International: CAFCOO SprayFilmO WB4 2. Application: Designated for "exterior" use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Thickness: As required for a 2 hour fire-resistance design, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design. 4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 15 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0. 5. Hardness: Not less than 81, Type D durometer, according to ASTM D 2240. 6. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard finishes. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated. B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with required fire-resistance design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design. Basis of Design: 1. CAFCO° SprayFilm°Topseal PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following: 1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application. INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 078123 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing. C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing. D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire- resistive products after application. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work. B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing. 1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place. D. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. E. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 078123 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 F. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. G. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. H. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups. I. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. J. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications. K. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes: 1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for each finish selected. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.11. B. PerForm the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design. C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surFaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 078123 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades. D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction. E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product. END OF SECTION 078123 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 078123 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. B. Related Sections: 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration fire-stopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration fire-stopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests perFormed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration fire-stopping. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration fire-stopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration fire- stopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration fire-stopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Penetration fire-stopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Penetration fire-stopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Fire-stopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration fire-stopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Classification markings on penetration fire-stopping correspond to designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration fire-stopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration fire-stopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration fire-stopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration fire-stopping is installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration fire-stopping. C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration fire- stopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 c. Tremco, Inc. d. United States Gypsum Company. 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire-barrier walls. 2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Exposed Penetration Fire-stopping: Provide products with f�ame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. D. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration fire-stopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration fire-stopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for fire-stopping indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a non-shrinking, homogeneous mortar. D. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam. E. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and non-sag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated fire-stopping limits use of non-sag grade for both opening conditions. 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration fire- stopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum perFormance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting perFormance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration fire- stopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration fire-stopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration fire-stopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration fire-stopping from contacting adjoining surFaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire- stopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration fire-stopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-stopping. C. Install fill materials for fire-stopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surFaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify penetration fire-stopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of fire-stopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or fire-stopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Fire-stopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Where deficiencies are found or penetration fire-stopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration fire-stopping to comply with requirements. B. Proceed with enclosing penetration fire-stopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration fire- stopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration fire-stopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration fire-stopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, too�s, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 2.3 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Non-staining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248. B. Silicone, Non-staining, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Non-staining, single-component, non-sag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, non-traffic-use, neutral- curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. <�7ouble click here to find, evaluate, and inserfi list o� manui�acturers and ��roducts.> 2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Non-staining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, [Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin)] [Type O (open-cell material)] [Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin)] [or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated], and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles JOINT SEALANTS 079200 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Stone. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surFaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise i nd icated. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware"for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests perFormed by a qualified testing agency. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Maximum-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 4.. 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated on drawings. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Vertical steel stiffener. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.3 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. D. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation. 2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. 4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Exterior poors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide a�ignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. 2.6 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. B. Peep hole as indicated on Door Schedule PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Insta�ler, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. b. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured atjambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. b. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. c. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediate�y before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior storefront framing ribbon window including perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of storefront units. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 072700 "Air Barriers" for materials used to bridge between aluminum storefront system and building intersection 2. Division 078466 "Fire-Resistant Joint systems" for fire resistive material installed between aluminum storefront system and floor intersections 3. Division 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants installed as part of the aluminum storefront system 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions: For fenestration industry standard terminology and definitions refer to American Architectural Manufactures Association (AAMA) — AAMA Glossary (AAMA AG). 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made from 12" lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed entrance and storefront. C. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals. B. Warranties: For special warranties. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. C. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of storefront systems. 1.9 MOCKUPS A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality Control" Article. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum- framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of inetals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. B. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. C. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. E. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft.. F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft.. G. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U- factor of not more than 0.36 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100. 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.40 as determined according to NFRC 200. H. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Product: 1. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company: Trifab° VG 451 T (Thermal) Storefront System — 2" x 4-1/2" (50.8 mm x 114.3 mm) nominal dimension; Thermal; Center, Structural Silicone or Weatherseal Glazed (Type B); Shear Block Fabrication B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing, venting windows and accessories, from single manufacturer. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum storefront manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.070" wall thickness at any location for the main frame and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6 alloy and temper a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum storefront manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.070" wall thickness at any location for the main frame and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6 alloy and temper. C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non- corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components. D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. E. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. F. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc- coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. G. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated storefront system, provide permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement. H. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data. 2.4 FRAMING A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Construction: Thermal Break with a 1/4" (6.4 mm) separation consisting of a two- part chemically curing, high-density polyurethane, which is mechanically and adhesively joined to aluminum storefront section. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on two sides and structural sealant on two sides. a. Glazed from inside. 3. Glazing Plane: Center 4. Finish: Color Anodic Finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Factory-fabricated shear block system. B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 2.5 VENTING WINDOWS A. Aluminum Windows: As specified in Section 085113 "Aluminum Windows." B. Aluminum Windows: Manufacturer's standard units, complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, with self-flashing mounting fins, and as follows: 1. Window Type: [Horizontal sliding] [Awning] [Single hung] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert type>. 2. Minimum Performance Class: [CW] [AW] <Insert class>. 3. Minimum Performance Grade: [30] [35] [40] [45] [50] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert number>. 4. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 0.064-inch thickness at any location for main frame and sash members. a. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate window units with an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. 5. Mullions: Between adjacent windows, fabricated of extruded aluminum matching finish of window units. 6. Fasteners, Anchors, and Clips: Nonmagnetic stainless steel, aluminum, or other noncorrosive material, compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of window units. Fasteners shall not be exposed, except for attaching hardware. a. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.128 inch thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed- in, spline grommet nuts. 7. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard; of aluminum, stainless steel, die-cast steel, malleable iron, or bronze; including the following: a. Cam-action sweep sash lock and keeper at meeting rails. b. Spring-loaded, snap-type lock at jambs. c. Pole-operated, cam-action locking device on meeting rail where rail is more than 72 inches above floor. d. Lift handles for single-hung units. e. Nylon sash rollers for horizontal-sliding units. f. Steel or bronze operating arms. 8. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric; complying with AAMA 701/702. 9. Insect Screens: Provide removable insect screen on each operable exterior sash, with screen frame finished to match window unit, complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201, and as follows: a. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-18, 18-by-16, or 18-by-14 mesh of 0.013- inch- diameter, coated aluminum wire. b. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-16 or 18-by-14 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads, woven and fused to form a fabric mesh; complying with ASTM D 3656. c. Fabric: Manufacturer's standard aluminum wire fabric or glass-fiber mesh fabric. C. Glazing: [Same as adjacent aluminum-framed entrances and storefront glazing] <Insert glazing>. D. Finish: [Match adjacent aluminum-framed entrances and storefront finish] <Insert finish>. 2.6 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system. E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Color: Champagne to match adjacent Lionshead Transit Center and Lionshead Welcome Center. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight framed aluminum storefront system insta�lation. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening. 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing aluminum framed storefront system, accessories, and other components. C. Install aluminum framed storefront system level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. D. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather tight construction. 1. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. E. Install aluminum framed storefront system and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within sliding door to the exterior. F. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surFaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 1. Metal Protection: ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 a. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. b. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. G. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. H. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." I. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length. END OF SECTION 084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 11 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type required, in each finish specified, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. Tag Samples with full description for coordination with the door hardware schedule. Submit Samples before, or concurrent with, submission of door hardware schedule. C. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 b. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. c. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. 2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 6) Mounting locations for door hardware. 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For[Installer] [and] [Architectural Hardware Consultant]. B. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, from the manufacturer. 1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire- rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies. C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests perFormed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware schedule. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer. B. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the DOJ's 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design and ICC A117.1 for door hardware on doors in an accessible route. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. 2. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. 3. Closers: Adjust door and gate closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the time required to move the door to a position of 12 degrees from the latch is 5 seconds minimum. D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of inetals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. 2.2 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames. 2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inchbolt throw. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. D. Lock Trim: 1. Description: As indicated on Hardware Schedule. 2. Levers: Cast 3. Escutcheons (Roses): Cast. 4. Operating Device: Lever with escutcheons (roses). E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. F. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000. 2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices. 2.5 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A15628, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Existing System: a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. 2. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key. B. Keys: Nickel silver. 1. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. 2.6 OPERATING TRIM A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 2.8 DOOR GASKETING A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 2.9 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 2.10 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- thick stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners. 2.11 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 2.12 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation to�erances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface- mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." E. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. F. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Hardware Set F�cterior poors Item Qtv. Basis of Desiqn Product Finish Comments Hinges 3 Stanley F66168 US 32D Satin Stainless Steel Full Mortise,Heavy�Weight,5-Knuckle,4-V2"x 4-1/2"Ball Bearing Lockset 1 Best(Stanley) 47H Series US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Classroom/Office Lock(ANSI F84);14 Le�erwith M Escutcheon-Vandal-Resistant Deadbolt 1 Best(Stanley) S3T Series US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Keyed Both Sides,SS high security Metal Protecti�Trim Units(Kick) 1 Rockwood K1062 CSK,64E US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel Reference Details for Size Threshold 1 Pemko 17`*AK Pemkote Skid Resistant Aluminum *'Width and length to match doorjamb Door Gasket 3 Pemko PSOBL Black Thermoplastic Kerf-in Weatherstrip Head and Jambs Surface Closer 1 DORMA TS 9315 STH US 32D/630 Satin Stainless Steel ADA,Pull Side,Door Mount,Cushion Stop Peep hole 1 Pro�ide at Count Room door only END OF SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Glass for storefront framing. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. GLAZING 088000 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. '�?�;�uble click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the International Building Code and ASTM E 1300. 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. B. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category I I. C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual." GLAZING 088000 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum to be coordinated with the storefront framing system. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. D. Pyrolytic-Coated, Low-Maintenance Glass: Clear float glass with a coating on first surFace having both photocatalytic and hydrophilic properties that act to loosen dirt and to cause water to sheet evenly over the glass instead of beading. 1. �-C�oubYe click here ta find, evaluate, and inseri list of manufacturers and �;roducts.> 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer, ionomeric polymer interlayer or cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. GLAZING 088000 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.6 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190. 1. Sealing System: Dual seals. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Capillary Tubes: Manufacturer's standard capillary tube for high altitude installations. 2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. �I�ouble clicK he�� to find, evaluate, and inserfi I�st of manuiacturers an� products.> 2.8 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. GLAZING 088000 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipu�ated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. GLAZING 088000 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.2 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. F. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.3 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. GLAZING 088000 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.5 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass Type GL-1: Pyrolytic-coated, self-cleaning, low-maintenance, low-E coated, clear insulating glass. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: ��dinal GIa�E ,�_ F ,,_Neat LoE, 'ilkinqion North ��::.; �:�iv Energy Advantage or Saint-Gobain Corporation; Bioclean Cool-Lite. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 5 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Pyrolytic-coated, self-cleaning, low-maintenance, clear annealed float glass. 5. Interspace Content: Air. 6. Indoor Lite: Annealed float glass. 7. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on third surface. END OF SECTION 088000 GLAZING 088000 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum and formed-metal louvers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting"for field painting louvers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal). C. Vertical Louver: Louver with vertical blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are vertical). D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening. E. Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. 1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion. 2. Show mullion profiles and locations. C. Samples: For each type of inetal finish required. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code -Aluminum." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver- blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. B. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. FIXED LOUVERS 089119 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. SMACNA Standard: Compiy with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver Insert drawing designation: 1. Construction Specialties Model 6157 or approved equivalent 2. Louver Depth: 6 inches. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch. 4. Louver Performance Ratings: a. Free Area: Not less than 7.0 sq. ft. for 48-inch- wide by 48-inch- high louver. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1200-fpm. c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.22-inch wg static pressure drop at 1200- fpm free-area intake velocity. d. Air Performance: Not more than 0.15-inch wg static pressure drop at 1000- fpm free-area exhaust velocity. 5. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 2.4 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Bird screening. B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c. C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1. Metal: Same type and form of inetal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. 2. Finish: Mill finish unless otherwise indicated. 3. Type: Non-rewirable, U-shaped frames. D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1. Bird Screening: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 5/8 by 0.050 inch thick. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. Use tamper-resistant screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated. D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. E. Provide extended sills for recessed louvers. F. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view , threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish louvers after assembly. B. Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. FIXED LOUVERS 089119 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants"for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfiaces and dry. FIXED LOUVERS 089119 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. END OF SECTION 089119 FIXED LOUVERS 089119 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board including ceilings, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. B. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board (Mechanical Room): ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Provide in Boiler Room only 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. C. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." D. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072600 "Vapor Retarders." 2.7 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B. Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application. 1. Texture: Orange Peel. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. F. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: On all surfaces indicated to receive gypsum board. 2. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: In Boiler Room only. B. Single-Layer Application: GYPSUM BOARD 092900 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise i nd icated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 3: At all locations. 3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surFaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockup in mechanical room to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE A. "��`'��.',��: t;�PC>{ti k ,:wc, f:;- �If��. ��Vc��°:%'�4��, �1`�C IV1�':'.�'[ �n6;¢ i�`l� �?iaC1Pai�%?..�I`�`fS �'i';� �I'O?��aC.��.> B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style and Location: a. Style B, Cove: . C. Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. H. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors <Insert colors>. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. G. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. PerForm the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surFace preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Steel. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of inetal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 3. Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on exterior wood substrates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surFaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 METAL PRIMERS A. Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal: MPI #79. 2.3 SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS A. Alkyd, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #94. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. C. Proceed with coating application on�y after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surFace-applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer[.] E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. 3. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 4. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Metal conduit. e. Plastic conduit. f. Electrical boxes, junction boxes, cover plates 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. Alkyd System: EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 a. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #94. END OF SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surFace preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Steel. 3. Wood. 4. Gypsum board. 5. ASJ insulation covering. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 2. Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood substrates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Label each coat of each Sample. 3. Label each Sample for location and application area. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surFace to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additiona� colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50. 2.3 WATER-BASED PAINTS A. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 3): MPI #52. 2.4 FLOOR COATINGS A. Sealer, Water Based, for Concrete Floors: MPI #99. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After comp�eting painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final insta�lation, paint surFaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and �eave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. END OF SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes on the following substrates: 1. Exterior Substrates: a. Exposed glued-laminated beams and columns. b. Exposed dimension lumber (rough carpentry). c. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry). d. Exposed wood panel products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for standard paint systems on exterior substrates. 2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for stains and transparent finishes on concrete floors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated. 1. Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches square or 8 inches long. 2. Label each Sample for location and application area. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surFace to represent surFaces and conditions for application of each type of finish system and substrate. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated. C. Stain Colors: Match Architect's samples. 2.2 WOOD FILLERS A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91. 2.3 STAINS A. Stain, Exterior, Solvent Based, Semi-Transparent: MPI #13. 2.4 POLYURETHANE VARNISHES A. Varnish, Aliphatic Polyurethane, Two-Component (Gloss Level 6): MPI #78. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surFace conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. 1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. D. Exterior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. a. For varnish coated stained wood, stain edges and ends and prime with varnish. Prime undersides and backsides with varnish. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty or plastic wood filler tinted to final color. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. 3.5 EXTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Wood substrates, non-traffic surfaces, including wood trim architectural, woodwork, wood (ceiling) siding and wood-based panel products. 1. Semitransparent Stain System: a. Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent, MPI #13. B. Wood substrates non-traffic surfaces including glued-laminated construction exposed joists, and exposed beams. 1. Semitransparent Stain System: a. Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent, matching topcoat. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 b. Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent, MPI #13. 2. Varnish over Semitransparent Stain System: a. Stain Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semi-transparent, MPI #13. b. First Intermediate Coat: Varnish matching topcoat. c. Second Intermediate Coat: Varnish matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Varnish, with UV Inhibitor, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #30. END OF SECTION 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-perFormance coating systems on the following substrates: 1. Exterior Substrates: a. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of inetal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Section 05122 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of inetal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 3. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting"for general field painting. 4. Section 099123 "Interior Painting"for general field painting. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each coating system specified in Part 3. a. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections wil� be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not appiy exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. <Uoubfe click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and are listed in "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated. 3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surFace conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated. C. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning." D. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. High-Build Epoxy System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, as recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, high-build, low gloss, MPI #108. c. Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77. END OF SECTION 099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 099600 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global. 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Fire End & Croker Corporation; 4020. 2 :�-Desiqn F�d�t� a�,:;.: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or pre-approved comparable product by one of the following manufacturers: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. f. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. g. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. h. Moon-American. i. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc. j. Potter Roemer LLC. k. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. 3. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. ==Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and ��r�ducts.> B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install one fire extinguisher and mounting bracket in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 111200.01 - PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT COORDINATION PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Coordination of Owner Provided Vehicle detectors. 2. Coordination of Owner Provided Traffic controllers. 3. Coordination of Owner Provided Entry terminal ticket dispensers. 4. Coordination of Owner Provided Exit terminals. 5. Coordination of Owner Provided Pay stations. 6. Coordination of Owner Provided Miscellaneous parking control equipment. 7. Coordination of Owner Provided Access control units. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards to protect parking control equipment. 2. Section 133423.16 "Fabricated Control Booths" for cashiers'/parking attendants' booths. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, equipment bases, and other preparatory work specified elsewhere. 2. Verify that equipment operation is consistent with system description. 3. Review sequence of operation for each type of parking control equipment. 4. Review coordination of interlocked equipment specified in this Section and elsewhere. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 111200 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for parking control equipment. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties. B. Shop Drawings (Review, Comment and Approval of Owner Provided Shop Drawings): For parking control equipment. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Vehicle Detectors: Layout and method of placement of vehicle loop detector system. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Field quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 ANCHORAGES A. Anchor bolts; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M and ASTM F 2329. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Owner's Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, including equipment bases; accurate placement, pattern, and orientation of anchor bolts; critical dimensions; and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine with Owner's Installer present for roughing-in for electrical and communication systems to verify actual locations of connections before parking control equipment installation. PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 111200 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Owner's Installer will proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Excavation and Concrete Bases for Parking Control Equipment: -Excavate and provide reinforced concrete bases, including anchor bolt and embeds, suitable to withstand loads imposed by barrier gate including wind loads imposed on gate. Recess base to dimensions and depths and at locations as required by barrier gate manufacturer's written instructions, templates and as indicated on Drawings. B. Excavation for Traffic Controllers: Hand-excavate recesses to dimensions and depths and at locations as required by traffic controller manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide parking control bases and electrical/communications" conduit and pull wire as required "rough-in"for complete and integrated equipment installation. B. Vehicle Loop Detectors: Bury and seal wire loop provided by Owner's Contractor according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide electrical and communications conduit including pull wire as required "rough-in" for complete and integrated equipment installation. C. Traffic Controllers: Provide recessed concrete bases, conduit and pull wire for cabinets to be attached with anchor bolts or expansion anchors at �ocations indicated on Drawings. D. Entry Terminal Ticket Dispensers, Pay Stations and Exit Terminals: Provide recessed concrete bases, conduit and pul� wire for cabinets to be attached with anchor bolts or expansion anchors at locations indicated on Drawings. E. Fee Computers: Provide conduit and pull wire for computers at locations indicated, including connecting to peripheral equipment and remote computers. Provide electrical and communications conduit including pull wire as required "rough-in" for complete and integrated equipment installation. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Cap conduit to prevent the intrusion of moisture until owner's contract can install wiring and terminations. END OF SECTION 111200 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 111200 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 111200 - PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Automatic barrier gates. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards to protect parking control equipment. 2. Section 133423.16 "Fabricated Control Booths" for cashiers'/parking attendants' booths. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for parking control equipment. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties. B. Shop Drawings: For parking control equipment. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 111200 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For parking control equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Gate Arms: Two breakaway gate arms for each gate installed, complete with accessory components. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain parking control equipment from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 AUTOMATIC BARRIER GATE A. General: Provide parking control device consisting of operator and controller housed in a weathertight, tamper-resistant cabinet enclosure with gate arm. Device shall be activated by a signal from manual or remote control device. Fabricate unit with gate- arm height in down position of not more than 35 inches above pavement. Basis of Design: 1. B&B Roadway, VW-4 Vertical Warning Gate B. Standards: ASTM F 2200 for barrier gates and gate operators that are listed and labeled according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency. C. Controller: Factory-sealed, solid-state, plug-in type, with galvanized-steel box for wiring connections. 1. Physical Characteristics: a. On-off power supply switch. b. Automatic-manual switch. 2. Operational Characteristics: a. Automatic instant-reversing obstacle detector mechanism that stops downward motion of gate arm if arm contacts or nears an object and that immediately returns arm to upward position. Include a zero- to 60-second, variable-time reset device. b. Programmable automatic timer. PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 111200 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Cabinets: The operating mechanism and main control components shall be contained in a weatherproof housing. 1. The housing shall be constructed of .188" (4.8mm) carbon steel, hot dip galvanized after fabrication. 2. Exterior surfaces shall be painted aluminum. 3. All fasteners shall be corrosion resistant. 4. Housing design shall allow for easy removal of the arm shaft assembly as a unit, including bearings and main arm crank, for ease of service. 5. Arm assembly mounting design shall be fully gasketed and shaft openings shall incorporate O-ring seals. 6. Front and rear access doors shall be mounted on full cross bronze straps. Hinges shall be of the slip-off type and shall have stainless steel pins. 7. Door handles, two per door, shall use a vise action to compress a neoprene bulb- type gasket to seal the door openings. 8. Provide a padlockable strap suitable for heavy duty standard padlocks or shackleless padlocks, provided by others. E. Straight Gate Arm with Counterbalance: The gate arm shall be 4" (102mm) square, 6005-T5 aluminum extruded tubing. 1. Arm length shall be 40' (12m) from the centerline of the housing. Stainless steel truss cables and a damping type bumper rod shall be furnished with longer arms at the discretion of the manufacturer. 2. Front and rear arm surfaces shall be covered with alternating red and white high intensity reflective sheeting. a. Stripes shall be 16" (406mm) wide, and shall slope at 45 degrees down toward the arm tip. Remaining exposed surFaces shall be painted white 3. Length: As indicated on Drawings. F. Arm Base: The arm base shall be designed with a shear pin mechanism to minimize damage to the gate and vehicle in the event of a collision. In the event of an impact, the shear pin shall break, allowing the arm to swing approximately 75 to 80 degrees. At the full open position, a spring-loaded latch shall engage, preventing the arm from swinging back into traffic. Arm shall be easily reset by manually releasing the latch, rotating the arm back into position and replacing the shear pin. G. Counterweights: At the rear end of the side arm channels, hot dip galvanized counterweights shall be mounted to balance the arm. Counterweights shall be sectional and shall permit at least 10% adjustment. H. Arm Shaft: The main arm shaft shall be of 2" (51 mm) diameter AISI 4150 with a minimum tensile strength of 140,000 psi. The shaft shall be mounted in heavy duty relubricable ball bearings. I. Operator: The warning arm shall pivot in the vertical plane via a mechanical 4-bar linkage. The linkage shall utilize cranks keyed to the main arm shaft and transmission shaft and an adjustable connecting rod between a pair of self-aligning spherical rod ends. The connecting rod shall be of 1" (25mm) diameter AISI 4150. The linkage shall PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 111200 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 be driven by a fully enclosed, double reduction, worm gear speed reducer. Gear ratio used shall produce an operation time of 11 seconds. 1. On longer arms, an auxiliary crank shall be used, paired with the transmission crank, to reduce the load on the transmission and to better balance and stabilize the load on the housing and mounting structure. The auxiliary crank shall be mounted in a permanently lubricated bronze bearing. 2. The velocity of the arm shall follow a sinusoidal pattern to provide smooth operation. The arm shall begin and end its full motion path with zero velocity and accelerate smoothly to maximum velocity at mid-travel. J. Motor: C-face design mounted directly to the transmission. 1. Instantly reversing and overload protected. 2. Voltage and phase shall be coordinated and as specified by the Contractor. 3. 1/2 hp, except when a greater rating is recommended by the gate manufacturer to handle exceptionally heavy applications. K. Braking Mechanism: Solenoid-release, automatic brake. 1. The brake shall have a manual release lever to permit manual operation of the gate during emergencies or setup. L. Handcrank: Provide a handcrank with each gate to facilitate manual operation of the gate. M. Limit Switch: The gate limit switch assembly shall be a self-contained unit. 1. The assembly shall provide 8 independent SPDT control switches. 2. Switches shall be rated for 15 amps at 480 VAC. 3. Switches shall be controlled by individually adjustable cams. 4. The limit switch assembly design shall permit adjustment of all cams with the gate in any position. 5. The limit switch assembly shall have a removable cover to help prevent accidental contact with switch terminals. Shaft, cams, bushings and housing pieces shall be of non-ferrous corrosion resistant materials. N. Safety Switches Terminal Blocks and Wiring: A manual disconnect switch shall be provided, pre-wired at the factory to break the main motor leads, to protect personnel during service. 1. Safety switches shall be installed and set at the factory to break the control circuit when either access door is opened. Door safety switches shall have a pull-to- override feature for test operation and shall automatically reset when doors are closed. 2. Control components and terminal blocks shall be mounted inside an electrical enclosure mounted facing the roadway side access opening. 3. Pressure-type, modular terminal blocks shall be fully labeled and clearly coded to wiring diagrams. All control wiring shall be clearly coded to wiring diagrams and shall terminate at the terminal block. PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 111200 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 4. Connections to screw-type terminals shall have lugs. Conductors shall be #16 AWG stranded, minimum. Wiring shall be run in conduit where practical. O. Characteristics: 1. Barrier-arm warning safety signs on both sides of unit to limit traffic to vehicular traffic. 2. Low-voltage red warning lights that illuminate when gate is in down position. 3. Low-voltage light on cabinet top that flashes or changes from red to green when barrier gate is operating. 4. Gate-arm tip support with electromagnetic lock. 2.3 ACCESS CONTROL UNITS A. General: Provide access control unit that activates barrier gates. 1. `V�oubYe click here to find, evaluate, and inseri list of manufacturers and ;broducts.> B. Unit Housing: Fabricate from welded cold-rolled steel or aluminum sheet with weatherproof front access panel equipped with flush-mounted lock and two keys. Provide face-lighted unit fully visible at night. 1. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel or powder-coat finish system. C. Radio-Controlled System: Digital access control system consisting of: 1. code-compatible universal coaxial receiver, one per barrier gate, 2. remote antenna with coaxial cable and mounting brackets, 3. two permanently transmitter(s) per receiver mounted in each toll booth 4. four portable transmitter(s) per receiver designed to operate barrier gate. 5. Provide programmable transmitter with multiple-code capability permitting validation or voiding of no fewer than 1000 codes per channel configured for the following functions: a. Transmitters: Single-button operated, with open and close functions. 2.4 ANCHORAGES A. Anchor bolts; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M and ASTM F 2329. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, including equipment bases; accurate PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 111200 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 placement, pattern, and orientation of anchor bolts; critical dimensions; and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical and communication systems to verify actual locations of connections before parking control equipment installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Excavation and Concrete Bases for Automatic Barrier Gates: -Excavate and provide reinforced concrete bases suitable to withstand loads imposed by barrier gate including wind loads imposed on gate. Recess base to dimensions and depths and at locations as required by barrier gate manufacturer's written instructions, templates and as indicated on Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install parking control equipment as required for complete and integrated installation. B. Automatic Barrier Gates: Anchor cabinets to concrete bases with anchor bolts or expansion anchors, and mount barrier gate arms. 1. Install barrier gates according to UL 325. C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust parking control equipment to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Confirm that locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. C. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished parking control equipment, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Remove barrier gate arms during the construction period to prevent damage, and install them immediately before Substantial Completion. PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 111200 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain parking control equipment. END OF SECTION 111200 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 111200 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes plastic-laminate countertops. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including high-pressure decorative laminate adhesive for bonding plastic laminate. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in plastic-laminate countertops. 2. Apply AW I Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic laminates. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For [each type of product.] [the following:] 1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. High-pressure decorative laminate. 3. Adhesives. B. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AW I Quality Certification Program certificates. PLASTIGLAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions"Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards"for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Grade: Custom. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: PLASTIGLAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Solid colors, matte finish. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. F. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard. G. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch. 1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional layers of core material laminated to top. H. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-1/4-inch OD, color as selected, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. PLASTIGLAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemb�e countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. 1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. C. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowe�s, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints. D. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. E. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. PLASTIGLAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 3. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 123623.13 PLASTIGLAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 123623.13 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 133423.16 - FABRICATED CONTROL BOOTHS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes fabricated steel control booths. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"for foundations and slabs. 2. Section 260010 "Electrical Provisions" for electrical service supply an connections. 3. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving"for concrete pavement and walks. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for control booths. B. Shop Drawings: For control booths. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, accessories, and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 1. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans and templates. Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach control booths to foundation. Indicate post reactions at each location. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1. Include Samples of glazing, wall panels and accessories to verify finish selection. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. FABRICATED CONTROL BOOTHS 133423.16 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For control booths to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Cast-in Anchorage: Coordinate installation of anchorages for control booths. Furnish sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete bases. Include setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Cast-in Conduit: Provide and Coordinate installation of conduit for parking equipment, electrical, communications and technology features to be placed within control booths. Furnish conduit that is to be embedded in concrete bases. Include feeders, wiring, terminations and power necessary for complete and functional control booths. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace control booths that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Control booths shall withstand the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7: 1. Loads: As indicated on Drawings. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Safety Glazing Products: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of SGCC or another certification agency or manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. FABRICATED CONTROL BOOTHS 133423.16 - 2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1. 2.2 FABRICATED STEEL CONTROL BOOTHS A. General: Fabricate control booths from an integrated set of mutually dependent components to form a completed assembly, ready for installation on Project site. 1. 4Double click here to find evaluate and insert list of manufacturers and ��;sroducts.> B. Building Style: Basis of Design: 1. Par-Kut Presidential Series Model PRES 2. As indicated on Drawings. C. Structural Framework: Fabricated from 2-by-2-by-0.075-inch steel structural or mechanical tubing. Connect framework by welding. D. Doors: As indicated on Drawings. 1. Swinging Door: 1-3/4 inches thick; tubular-frame design fabricated from galvanized steel; with top half of door glazed. Equip door with deadlock, three butt hinges, closer, and full weather stripping. a. Glazing: Fixed unit with clear, tempered, insulating glass. b. Deadlock: Mortised, with lever handle and removable cylinder capable of being master keyed. E. Windows: Extruded-aluminum sash frames glazed with clear, tempered, insulating glass. 1. Frame Finish: Manufacturer's standard mill or clear anodic. 2. Operable Windows: Equip windows with cam locks, weather stripping, and stainless-steel ball-bearing rollers. 3. Corner Shape: Square. F. Wall Panel Assembly: Assembly consisting of exterior face panel fabricated from 0.079-inch nominal-thickness, galvanized-steel sheet; and interior face panel fabricated from 0.064-inch nominal-thickness, galvanized-steel sheet; with 2-inch- thick, rigid fiberglass or polystyrene board insulation in cavity between exterior and interior face panels. G. Base/Floor Assembly: 4-inch- high assembly consisting of perimeter frame welded to structural framework of booth. Fabricate frame from 2-by-4-inch galvanized-steel structural tubing; 0.108-inch nominal-thickness, C-shaped, galvanized-steel sheet channels; or galvanized structural-steel angles. Include anchor clips fabricated from 1/4-inch- thick galvanized-steel plate, predrilled and welded to exterior of integral floor frame. FABRICATED CONTROL BOOTHS 133423.16 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Finished Floor: 0.108-inch nominal-thickness, galvanized, rolled steel tread plate. H. ADA Unit Base/Floor Assembly: No perimeter frame, with finished floor fabricated from 0.108-inch nominal-thickness, galvanized, rolled steel tread plate. I. Roof/Ceiling Assembly: Assembly consisting of exterior roof panels, interior ceiling panels, and insulation between exterior and interior panels; sloped to drain at booth perimeter. 1. Exterior Roof Panel: Roof welded, caulked and weatherproofed. 4:12 pitch minimum. Fabricated from 0.079-inch] nominal-thickness, galvanized-steel sheet; 1" standing ribs 12" on center with painted finish, continuously welded seams ridge cap covers at hips and 1/2" perimeter drip edge. 2. Interior Ceiling Panel: Fabricated from 0.079-inch nominal-thickness, galvanized- steel sheet; with fiberglass insulation in cavity between ceiling and roof. 3. Insulated Exterior/Interior Panel: Fabricated from 0.028-inch nominal-thickness, galvanized-steel sheet faces and expanded-foam insulation core. 4. Canopy Fascia: Fabricated from 0.079-inch nominal-thickness, galvanized-steel sheet, of manufacturer's standard design. a. Height: As indicated in Drawings. b. Overhang: As indicated in Drawings beyond face of walls below. J. Work Counters: Full width of control booth, reinforced; with 16-inch- wide cash drawer below each counter and an access opening for electrical cords at each rear corner of counter. 1. Material: 0.078-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet. 2. Depth: 18 inches. K. Electrical Power Service: 125-A, 120/240-V ac, single-phase, three-wire load center, with no fewer than four open circuits; located under one end of work counter. Run copper wiring in 1/2-inch EMT conduit. 1. Provide one 120-V ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) power receptacle(s). L. Lighting Fixtures: Two ceiling-mounted fluorescent lighting fixture(s), 48 inches long, with acrylic lens and two 40-W lamps in each fixture. Provide single-pole switch mounted adjacent to door to control lighting fixture. M. Heating Unit: Wall -mounted, thermostatically controlled, 208/240V electric heater with fan-forced operation and with capacity of not less than 5000 Btu/hfor cold climates. Enclose in enameled-steel cabinet and mount under work counter. N. Accessories: Provide the following for each control booth: 1. Floor safe. O. Anchorage: Cast-in-place anchor bolts or Postinstalled anchors fabricated from non- ferrous or corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design greater FABRICATED CONTROL BOOTHS 133423.16 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 than or equal to the design load as determined by testing conducted by a qualified testing agency. P. Materials: 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial quality, G90 coating designation; mill phosphatized. 2. Galvanized, Rolled Steel Tread Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from steel plate complying with ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 55; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 3. Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B. 4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 5. Steel Mechanical Tubing: ASTM A 513, welded-steel mechanical tubing. 6. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 7. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: a. Sheet: ASTM B 209. b. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221. c. Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T4 or Alloy 6061-T6. 8. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 9. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS or HGL grade. 10. Plywood: DOC PS 1, Exteriorgrade. 11. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 12. Clear Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, and Quality q3; 6 mm thick. 13. Clear Insulating Glass: ASTM E 2190. Factory-assembled units consisting of two lites of 2.5-mm-thick clear float glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, and dehydrated air space, with a total overall unit thickness of 5/8 inch and with manufacturer's standard dual seal. 14. Ballistic-Resistant Glazing: Tested to comply with bullet-resistant testing level i nd icated. Q. Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two- coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Factory fabricate control booths completely. B. Factory preglaze windows and doors. C. Factory prewire control booths, ready for connection to service at Project site. D. Accessible Control Booths: Where indicated to be accessible, fabricate control booths as follows: FABRICATED CONTROL BOOTHS 133423.16 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Provide service windows located no higher than 34 inches above exterior grade. 2. Provide door opening with minimum 32-inch clear width. 3. Provide minimum 60-inch clear turning spacing within the booth. 4. Provide minimum 27-inch clearance beneath interior work surfaces. Locate work surfaces 28 inches minimum and 34 inches maximum above the floor. 5. Locate controls and operable parts no lower than 15 inches and no higher than 48 inches above the floor where reach is unobstructed. Where side reach is obstructed, locate controls and operable parts no lower than 15 inches and no higher than 46 inches above the floor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, including concrete bases; accurate placement, pattern, and orientation of anchor bolts; critical dimensions; and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical and communication systems to verify actual locations of connections before control booth installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install control booths according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Accessible Control Booths: Install with interior floor surface at same elevation as adjacent paved surfaces. C. Set control booths plumb and aligned. Level baseplates true to plane with full bearing on concrete bases. D. Fasten control booths securely to concrete base with anchorage indicated. E. Connect to electrical power service and data systems. F. Perform startup checks of heating units according to manufacturer's written instructions. FABRICATED CONTROL BOOTHS 133423.16 - 6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors, operable windows, and hardware to operate smoothly, easily, properly, and without binding. Confirm that locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. C. After completing installation, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 133423.16 FABRICATED CONTROL BOOTHS 133423.16 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Vai�, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 220413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. B. Related Section: 1. Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage Piping"for storm drainage piping outside the building. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials,"for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain"for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer"for plastic sewer piping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule"Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ANACO-Husky. b. Dallas Specialty& Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. d. Matco-Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. Facility Storm Drainage Piping 220413 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Vai�, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe. 2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 2.3 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40. B. Cellular-Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40. C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. B. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40. C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 2.5 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. General Requirements: Fitting or device forjoining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. 2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified-piping-system fitting. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Facility Storm Drainage Piping 220413 - 2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vai�, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. I. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. J. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow. K. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C 105. L. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." M. Install underground ABS and PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. N. Plumbing Specialties: Facility Storm Drainage Piping 220413 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vai�, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 1. Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." 3. Install drains in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping." R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasketed joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook"for compression joints. B. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook"for hubless-piping coupling joints. C. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828 procedure. Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder. D. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." Facility Storm Drainage Piping 220413 - 4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vai�, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 3. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. B. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod. 6. Spacing for 10-foot pipe lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties. 1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 2. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance Facility Storm Drainage Piping 220413 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Vai�, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE of equipment. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping[, except outside leaders,] on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. Facility Storm Drainage Piping 220413 - 6 Lionshead Parking Entry Vai�, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 4. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 5. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. END OF SECTION Facility Storm Drainage Piping 220413 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 220423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cleanouts. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANOUTS A. Floor Cleanouts : 1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule cleanouts. 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Type: Cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule. 4. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron . 5. Clamping Device: Not required. 6. Outlet Connection: Threaded. 7. Closure: Cast-iron plug. 8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set-screws or other device. 9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Polished bronze. 10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 11. Top-Loading Classification: Heavy Duty . 12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the Storm Drainage Piping 220423 - 1 Specialties Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE following instructions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 220423 Storm Drainage Piping 220423 - 2 Specialties Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 230010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further instructions and be governed by the requirements thereunder. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. Furnish all labor and materials and perform all operations necessary for the installation of complete and operating mechanical systems subject to the conditions of the contract. The work also includes the completion of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all systems; this includes the furnishing of all materials for filling systems to make them operable, including water, refrigerant, oil, grease, antifreeze and brine. Prove satisfactory operation of all equipment and controls to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER on request. B. Work Not Included 1. Certain labor and materials may be furnished and/or installed under other divisions of these specifications. Coordinate with other trades and arrange the work to make the parts fit together. The following items are to be accomplished under other divisions of these specifications. a. Temporary Heat: See Paragraph 1.7, this Section and Division 1. b. Concrete: See paragraph 3.10, this Section. c. Electrical Equipment and Wiring: See paragraph 3.11, this section. d. Temporary Water and Toilet: See Division 1. C. Equipment Furnished by Owner 1. Rough-in service pipes to locations as required by architectural and mechanical drawings and equipment shop drawings. Provide service valves on all pipes except waste and vent pipes, plug or cap these. Final connections to equipment will be made by the Contractor. 1.3 PROVISIONS A. Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, and the mechanical drawings and all items hereinafter specified. 1. Prior to any work being performed under this division, examine architectural, structural, civil, electrical, specialty systems, and interior design drawings and specifications. If any discrepancies occur between them and the mechanical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 2. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the mechanical work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 3. Coordinate the mechanical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of the work. Coordinate mechanical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. 4. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the Architect and Owner. If the Architect or Owner's agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor shall remove the material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. 5. In acceptance or rejection of installed mechanical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.4 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES/SITE A. Visit the premises site before submitting bid as no extras will be allowed for lack of knowledge of existing conditions. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conform to applicable sections of NFPA 13. B. Conform to the National Electrical Code, 2011 Edition. C. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. D. In case of difference between these specifications, codes, laws, industry standards, and/or utility company regulations the most stringent shall govern. E. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. 1.6 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES A. Apply for and pay for all permits, fees, licenses and inspections for this Division of work. 1. Do not include the cost of any"Plant Investment Fee" or"System Development Charge" for sewer and/or water charged by the City. This will be arranged for and paid for by the Owner. 2. Do not include the cost of any"Gas Application Fee"charged by the Utility Company. This will be arranged and paid for by the Owner. B. Notify proper authorities when work is ready for inspections required by applicable codes, rules and regulations, allowing sufficient time for inspections to be made without hindering progress of the work. Furnish to the Owner copies of inspection certificates of acceptance. 1.7 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Temporary heat will be furnished by the General Contractor. Use of the permanent heating system will not be allowed without written authorization from the MECHANICAL ENGINEER. In Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE case the permanent heating system is used for temporary heat, the General Contractor shall pay all costs until acceptance by the Owner. 1.8 EXISTING UTILITIES A. The plans indicate the location, type and sizes of various utilities within the site where known. These utilities are indicated as accurately as possible. If utilities are encountered during construction, which are not shown on the drawings, ask for instructions from the Architect. Any relocation or remodeling required will then be directed by change order. Assume all responsibility for protection of all utilities, shown or not, and repair any damage caused by this construction at no extra charge to the Owner. B. Investigate with proper authorities for all existing water taps, etc. and make arrangements to pay for all removal charges in original bid. C. Owners of all underground utilities shall be notified at least 2 business days prior to excavation so that they can locate and mark underground facilities. 1.9 DRAWINGS A. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and are not to be scaled for dimensions. Take all dimensions from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings, and from the structure itself before fabricating any work. Verify all space requirements, coordinating with other trades, and install the systems in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner. B. Conceal all piping in finished areas of the building except where otherwise noted on the drawings. C. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, unless approval is given in writing by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER for deviation. 1.10 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Architect for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Failure to so request clarification of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility. The signing of the Contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 1.11 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment. B. Refer to equipment specifications in other Divisions for additional rough-in requirements. 1.12 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components. B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of inechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building. F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials. G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible, and in accordance with minimum required clearances as specified in codes and regulations. H. The word "concealed" as used in this specification refers to such spaces as pipe and duct chases, pipe and duct trenches, above plastered ceilings, in walls and buried where pipe and/or duct is inaccessible when building is complete. "Exposed" is intended to be within equipment rooms, unfinished areas, above "push up" ceilings, accessible pipe and duct tunnels. I. The term "furnish" means supply and deliver to Project, unless otherwise defined in greater detail. The term "install" is used to describe operations at Project, from inspecting and unloading, to completion in place, ready for intended use. The term "provide" means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, unless otherwise defined in greater detail. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Proposed Product List: Include Products specified in Divisions 22 and 23 specifications. C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, Products, and accessories in a single submittal. D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. E. Submit miscellaneous items specified on the drawings, but not covered in the specifications. Make no substitutions without prior approval from the Architect. Mechanical General Provisions 230010 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 1.14 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings on all equipment, Temperature Controls and Fire Protection. Provide shop drawings to the Architect and Engineer showing locations of all access panels. B. Shop drawings required for this project are as follows: 1. Plumbing Fixtures 2. Insulation 3. Boilers 4. Pumps 5. Piping 6. Motor Starters 7. Temperature Controls 8. Exhaust Fans 9. Snowmelt Tubing 10. Glycol Feeders 11. Louvers C. Present shop drawing submittal data at one time, bound in three-ring binders, indexed in a neat and orderly manner. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Provide five sets of submittal data, unless noted otherwise in Division 1. Do not begin work until one (1) copy is returned. D. Provide, with shop drawing submittal, 1/4" scale layout drawings of rooms with boilers, chillers, and HVAC equipment. Layouts shall show locations of, and shall be coordinated with electrical equipment, and equipment shall be drawn to scale. E. Place orders for all equipment in time to prevent any delay in construction schedule or completion of project. If any materials or equipment are not ordered in time, additional charges made by equipment manufacturers to complete their equipment in time to meet construction schedule, together with any special handling charges, shall be borne by the Contractor. F. Contractor agrees that shop drawing submittals processed by the engineer are not change orders. The purpose of shop drawing submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and contract documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or after shop drawings and specifications shall control and shall be followed. G. Contractor to provide manufacturers' recommended installation manuals for equipment. H. Review of shop drawings does not relieve this Contractor from the responsibility of furnishing equipment and materials of proper dimension, size, quantity, quality and all performance characteristics to efficiently perForm the requirements and intent of the contract documents. Review does not relieve this Contractor from responsibility for errors on the shop drawings. If the shop drawings deviate from the contract documents, advise the MECHANICAL ENGINEER of the deviations in writing accompanying the shop drawings, including the reasons for the deviations. Coordinate all required changes with the other trades affected. If the changes are occasioned by the Contractor, he shall pay any costs involved. Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 1.15 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of Architect before proceeding. 1.16 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the process of the work, maintain an accurate record of the installation of the mechanical systems. Upon completion of the mechanical systems installation, transfer all record data to blue-line prints of the original drawings. Drawings shall include all addendum items, charge orders, alternations, reroutings, etc. As a condition of acceptance of the project, deliver to the Architect one copy of the record drawings. 1.17 WARRANTY A. All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified. B. Guarantee all workmanship, materials and equipment and replace any found defective without cost to the Owner, for one year after final acceptance, as defined in General Conditions. C. Each warranty for longer than the one year described above (that comes with equipment used on the job) shall be passed on to the owner with dates of start and end of the warranty. 1.18 ENGINEERING BY CONTRACTOR A. The construction of this building requires the contractor to design several systems or subsystems. All such design shall be the completed responsibility of the contractor. B. Systems or subsystems which require engineering responsibility by the contractor include, but are not limited to: 1. Fire sprinkler. 2. Equipment supports, not fully detailed in the drawings. 3. Pipe hangers and anchors not specified in these documents, or catalogued by the manufacturer. 4. Temperature controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER A. Equipment in the following categories shall be of one manufacturer or available through one manufacturer for each category to facilitate ease of maintenance for the Owner. 1. Motors (open drip-proof squirrel cage) 2. Starters 3. Temperature Controls Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 6 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 4. Plumbing Fixture Trim 5. Thermometers 6. Pressure Gauges 7. Gate Valves 8. ButterFly Valves 9. Plug Valves 10. Globe Valves 11. Check Valves 12. Balancing Valves 13. Radiator Valves 14. Traps 15. Dielectric Unions 16. Strainers 17. Air Filters 2.2 PRIOR APPROVALS A. Bidder's Choice 1. Materials, equipment or services listed by several identifying names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed names may be bid without soliciting prior acceptance. Where more than one name is given in the specifications, the first named manufacturer's material, equipment or services is contemplated and any changes and their costs, required to accommodate the other named material or equipment as well as space requirements for the other named materials or equipment, must be assumed by the Contractor in his bid. (See Shop Drawing Requirement). B. Performance Specification 1. When any product is specified only by requirement to meet an industry standard or regulating body standard (such as U.L., AGA, AWWA, ANSI, etc.) and the item proposed carries approval of that body, no prior acceptance by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER is needed. 2. When any product or service is specified by requirement to meet a performance standard or is specified by a generic specification, (no manufacturers name listed) no prior acceptance by the MECHANICAL ENGINEER is needed except as specifically called for in these specifications. C. Acceptance 1. Prior approval requests sent directly to the Engineer will not be reviewed. Manufacturer's representative seeking prior approval must submit request through the General Contractor to issuance to the Architect. 2. Material and equipment specified is used as a basis of standard, and while not specifically mentioned, material gauges, weights, appearance and space requirements must be met by any substitutions. 3. Action for substitutions specified herein will be given only after the receipt of complete data showing performance over entire range, physical dimensions and material construction all SPECIFICALLY marked for the individual item. Letter of transmittal with at least one (1) copy and one (1) marked up copy of all descriptive data shall be submitted to the MECHANICAL ENGINEER'S Office. 4. Submit shop drawings for all materials and equipment other than the first named in theses specifications showing any changes required in piping, ducting, electrical wiring, space allocation etc. Be responsible to make all changes required to accommodate and Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE to pay for these changes. Coordinate changes required with all other trades. Pay for all changes resulting from re-arranging equipment. 5. See General Conditions for method of notification of acceptance. 2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS (CONTRACTOR AND/OR OWNER INITIATED) A. Materials or equipment listed by several manufacturers' names are intended to be bidder's choice, and any of the listed manufacturers may be used in the base bid. Materials or equipment not listed are considered substitutions. B. Performance Specification: When any item is specified by requirement to meet a performance, industry or regulating body standard or is specified by a generic spec, (no manufacturer's name listed) no prior approval by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer is needed unless specifically called for in these specifications. C. Contractor to be responsible for any changes and costs to accommodate any equipment except the first named in the specification. D. Substitutions for Material 1. Equipment and materials not listed as equivalents may be proposed as deductive alternates to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item to the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such alternate proposals shall not be substituted for the base bid and must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be deducted for each item and all deviations from specified items. Highlight all difference from specified equipment. If any such alternates are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items within 14 days of award of contract. Late requests for proposed substitutions shall not be accepted by the Engineer due to scheduling or delivery concerns. 2.4 BID ALTERNATE(S) A. Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. B. Alternate(s)for Material and Equipment 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s)to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid alternates at the time the base bids are due. 2.5 SAFETY PROVISIONS A. Any refrigeration system containing CFG11, CFG12, HCFC-123, HCFG22, or any of the other refrigerants listed in the Clean Air Act as a Class I or Class II Ozone Depleting Compound shall Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 8 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE comply with the Clean Air Acts and the Colorado Air Quality Control Commission Regulation #15. B. As a minimum all systems shall be equipped with refrigerant recovery service valves, relief valves capable of resetting after activation, and for system with more than 50 pounds of charge, and isolateable receiver and/or condenser capable of holding the complete charge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STORAGE A. Provide for proper storage of all materials and equipment and assume responsibility for losses due to any cause. All storage shall be within the contact limit lines of the building site. Cover and store all equipment and materials out of elements; any rusted or weather damaged item shall not be used. 3.2 PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions 1. Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the product manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 2. Consult with manufacturer's technical representatives, who are recognized as technical experts, for specific instructions on special project conditions. 3. If a conflict exists, notify the Architect/Engineer in writing and obtain his instruction before proceeding with the work in question. B. Movement of Equipment 1. Wherever possible, arrange for the movement and positioning of equipment so that enclosing partitions, walls and roofs will not be delayed or need to be removed. 2. Otherwise, advise Contractor of opening requirements to be maintained for the subsequent entry of equipment. C. Heavy Equipment 1. Coordinate the movement of heavy items with shoring and bracing so that the building structure will not be overloaded during the movement and installation. 2. Where mechanical products to be installed on the existing roof are too heavy to be hand- carried, do not transport across the existing roof deck; position by crane or other device so as to avoid overloading the roof deck. D. Clearances 1. Install piping and ductwork: a. Straight and true. b. Aligned with other work. c. Close to walls and overhead structure (allowing for insulation). d. Concealed, where possible, in occupied spaces. e. Out-of-the-way with maximum passageway and headroom remaining in each space. Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 2. Except as otherwise indicated, arrange mechanical services and overhead equipment with a minimum of: a. 7'0" headroom in storage spaces. b. 8'6" headroom in other spaces. 3. Do not obstruct windows, doors or other openings. 4. Give the right-of way to piping systems required to slope for drainage (over other service lines and ductwork). 5. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping pipes whether or not indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to affect these offsets, transitions and changes in direction. E. Access 1. Install all work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchanger bundles, boiler tubes, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts which might require periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, traps, starters, motors, control components and to clear the openings of doors and of access panels. 3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. B. Close all pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Architect. C. Do not allow any fans in the HVAC system to operate before the area served by the fan has been cleaned and vacuumed of all debris and dust which might enter the system. D. Any equipment, duct or piping systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above "MILL"or"SHOP" conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction. E. Initial fill of traps 1. Provide initial water seal fill for all waste p-traps, condensate traps, or similar traps. 3.4 PROTECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS A. All temporary water connections shall be made with an approved back flow preventer. B. All hose bibbs shall have, as a minimum, a vacuum breaker to prevent back flow. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Division 1 sections of the specifications regarding requirements of Record Drawings and Operation and maintenance Manual submittal and systems demonstration. Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 1. Demonstrate that each system operates properly. 2. Explain the operation of each system to the Owner's Representative. Explain use of O&M manual in operating and maintaining systems. B. Date and time of demonstration will be determined by the Owner. 3.6 CONCRETE A. All poured in place concrete shall be furnished under the Architectural Divisions of these Specifications. B. This Contractor shall coordinate all requirements for concrete surrounding buried duct. Ducts shall be tied down to concrete deadman and completely surrounded with 3" of concrete. 3.7 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING FOR MECHANICAL DIVISION A. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule. (MD is Mechanical Division - ED is Electrical Division). SET IN PLACE OR WIRED AND FURNISHED MOUNTED CONNECTED ITEM UNDER UNDER UNDER 1. Equipment Motors and Thermal MD MD ED overloads, resistance heaters (c). 2. Motor Controllers; magnetic starters, reduced voltage starters and MD ED(a) ED overload relays. 3. Disconnect switches, fused or unfused, H.P. rated switches, ED(a) ED(a) ED thermal overload switches and fuses, manual o eratin switches. 4. Push-button stations, pilot lights, multi-speed switches, float switches, thermostats, control relays, time clocks, control transformers, control MD MD(b) MD(b) panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches and interlocks. 5. Contactors, 120V control circuit outlets for control panels and for ED ED ED boiler controls and for fire protection controls and smoke detectors. 6. Duct Detectors, fire/smoke dampers, MD MD ED(c) elevator vent dampers. a. If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, wiring and connections only by ED. b. If float switches, line thermostats, P.E. switches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, they shall be furnished by the Mechanical Division, but shall be set in place and connected under the Electrical Division, except that where such items are no integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., they shall be set in place under the Mechanical Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 11 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechanical Division. Control devices carrying full load current furnished by Mechanical and wired by Electrical shall be located at the device being controlled, unless shown on drawings or mutual agreement is made between the contractors with no change in the contract price. 1) Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by ED; all control function wiring by MD. c. The above list does not attempt to include all components. All items necessary for a complete system shall be included in the base contract. B. Connections to all controls directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment shall be made with flexible connectors. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Piping 1. All exposed piping, except piping in finished spaces, shall be identified in conformance with "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems", ANSI A13. All markers must be in compliance with respect to (1) proper letter color, (2) proper letter size, (3) correct background color, and (4) proper marker length. 2. Directional flow arrows shall be applied adjacent to each pipe mark. 3. For pipes under 3/4" O.D. color coded (as described above) identification tags shall be securely fastened at all required locations. Tags shall be 1-1/2 inches in diameter. 4. All piping shall be marked at the following locations: (1) next to each valve and fitting, (2) at each branch and riser take-off, (3) at each wall, ceiling or floor penetration, (4) on pipes that lead to and from underground areas, and (5) every 30 feet on horizontal and vertical pipe runs. Identification of all piping systems shall conform to the designations in the mechanical legend on the drawings. B. Valves 1. All valves shall be identified by color coded (to match piping system identification)tags which indicate both service and number. Tags shall be 1-1/2 inch in diameter and have 1/4 inch high letters to indicate service and 7/16 inch high numbers. Tags shall be securely fastened to all valves. Service designations shall match abbreviations for piping systems given in mechanical legend on the drawings. Valve charts shall be provided and shall include (1)valve identification number, (2) service, (3) location, and (4) purpose. Valve charts shall be mounted in metal frame with glass enclosure. One valve chart shall be secured on a wall in the boiler room. A second valve chart shall be delivered to the Owner's authorized representative. Also a copy of the valve chart shall be included in the Operations and Maintenance Instructions. C. All electric controls, starters, air handling units, pumps, and all other equipment and controls shall be identified by stencil or permanent labeling. D. Care shall be taken not to paint over nameplates. Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 12 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.9 FLUSHING, CLEANING & STERILIZING A. Intent: It is the intent of this specification to require that all work, including the inside of equipment, be left in a clean condition with all dust, grease, and construction debris removed. 1. Piping and connection equipment to be left free of sediments, core sand, grease, etc. 2. Clean all exposed surfaces of piping, ducts and hangers, etc., sufficiently to receive paint. Vacuum ducts as required for debris removal. 3. Air systems shall not be operated without filters. Replace the filters or clean permanent type filters just prior to substantial completion. All air systems shall be furnished with one additional set of filters for owner replacement. 4. Remove and clean all screens, interceptors, strainers, etc., in piping systems just prior to substantial completion. 5. Clean and wipe dry all plumbing fixtures, exposed valves, faucets, and piping, etc. that are exposed just prior to substantial completion. Clean all equipment and fixtures per manufacturer's specifications to avoid scratching finished surfaces. Leave all plumbing fixtures ready to use. 6. Clean interior and exterior of all air handling equipment of all construction debris. Clean exterior of all exposed ductwork just prior to substantial completion. 7. Thoroughly clean all equipment room floors after completion of equipment, pipe and duct cleaning. A condition of final acceptance will be the cleanliness of all exposed systems, equipment, and equipment rooms. B. Before final connections are made in the piping systems, blow out all piping with air and then wash out with cleaning compounds. Then flush the system to remove of all foreign materials. Furnish all temporary connections, valves, etc, required for this purpose. Clean the boiler and chiller by the same procedure. C. Clean the boiler by the same procedure. D. After flushing, sterilize the domestic water system in accordance with Section 221116. 3.10 TESTING A. Test all drain and waste lines with standing water test of twelve feet of head, held long enough to visually inspect each joint. B. Test all heating water, snowmelt, and reduced pressure domestic water piping at 150 psig hydrostatic pressure before connecting to unit. C. Test all domestic water service lines to PRV and radiant panel (embedded in concrete)and anti- freeze piping at 200 psig hydro static pressure. D. Test all air and gas piping under 60 psig air pressure. E. All tests must be done to the satisfaction of the local authorities having jurisdiction, before covering. F. All hydrostatic tests to be held for a minimum of six hours without loss of pressure. Air tests to be held for a minimum of two hours without loss of pressure. G. Furnish all instruments required for testing. Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 13 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.11 PLACING IN OPERATION A. Clean all ducts, pipes, equipment, controls etc., of plaster and other foreign debris. B. Before final acceptance, clean or replace all strainers, oil or grease all bearings and clean out all drains. Clean and recoat all permanent filters, replace throwaway type filters with new filters. C. The systems shall be put into operation. 1. The Contractor shall verify that all controls are set to meet operating conditions specified. a. Example: Boiler operating and limit controls set where specified. 2. The contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment are operable and that all sequences of control are being met. 3. The contractor to adjust settings through 1st year as required by MECHANICAL ENGINEER. 3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Books of Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be personally delivered to the Owner's authorized representative and the Owner instructed as to their use and the equipment involved. (Provide two books for each building). Also, instruct the Owner's personnel on each valve and the valve chart previously specified. B. The book shall contain, but not be limited to, the following general items: 1. Spare parts lists for each piece of equipment. 2. Operating manuals for each piece of equipment and control. 3. Lubrication charts showing type of lubricant and application methods and frequencies. 4. Filter cleaning or replacement schedule. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 5. Preventive maintenance schedule for checking all items such as belt drive, safety controls and oil and refrigerant charges. Cleaning schedule of all strainers, traps, coils, tubes, tower pans, sprays, etc. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 6. Water treatment recommendations for boiler, tower, etc. 7. Normal operating instructions including a sequence of operation for each system. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 8. Instructions as to procedure to be followed for any emergency situation, such as alarms or safety items being tripped. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 9. Instructions on who to call for service during guarantee period. (On Contractor's letterhead stationary). 10. Record of equipment installed (copy of each shop drawing as set forth under"Shop Drawing" Paragraph). 11. All warranties provided by Manufacturers on their equipment that run longer than the one year guarantee by the Contractor. C. Books shall be arranged in sequence to match the equipment schedules included in the specifications. D. Approval will not be given for final payment until the tests, balancing and operating instruction portions have been completed. Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 14 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.13 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. All boilers and packaged equipment shall be started by the manufacturer or under the manufacturer's supervision. Start-up data shall be recorded in logs. Copies of start-up logs shall be forwarded to Mechanical Engineer and included in Operation and Maintenance manuals. END OF SECTION 230010 Mechanical General Provisions 230010 - 15 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 230050 - MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIAL AND METHOD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions and Contract Documents are a part of these specifications. Consult them for further instructions and be governed by the requirements thereunder. 1.2 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Architect or Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All equipment shall have housings suitable for the location installed. C. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of damage and corrosion, unless specifically directed to reuse any existing materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. Furnish ball bearing, squirrel cage, open drip proof, normal starting torque motor of the horsepower and current characteristics specified with thermal overload protection and dustproof and leak proof bearing rings and constructed for use at the altitude where the work is to be located. Motors guaranteed to operate continuously at full load with temperature rise in any part not to exceed NEMA Standards. Motors shall be commercially, dynamically balanced and tested at the factory before shipment and selected for quiet operation. Provide motors for V-belt drives with a cast iron and steel base, with slide rail and adjustable screw device and belt guard. Line up motors and drives and place motors and equipment on foundations ready for operation. B. Motors rated 1 horsepower or greater shall be Department of Energy(DOE) approved "energy efficient", meeting the requirements of EP Act 92, and shall meet NEMA 12-6C full load efficiencies. Where not commercially available, power factors shall be capacitor corrected by equipment manufacturer to at least 90 percent under rated load conditions. 2.2 STARTERS A. Provide starters of current and capacity ratings to serve the motor intended. All three phase starters to have over current protection on all three legs. On three phase starters furnish a Phase Monitor Control Relay, Time Mark B258B, or A258B, three-phase monitor control relay to open on phase reversal, phase failure or phase under voltage. Phase monitor control relay shall be mounted and wired in the starter enclosure by this contractor. Furnish switches and green running pilot light in starter cover. If pilot lights are specified on control panel, individual starter lights will not be required. Mechanical Basic Material and Method 230050 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE B. Provide integral transformer and 120-volt control circuit on all starters, which are furnished with control circuits. C. Size thermal overload relays for approximately 115% of full load motor current. Switch and fuse units will not be acceptable unless specifically indicated. 2.3 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide painted, steel access doors with key lock suitable for the surface in which they are installed and satisfactory to the Architect. Recessed style to accept plaster finish, recessed type to accept acoustical tile, flush panel for drywall or flanged flushed panel for remodeling. In installed in fire rated surface, access door to carry proper rating. 2.4 ALTITUDE RATINGS A. Except as otherwise noted, all equipment capacities, air qualities, etc., are adjusted ratings for the elevation of this project as noted on drawings. Manufacturer's ratings shall be adjusted to provide net ratings shown. 2.5 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS A. For steel piping, construct with stainless steel inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. B. For copper piping, construct with bronze inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. C. Use connectors suitable for minimum 125 psi WSP and 450°and 200 psi WOG and 250°F. D. Construct spool pieces to exact size for insertion of flexible connection. 2.6 FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL A. General: 1. Products to be used shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 814-88 and be listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. B. Bare Piping: 1. Model FD 150 or CP-25. C. Insulated Piping: 1. Model: CP-25 or FS-195, Intumescent. 2. "No-sag" or"self-leveling" as required. D. Plastic Piping: 1. Model: CP-25 or FS-195 Intumescent. 2. "No-Sag" or"Self-leveling" as required. E. Accessories: Mechanical Basic Material and Method 230050 - 2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 1. Provide Fasteners, Restricting collars, backing materials, and protective coatings as required to comply with the UL system listing. F. Manufacturers: 1. 3M or G.E. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FREEZE PROTECTION A. Proximity of any equipment component or fluid piping to potential damage from freezing sources shall be avoided wherever possible. Drawings are diagrammatic. Make location adjustments, add insulation and/or control devices and/or heat sources as necessary to prevent or minimize freeze damage potential. The Architect/Engineer will neither guarantee nor be responsible for any consequences of freezing. 3.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Equipment 1. Erect all floor mounted equipment on 4" high concrete pads over the complete floor area of the equipment. B. Flexible Connections 1. Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. 3.3 PIPE HANGERS A. General 1. Provide pipe supports for vertical lines at each floor. Provide pipe hangers to support the systems without sagging, including hangers at each offset or change in direction, at ends of branches over five feet in length and at the following maximum spacing: Hanger Rod Pipe Size Hanger Spacing Diameter(Minimum) a. 3/4" and smaller 6 ft. 3/8" b. 1" 8 ft. 3/8" c. 1-1/4"through 2" 10 ft. 3/8" d. 2-1/2"through 3" 10 ft. 1/2" e. 4"through 5" 10 ft. 1/2" f. 6"through 10" 2 ft 5/8" g. 12" and larger 12 ft. 7/8" Mechanical Basic Material and Method 230050 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE h. Cast iron no hub 5 ft. and at'oints B. Individual Hangers 1. Individual hangers for non-insulated copper piping and insulated copper heating piping and insulated domestic hot water and circulating water piping shall be copper plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip 500, Kin-Line felt lined 440-F or Michigan Hanger Company Series 102 with polyvinyl coating, with insulation over hangers. 2. Individual hangers for insulated cold piping (steel or copper) shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip Figure 800, Kin Line 400 Series, Michigan Series 103. Hangers shall support pipe with hangers over the insulation. The system shall be complete with Auto Grip or Michigan Zinc plated steel shield, Pipe Shields or Kin-Line 460 zinc plated steel shield. Provide insulation insert of high density polyethylene foam, calcium silicate, high density glass fiber or expanded perlite divided in longitudinal half sections and covered with fire resistant vapor barrier jacket. High density inserts are not required in plumbing walls behind plumbing fixtures. 3. Individual hangers for all insulated or non-insulated steel piping shall be zinc plated, adjustable swivel ring hangers similar to Auto Grip Figure 400, Kin-Line 400 Series, Michigan Series 100. Hangers shall support pipe with insulation over hangers. C. Trapeze Hangers 1. Parallel runs of piping may be supported on trapeze hangers. Trapeze shall be Unistrut P-1000-3 or Kin Line 211, 371 or 372 equivalent by Elcen or Kindorff. System shall be selected to support five times the weight of thrust applied without failure. 2. All non-insulated steel pipe and insulated steel heating water pipe shall have standard pipe straps at each support. 3. All non-insulated copper pipe, insulated copper domestic hot and re-circulating water piping and insulated copper heating piping shall rest on neoprene sleeves and have standard pipe straps at each support. 4. All cold insulated pipe (steel or copper) shall rest on Fee and Mason Figure 81 or equivalent by unistrut, or Kin-Line, galvanized steel insulation shield or 360°galvanized steel shield. Provide insulation insert of high density polyethylene foam, calcium silicate, high density fiber glass or expanded perlite divided in longitudinal half sections and covered with fire resistant vapor barrierjacket. Provide pipe strap over insulation at each support. High density inserts are not required in plumbing walls behind plumbing fixtures. 5. See this Section, 3.02, Vibration Isolation for special hangers. 3.4 CONTROL VALVE PIPING A. If the control valve size is smaller than the pipe size marked on the drawing, the reduction in size pertains to the valve only. Gate valves, globe valves, and strainers on either side of the automatic valve shall be a minimum of the pipe size marked on the drawings. 3.5 PUMP CONNECTIONS A. Where the suction or discharge of any pump unit is smaller than the pipe size noted on the drawings, all strainers, valves, flexible connections, expansion joints, etc., shall be a minimum of the pipe size noted on the drawings. Mechanical Basic Material and Method 230050 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.6 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish an access door for each pipe chase for each floor. This includes both toilet plumbing chases and pipe riser chases. Access doors assembly to be minimum size of 16"x 16". B. Also, furnish access doors in all non-removable ceilings and in partitions and walls where necessary to maintain access to plumbing cleanouts, shock absorbers, fire dampers, manual dampers, valves and other mechanical devices requiring access. Size these as required for access. C. Provide all access doors to the General Contractor for him to construct into the building. D. Submit shop drawing indicating the locations of all access doors. 3.7 WELDING A. Provide all welding in accordance with the welding procedures of the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or other approved procedure conforming to the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. Only welders who have been fully qualified under the specified procedure shall be employed. 3.8 PIPE DEPTHS A. Interior pipe below slabs shall be a minimum of 4 inches below slab and shall not be in contact with concrete at any point. Minimum exterior cover over water piping, unless otherwise shown or required by code, shall be 8 feet above the top of the pipe. Area drains shall have maximum cover possible consistent with finished landscape and acceptable flow lines. Gas piping shall have minimum of 3 foot cover with warning tape 12" above pipe. Sanitary waste and storm drain lines shall have 3 foot cover minimum. 3.9 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Full-length pipe in longest lengths possible shall be used. All threads shall be right hand, pipe standard, clean cut, full depth and tapering. Install piping so as to permit complete draining. Provide drains at all low points. All interior soil, waste and condensate lines shall have uniform pitch in the direction of flow of not less than 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise noted. Ream out all pipe ends, turn on ends and rattle before installing. 3.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Where ductwork or piping is connected to fans, air handling units, pumps, or other equipment that may transmit vibration along the piping or ductwork, connect by means of a flexible connection constructed of fire resistant canvas, flex piping, or other approved method. Connections shall be suitable for pressures developed at the point of installation. Flexible material shall be waterproof for weather exposed ductwork, shall show no visible strain during operating conditions, and shall comply with code requirements. Flex connections for range exhaust systems shall be fire rated. Mechanical Basic Material and Method 230050 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.11 CLEANING A. Intent: It is the intent of this specification to require that all work, including the inside of equipment, be left in a clean condition with all dust, grease, and construction debris removed. Refer also to Division 01 specifications. B. Piping and connected equipment to be left free of sediments, core sand, grease, etc. C. Clean all exposed surfaces of piping, ducts and hangers, etc., sufficiently to receive paint. Vacuum ducts as required for debris removal. D. Air systems shall not be operated without filters. Replace the filters or clean permanent type filters just prior to substantial completion. All air systems with disposable filters shall be furnished with one additional set of boxed filters for owner replacement. E. Remove and clean all screens, interceptors, strainers, etc., in piping systems just prior to substantial completion. F. Clean and wipe dry all plumbing fixtures, exposed valves, faucets, and piping, etc. that are exposed just prior to substantial completion. Clean all equipment and fixtures per manufacturer's specifications to avoid scratching finished surfaces. Leave all plumbing fixtures ready to use. G. Thoroughly clean all equipment room floors after completion of equipment, pipe and duct cleaning. A condition of final acceptance will be the cleanliness of all exposed systems, equipment, and equipment rooms. 3.12 EXPANSION COMPENSATION A. Examine piping layout and provide anchors or expansion joints required to adequately protect system. B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. C. Accomplish structural work and provide equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping, loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, and provide corrugated bellows type expansion joints where required. 3.13 SLEEVES, CUTTING, PATCHING A. Major openings in the structure for mechanical work may be shown on the structural drawings; these will be done under the Architectural Division of these Specifications. It is the Contractor's responsibility to set necessary sleeves and boxes for pipe and ducts (not shown on the structural drawings) before erection of structure. This Contractor is responsible for the correct size and location of all openings including coordination with the other trades. All sleeves shall be large enough to allow for continuous insulation to pass through the sleeve. B. In mechanical equipment room floors, all pipe sleeves to the Schedule 40 pipe and shall extend 1" above finished floor. In mechanical equipment room floors, all ducts shall have a 4" high concrete curb around duct. Mechanical Basic Material and Method 230050 - 6 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE C. Caulk all pipes and ducts leaving equipment rooms between sleeve and duct or pipe, 1" deep on each side of wall, floor, or roof. Caulk bare pipes and ducts with lead wool. Caulk insulated pipes with 1-or 2-part polysulphide caulking compound. D. In the same manner as described in Paragraph C above, caulk all other pipes and ducts throughout the building which penetrate walls and floors and roofs this includes pipe and ducts to rooftop units. E. All pipes which may be in view shall be finished with chrome floor, wall and ceiling plates, except in equipment rooms. 3.14 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation, trenching, bedding of pipe, placement and cover, backfilling, etc., in conjunction with work under this Division, shall be per requirements of Division 2 and the additional requirements specified herein. B. Trenches: Slope bottoms uniformly to drain. Trench bottoms to be firm, free from large rocks or boulders, or shall have concrete cradles placed to support piping. Cradles to bear on undisturbed soil. C. Cast iron: Place on firm trench bottom shaped to accept hubs. Both hubs and pipe shall have uniform firm bearing. Place a minimum of 12 inches of loose rock-free material over pipe. D. Other piping, conduits, culverts: Place on firm trench bottom and backfill per Division 2, 22, and 23 or embed per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Expansion: Place pipe fittings and thrust blocks per manufacturer's recommendations and/or project specifications. F. Excavation: Provide all excavating and backfilling required by the work in this division, all as required by the rules of the State Department of Labor and Equipment. All pipe must be laid on solid earth with bellholes provided for hubs. After pipe is laid in trench, it shall be tested, insulated if specified, and backfilled. G. Compaction 1. Backfill by hand around the pipe and the first 12" over the top of the pipe. Moisten, backfill, and tamp in 8" layers (maximum)with air motor or gasoline driven tamper to consolidate to 90% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content. (Puddling will not be allowed). 2. Trenches under road surfacing shall have the upper 6" layer, forming the subgrade for pavement compacted to at least 95% of the maximum density obtainable at optimum moisture content for rigid pavements. 3. Density of backfill shall be determined by the requirements of the A.A.S.H.O. in Pamphlet 57. Standard Method T-99-57. 4. Where requirements of the general conditions are more stringent than the above, the general condition requirements shall be met. H. Pavement 1. Accomplish cutting of flexible pavement so that the remaining exposed edge of the pavement conforms vertically and horizontally to a straight line. The width of the section of pavement removed shall be of necessary width for the proper laying of pipe, but shall Mechanical Basic Material and Method 230050 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE not exceed 36". Waste material resulting from the above operations will be disposed of in suitable waste areas. Repair pavement to satisfaction of the authorities having jurisdiction. I. Shoring 1. Provide all shoring required to perform the excavation and to protect the project, employees, and public. J. Surveying 1. Establish all lines, grades and elevations. Stake out the work and furnish all lines, stakes (1" x 2" x 10"), and all hubs or hardwood pegs (1"x 1" x 6")to stake out the lines and structures to line and grade. K. Maintaining and Protecting Traffic 1. Maintain sufficient barricades, warning signals and lights to protect pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Provide and maintain such detours as may be necessary to keep traffic moving during construction. L. Surface Drainage and Ground Water 1. Surface drainage shall be diverted away from open excavation and trenching before commencement of work at the location. Surface water on ground water seepage, which enters or accumulates in the trenches, shall be removed by pumping or subdraining, and the subgrade or pipe bed restored to original bearing value and conditions. M. Any settling of backfilled trenches which may occur during the warranty period shall be repaired without expense to the Owner, including the complete restoration of all damaged property. 3.15 FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS A. Furnish and install as indicated on the plans and/or as may be necessary for the proper installation of all equipment furnished under this Division, all foundations, bases and supports. Contractor shall be responsible for their correct location and sizes to fit all equipment. Shim and grout between the equipment and its base to align and level. Bolt equipment inertia bases, vibration isolators, and supports to prevent relative movement. B. Furnish all hangers, anchors, sway bracing, guides, etc., for the various piping and duct systems as required for their proper installation. 3.16 FIRE STOPPING A. Install firestopping materials in accordance with their UL and ASTM tested methods. B. Coordinate required annular space with size of pipe and sleeve. C. Requirements for specific systems: 1. Cold piping: Includes chilled water, domestic water, storm water and refrigerant: Insulation and vapor barrier shall be continued through wall and firestopping for "insulated piping" shall be provided. Mechanical Basic Material and Method 230050 - 8 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 2. Hot piping to 250°F includes domestic hot water, steam to 15 psig and heating hot water: The Contractor has the option of continuing the insulation through the penetration and providing firestopping for"insulated piping", or stopping the insulation on either side of the penetration and using firestopping for uninsulated piping". 3. High temperature piping, over 250°F or over 15 psig steam: Contractor shall stop insulation and provide firestopping for"high temperature piping". END OF SECTION 230050 Mechanical Basic Material and Method 230050 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 230113 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following: 1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Condensate-drain piping. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature: 1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 psig at 200 deg F. 2. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves. 2. Air control devices. 3. Hydronic specialties. B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Hydronic Piping 230113-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications"Article. F. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. E. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Dielectric Unions: Hydronic Piping 230113-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matco-Norca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. 2.4 VALVES A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." C. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. g. Tour&Andersson; available through Victaulic Company. 2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. D. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Hydronic Piping 230113-3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. 2. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 5. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 6. Seat: PTFE. 7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. E. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell &Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Low inlet-pressure check valve. 8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. F. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Body: Bronze or brass. Hydronic Piping 230113-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. 8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. G. Automatic Flow-Control Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls. 2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 7. PerFormance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations. 8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F. 2.5 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amtrol, Inc. 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 4. Taco. B. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. C. Expansion Tanks: 1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F inaximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank Hydronic Piping 230113-5 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 2. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter. Provide tank fittings for 125-psig working pressure and 250 deg F inaximum operating temperature. 3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure and 240 deg F inaximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system. 4. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch- diameter gage glass, and slotted-metal glass guard. D. In-Line Air Separators: 1. Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation. 2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig. 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F. 2.6 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints. B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. Hydronic Piping 230113-6 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE C. Hot-Water Heating Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Pre-insulated PEX tubing. D. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints or Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment. B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main. C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal. D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. Hydronic Piping 230113-7 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install valves according to Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping." Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surFaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe. C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. Hydronic Piping 230113-8 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. D. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. H. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings. I. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints. 3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. C. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger. Hydronic Piping 230113-9 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE D. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose. 2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and structural members. 3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. Hydronic Piping 230113-10 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE C. Perform the following before operating the system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely(automatic type), or bleed air completely(manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. END OF SECTION 230113 Hydronic Piping 230113-11 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 230123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less . C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Welding certificates. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Operation and maintenance data. Facility Natural-Gas Piping 230123-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE. a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves. 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 5. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 6. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 7. Maximum Length: 72 inches. B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41. 1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable. Facility Natural-Gas Piping 230123-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE C. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. D. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited. 2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services. B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B 16.33. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body. C. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Facility Natural-Gas Piping 230123-3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. E. Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. Facility Natural-Gas Piping 230123-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. 2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller. B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. Facility Natural-Gas Piping 230123-5 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. e. Invensys. f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal P�ug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig. C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Canadian Meter Company Inc. b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div. c. Harper Wyman Co. d. Maxitrol Company. e. SCP, Inc. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig. 2.6 DIELECTRIC UNIONS A. Dielectric Unions: Facility Natural-Gas Piping 230123-6 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matco-Norca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. 2.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Facility Natural-Gas Piping 230123-7 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. G. Locate valves for easy access. H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps. I. Install piping free of sags and bends. J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements. M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view. P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode. T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve. U. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Facility Natural-Gas Piping 230123-8 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing or copper connector. B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing. 3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. D. Welded Joints: 1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. 2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. F. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. Facility Natural-Gas Piping 230123-9 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70. C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances. D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment. E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance. 3.6 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. 3.9 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following: Facility Natural-Gas Piping 230123-10 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. END OF SECTION 230123 Facility Natural-Gas Piping 230123-11 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 230213 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Round ducts and fittings. 2. Sheet metal materials. 3. Sealants and gaskets. 4. Hangers and supports. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule"Article. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCOIncorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams,"for Metal Ducts 230213-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Finishes for SurFaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: SurFace-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: 1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width:3 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Metal Ducts 230213-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible Metal Ducts 230213-3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE with duct materials. F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. K. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." 3.2 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Metal Ducts 230213-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE Flexible." B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.5 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories"for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. Metal Ducts 230213-5 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums, inlets, scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 2. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of inetal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 3.6 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2)Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C if negative pressure, and C if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. B. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 2. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum. C. Elbow Configuration: 1. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments Metal Ducts 230213-6 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE for 90-degree elbow. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. \Branch Configuration: 1. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. END OF SECTION 230213 Metal Ducts 230213-7 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 230316 - RADIANT-HEATING HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes radiant heating piping, including pipes, fittings, and piping specialties. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of radiant heating pipe, fitting, manifold, specialty, and control. B. Shop Drawings: Show piping layout and details drawn to scale, including valves, manifolds, controls, and support assemblies, and their attachments to building structure. C. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEX PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. REHAU. 2. Uponor Wirsbo Co. B. Pipe Material: PEX plastic according to ASTM F 876. C. Oxygen Barrier: Limit oxygen diffusion through the tube to maximum 0.10 mg per cu. m/day at 104 deg F according to DIN 4726. D. Fittings: ASTM F 1807, metal insert and copper crimp rings. E. Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 100 psig and 180 deg F. 2.2 DISTRIBUTION MANIFOLDS A. Manifold: Minimum NPS 1, copper. B. Main Shutoff Valves: 1. Factory installed on supply and return connections. 2. Two-piece body. Radiant-Heating Hydronic Piping 230316 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3. Body: Brass or bronze. 4. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 5. Seals: PTFE. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. C. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Key furnished with valve, or screwdriver bit. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. D. Balancing Valves: 1. Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type. 2. Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel. 3. Globe Cartridge and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer. 4. Seat: PTFE. 5. Visual Flow Indicator: Flowmeter with visible indication in a clear plastic cap at top of valve. 6. Differential Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable meter to measure loss across calibrated orifice. 7. Handle Style: Lever or knob, with memory stop to retain set position if used for shutoff. 8. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. E. Zone Control Valves: 1. Body: Plastic or bronze, ball or plug, or globe cartridge type. 2. Ball or Plug: Brass or stainless steel. 3. Globe Cartridge and Washer: Brass with EPDM composition washer. 4. Seat: PTFE. 5. Actuator: Replaceable electric motor. 6. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. F. Thermometers: 1. Mount on supply and return connections. 2. Case: Dry type, metal or plastic, 2-inch diameter. 3. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element. 4. Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer. 5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer: Black metal. 7. Window: Plastic. 8. Connector: Rigid, back type. 9. Thermal System: Liquid-or mercury-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to Radiant-Heating Hydronic Piping 230316 - 2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE maximum of 1.5 percent of range. G. Mounting Brackets: Copper, or plastic or copper-clad steel, where in contact with manifold. 2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Cable Ties: 1. Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 2. Minimum Width: 1/8 inch. 3. Tensile Strength: 20 Ib, minimum. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Install the following types of radiant heating piping for the applications described: 1. Piping in Exterior Pavement: PEX . 3.2 I NSTALLATI ON A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop or Coordination Drawings. B. Install radiant heating piping continuous from the manifold through the heated panel and back to the manifold without piping joints in heated panels. C. Connect radiant piping to manifold in a reverse-return arrangement. D. Do not bend pipes in radii smaller than manufacturer's minimum bend radius dimensions. E. Install manifolds in accessible locations, or install access panels to provide maintenance access as required in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." F. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping"for pipes and connections to hydronic systems and for glycol-solution fill requirements. G. Fire-and Smoke-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." H. Piping in Exterior Pavement: 1. Secure piping in concrete floors by attaching pipes to reinforcement using cable ties. 2. Space cable ties a maximum of 18 inches o.c., and at center of turns or bends. 3. Maintain 3-inch minimum cover. 4. Install a sleeve of 3/8-inch-thick, foam-type insulation or PE pipe around tubing Radiant-Heating Hydronic Piping 230316 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE and extending for a minimum of 10 inches on each side of slab joints to protect the tubing passing through expansion or control joints. Anchor sleeve to slab form at control joints to provide maximum clearance for saw cut. 5. Maintain minimum 40-psig pressure in piping during concrete placement and continue for 24 hours after placement. I. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and ensure integrity of piping and as approved by Architect. J. After system balancing has been completed, mark balancing valves to permanently indicate final position. K. PerForm the following adjustments before operating the system: 1. Open valves to fully open position. 2. Check operation of zone control valves. 3. Set temperature controls so all zones call for full flow. 4. Purge air from piping. L. After the concrete or plaster heating panel has cured as recommended by concrete supplier, operate radiant heating system as follows: 1. Start system heating at a maximum of 10 deg F above the ambient radiant panel temperature, and increase 10 deg F each following day until design temperature is achieved. 2. For freeze protection, operate at a maximum of 60 deg F supply-water temperature. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare radiant heating piping for testing as follows: 1. Open all isolation valves and close bypass valves. 2. Open and verify operation of zone control valves. 3. Flush with clean water, and clean strainers. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Subject piping to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure but not more than 100 psig. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning radiant heating piping components that do not pass tests, and retest as specified above. D. Prepare a written report of testing. END OF SECTION 230316 Radiant-Heating Hydronic Piping 230316 - 4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 230593 -TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Constant-flow hydronic systems. b. Variable-flow hydronic systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3. B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation"Article. C. Certified TAB reports. D. Sample report forms. E. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230593-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC, NEBB orTABB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician. B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Owner. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." 1.6 COORDINATION A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems'designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230593-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. I. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. J. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. K. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. L. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in ASHRAE 111 and in this Section. B. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. C. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230593-3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-builY' duct layouts. C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. H. Check for airflow blockages. I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components. K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." 3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check liquid level in expansion tank. 3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from Owner and comply with requirements in Section 232123 "Hydronic Pumps." Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230593-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload conditions. 3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design. B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed. C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed. D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device. F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature. I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing. J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two-and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230593-5 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS A. Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 5 percent 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 5 percent 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent 3.11 REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination"Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.12 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230593-6 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump perFormance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet-and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. E. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230593-7 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model number and serial number. f. Water flow rate in gpm. g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches. k. Motor make and frame size. I. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Static head in feet of head or psig. b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. c. Actual impeller size in inches. d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Final water flow rate in gpm. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase. F. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.13 INSPECTIONS A. Initial Inspection: 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report. 2. Check the following for each system: a. Measure airflow of at least 5 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of unitsterminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230593-8 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE B. Finallnspection: 1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect . 2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Architect and Owner. 3. Architect and Owner shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of ineasurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. 4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 5. If the number of"FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows: 1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection. 2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.14 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perForm additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: Conduct a seasonal TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions, whichever was not completed during the initial TAB. END OF SECTION 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 230593-9 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 230600 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Listed double-wall vents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Special gas vents. B. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LISTED SPECIAL GAS VENTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Heat-Fab, Inc. 2. Metal-Fab, Inc. 3. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate. 4. Schebler B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 1738 and rated for 480 deg F continuously, with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211. C. Construction: Inner shell and outerjacket separated by at least a 1-inch airspace. D. Inner Shell: ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel. E. Outer Jacket: Stainless steel. F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly. 1. Termination: Exit cone with drain section incorporated into riser. Breechings, Chimneys, and 230600 - 1 Stacks Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Listed Special Gas Vents: Condensing gas appliances. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent. B. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without exceeding appliance loading. C. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped to nearest drain. D. Lap joints in direction of flow. E. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth and apply touchup finish to match factory or shop finish. F. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed or connected to equipment. END OF SECTION 230600 Breechings, Chimneys, and 230600 - 2 Stacks Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 230700 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for boiler breeching, duct, equipment, and pipe, including the following: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Flexible elastomeric. b. Mineral fiber. 2. Adhesives. 3. Mastics. 4. Lagging adhesives. 5. Sealants. 6. Factory-applied jackets. 7. Field-applied jackets. 8. Tapes. 9. Securements. 10. Corner angles. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section "Hydronic Distribution" for loose-fill pipe insulation in underground piping outside the building. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ASJ: All-service jacket. B. FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper. C. FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene. D. PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride. E. SSL: Self-sealing lap. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), and flame spread and smoke developed indices. B. Shop Drawings: Show details for the following: 1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 6. Application of field-applied jackets. 7. Application at linkages of control devices. 8. Field application for each equipment type. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Insulation thickness based on insulation conductivity value not exceeding 0.28 Btu*in/(hr*ft^2*°F. G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180. H. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. 2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets"Article. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE I. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 Ib/cu. ft. or more. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory- Applied Jackets"Article. 1. Products: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Products: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. D. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. 2.4 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-G19565C, Type II. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-30. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-35. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-25. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 501. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 60-95/60-96. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 570. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-70. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50. f. Vimasco Corporation; WG1/WC-5. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates. 1. Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 136. 2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire- resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Phenolic-Foam, and Polyisocyanurate Products: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 5. Color: White or gray. 2.7 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 6 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 Ibf/inch in width. D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed. 1. Products: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inc in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 Ibf/inch in width. E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company(The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Film Thickness: 4 mils. 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 Ibf/inch in width. F. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company(The); Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Film Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 Ibf/inch in width. 2.8 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Products: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 8 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP. 3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel], fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers. b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 5. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA. 2) GEMCO; Press and Peel. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover. 6. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 7. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Manufacturers: 1) GEMCO. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. 1. Manufacturers: a. ACS Industries, Inc. b. C & F Wire. c. Childers Products. d. PABCO Metals Corporation. e. RPR Products, Inc. 2.9 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface. B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14. C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240, Type 304 or 316. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. 2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that applies to insulation. 3.2 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 11 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.3 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 12 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surFace and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.4 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces. 2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints. 3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that is compatible with service temperature and with substrate. c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 13 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials. 6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands. 7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. B. Insulation Installation on Pumps: 1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch-diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism. 2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least .040 inch thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier. 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 14 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. Label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers as necessary. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless- steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 15 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.6 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.7 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surFaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 16 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 17 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surFace with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 18 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surFace. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.8 FINISHES A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated. C. Heating-hot-water expansion/compression tank insulation shall be the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. D. Heating-hot-water air-separator insulation shall be the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick. 3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Fire-suppression piping. 2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water: Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 19 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 140 Deg F and Below: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inch thick. 3.12 OUTDOOR, UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Loose-fill insulation, for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections. B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, All Sizes, 140 Deg F and below: Pre-insulated tubing, 1-1/2 inch thick. 3.13 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install water proof, continuous jacket for underground direct-buried piping applications. END OF SECTION 230700 Mechanical Insulation 230700 - 20 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each control device indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Schematic flow diagrams. 2. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. 3. Details of control panel faces. 4. Damper schedule. 5. Valve schedule. 6. DDC System Hardware: Wiring diagrams, schematic floor plans, and schematic control diagrams. 7. Control System Software: Schematic diagrams, written descriptions, and points list. C. Software and firmware operational documentation. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUAUTY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCOPE A. The system shall be built as an expansion of the existing Village snowmelt control system with no noticeable difference in quality, operation or function. The control system shall be integrated into the existing system software to allow the Owner to maintain system and manipulate set points same as the existing system. A remote system interface panel will be provided in the FRTB mechanical room. Provide any necessary reprogramming of the existing controls system to accommodate this expansion Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.3 CONTROL SYSTEM A. The original system designer and installer for the Village snowmelt system was Long Building Solutions. A differing designer/installer must submit an equivalent or compatible system that is approved by the Owner in writing. Controls contractor is responsible for confirming compatibility of their system with existing. B. Manufacturers Allowed to bid without prior approval required: 1. Alerton 2. Automated Logic 3. Delta 4. Honeywell 5. I nvensys 6. Johnson Controls 7. Reliable 8. Siemens 9. Trane C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems. D. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interFace equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics. 2.4 DDC EQUIPMENT A. Contractor option to utilize existing, and/or provide additional, front end interface. All controls, both new and existing, shall be controllable via a single operator interface/workstation. B. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. C. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation. D. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers. 1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally open or normally closed operation[with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights]. 5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA). 6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, floating-type electronic actuators. 7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs. E. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following: 1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50 percent load changes. 3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure. F. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following: 1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz. Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900-3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 2.5 UNITARY CONTROLLERS A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application. 1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72 -hour battery backup. 2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. 3. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. 2.6 ANALOG CONTROLLERS A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor. B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg F, and single-or double-pole contacts. C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority. 1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer. D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interFerence. 2.7 TIME CLOCKS A. Manufacturers: 1. ATC-Diversified Electronics. 2. Grasslin Controls Corporation. 3. Paragon Electric Co., Inc. 4. Precision Multiple Controls, Inc. 5. SSAC Inc.; ABB USA. 6. TCS/Basys Controls. 7. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc. 8. Time Mark Corporation. B. Seven-day, programming-switch timer with synchronous-timing motor and seven-day dial; continuously charged, nickel-cadmium-battery-driven, eight-hour, power-failure carryover; multiple-switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day with two normally open and two normally closed output contacts. Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE C. Solid-state, programmable time control with 8 separate programs each with up to 100 on-off operations; 1-second resolution; lithium battery backup; keyboard interface and manual override; individual on-off-auto switches for each program; 365-day calendar with 20 programmable holidays; choice of fail-safe operation for each program; system fault alarm; and communications package allowing networking of time controls and programming from PC. 2.8 ELECTRONIC SENSORS A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters: 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. Ebtron, Inc. c. Heat-Timer Corporation. d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. e. MAMAC Systems, Inc. f. RDF Corporation. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.. 6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches. 7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. c. Thermometer: Concealed. d. Orientation: Horizontal. 8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. C. RTDs and Transmitters: 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. MAMAC Systems, Inc. c. RDF Corporation. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900-5 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required. 6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches. 7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. c. Thermometer: Concealed. d. Orientation: Horizontal. 8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. D. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. General Eastern Instruments. c. MAMAC Systems, Inc. d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp. e. TCS/Basys Controls. f. Vaisala. 2. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 3. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear output 4 to 20 mA. 4. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential. 5. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas or liquid service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA. E. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 1. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. 2. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. 3. Thermometer: Concealed. 4. Orientation: Horizontal. 2.9 STATUS SENSORS A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range of 0-to 5-inch wg. B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump. C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current. Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900-6 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE D. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements. E. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal. F. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating, stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. 2.10 THERMOSTATS A. Manufacturers: 1. Erie Controls. 2. Danfoss Inc.; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Div. 3. Heat-Timer Corporation. 4. Sauter Controls Corporation. 5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc. 6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc. B. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor. 1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. 4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days. 5. Short-cycle protection. 6. Programming based on every day of week. 7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto. 8. Battery replacement without program loss. 9. Thermostat display features include the following: a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. c. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time. e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto,"and "fan on." C. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F inaximum differential. D. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator; listed for electrical rating; with concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900-7 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE F inaximum differential. 1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors. 2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on-off-auto. E. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. 2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields. 3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements, extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported. 4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of instrument. 5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by application. 6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument. F. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 1. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. 2. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. 3. Thermometer: Concealed. 4. Orientation: Horizontal. G. Room thermostat accessories include the following: 1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls. 2. Thermostat Guards: Locking; heavy-duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base. 3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws. 4. Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch-diameter, adjustment knob. H. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point. I. Heating/Cooling Valve-Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, with molded-rubber diaphragm, remote-bulb liquid-filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum shutoff pressure of 25 psig, and cast housing with position indicator and adjusting knob. 2.11 ACTUATORS A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer. Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900-8 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x Ibf. 4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x Ibf. 5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x Ibf. 6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x Ibf. B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque. 1. Manufacturers: a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. 2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. 3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-Ib/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-Ib/sq. ft. of damper. c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-Ib/sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-Ib/sq. ft. of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5. f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0. 4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on nonspring-return actuators. 7. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24 -V ac. 8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc. 9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback signal. 10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F. 11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F. 12. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed. 2.12 CONTROL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div. 2. Erie Controls. 3. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. 4. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. 5. Neles-Jamesbury. 6. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Skinner Valve Division. 7. Pneuline Controls. 8. Sauter Controls Corporation. Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900-9 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. C. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc. 3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats. a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom. b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surFaces for plugs on top and bottom. 4. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following: a. Two Position: Line size. b. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is more. c. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value specified above. 5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics. 6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two-way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system (pump) head. D. Butterfly Valves: 200-psig, 150-psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 1. Body Style: Wafer. 2. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron. 3. Sizing: 1-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. E. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends. 1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff head. 3. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics. F. Self-Contained Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends. 1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Thermostatic Operator: Wax-filled integral sensor with integral adjustable dial. Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900-10 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 2.13 DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div. 3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.). 4. United Enertech Corp. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel -blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick, galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches. 1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with oil-impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene. 4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x Ibf; when tested according to AMCA 500D. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor. 1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. B. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations: 1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated. C. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures. E. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." F. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." G. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts. Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900-11 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE H. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install signal and communication cable according to: 1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables. 7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. B. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers. C. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks. C. DDC Verification: 1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and other applicable considerations. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900-12 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE self-contained pressure regulators. 6. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 7. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 8. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 9. Check DDC system as follows: a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable. b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system. c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges. D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 230900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 230900-13 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 260010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Contract Documents are part of these specifications. Consult them further for instructions and be governed by the requirements contained there under. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included 1. Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and materials, unless otherwise specified, necessary for the installation of complete electrical systems as required by the specifications and as shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the completion of those details of electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems. B. Work Not Included 1. Certain labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished under other sections of these specifications, by Utility Companies or by the Owner; when this is the case, the extent, source, and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings or as described in the specification. 1.3 PROVISIONS A. Work performed under this division of the specifications shall conform to the requirements of Division 1, the electrical drawings, and all items hereinafter specified. 1. Prior to any work being performed under this division, examine landscape, structural, civil, mechanical, and specialty systems drawings and specifications. If any discrepancies occur between them and the electrical drawings and specifications, report discrepancies to the Owner's Representative in writing and obtain written instructions for the work. 2. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building will permit. All changes from drawings necessary to make the electrical work conform to the building as constructed shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. 3. Coordinate the electrical work with the General Contractor and be responsible to him for satisfactory progress of the same. Coordinate electrical work with all other trades on the project without additional cost to the Owner. 4. All work and materials covered by drawings and specifications shall be subject to review at any time by representatives of the prime consultant and Owner. If the prime consultant or Owner's agent finds any materials or installation that does not conform to these drawings and specifications, Contractor shall remove the Electrical General Provisions 2600010- 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE material from the premises and correct the installation to the satisfaction of the agent. 5. In acceptance or rejection of installed electrical systems, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the installers. 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The latest editions of the following standards (including supplements and official interpretations) are minimum requirements: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 72 — National Fire Alarm Code. 3. NFPA 101 — Life Safety Code. 4. NFPA 110— Emergency Power Systems 5. Conform to all applicable State and Local Codes. 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 7. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 8. Americans with Disabilities Acts (ADA) and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 117. 9. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 10. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). 11. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 12. Uniform Building Code. 13. Uniform Mechanical Code. 14. Uniform Fire Code. 15. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 16. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). B. The complete installation shall comply with requirements of the utility and telephone companies furnishing service to this installation. The drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, statutes, or ordinances in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take precedence when they are more stringent or conflict with the drawings and specifications. 1.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install". "Furnish" means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily required for the proper and complete application. "Install" means to join, unit, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation. The words "accept" or "acceptable" denote only that the equipment items are in general conformance with the design concept of the project. B. Drawings: 1. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches, panelboards and other work. Information shown on the drawings is schematic, however, re-circuiting will not be permitted without specific acceptance. Drawings and specifications are complementary to each other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Data Electrical General Provisions 2600010-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE presented on these drawings is accurate as planning can be determined, but accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, locations, levels, etc., to suit field conditions is directed. Review all Architectural, Structural, Civil and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications; adjust all work to conform to all conditions shown therein. 2. Discrepancies between different plans, between plans and specifications, between specifications or regulations and codes governing this installation shall be brought to the attention of the Owner's Representative in writing before the date of bid opening. In the event such discrepancies exist, and the Owner's Representative is not so notified, the adjudication of responsibility shall be solely at the discretion of the Owner's Representative. 1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain a current set of electrical drawings at the site. Neatly mark all changes and deviations from the original drawings. Use a color which contrasts with the prints. This shall be a separate set of drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be kept up to date as the job progresses and shall be made available for inspection by the Owner's Representative at all times. These updated progress drawings shall be used to produce the final record drawings that shall be in AutoCAD electronic format media upon project completion. B. Upon completion of the contract, both sets (electronic and hard copy drawings) of record drawings shall be delivered to the Owner's Representative. C. The Contractor shall mark all record drawings on the front lower right hand corner with a stamp impression that reads `RECORD DRAWINGS' or similar. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of job and ascertain all conditions affecting the proposed installation and adjust all work accordingly. Make provisions for these costs. C. Coordinate the work with that of all other trades. Where conflicts of work occur and departure from the indicated arrangements are necessary, consult with other Contractors involved; come to agreement as to changed locations and elevations, etc., and obtain written acceptance from the Owner's Representative of proposed changes before proceeding with work. D. All outages of electrical service shall be scheduled with the Owner and Utility Company five (5) days in advance of proposed outage. Include an overtime allowance in the bid for the performance of all work requiring outages at such time as it is approved by the Owner. Outages shall be at a time and of such duration as accepted by the Owner. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. Electrical General Provisions 2600010- 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 1.9 EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Each bidder shall examine the bidding documents carefully, and not later than seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Engineer for interpretation or correction of any discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an addendum by the Owner's Representative. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon interpretations or corrections given by any other method. If discrepancies, ambiguity, inconsistency, or error are not covered by addendum or written directive, Contractor shall include in his bid, labor materials and methods of construction resulting in higher cost. After award of contract, no allowance or extra compensation will be made on behalf of the Contractor due to his failure to make the written requests as described above. B. Failure to request clarification during the bid period of any inadequacy, omission, or conflict will not relieve the Contractor of their responsibilities. The signing of the contract will be considered as implicitly denoting that the Contractor has a thorough comprehension of the full intent and scope of the working drawings and specifications. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provision of Division 1. B. Listing of Equipment: The Contractor shall submit, within thirty days after the award of the contract, a complete typewritten list of those items of equipment which will be furnished under this contract. Include the name or description of the item, name of manufacturer, model, type, and catalog number. C. Submit five (5) copies (or PDF electronic file) of shop drawings, layouts, manufacturer's data, wiring diagrams and material schedules that may be requested by the Owner's Representative for his review. The review by the Owner's Representative will not constitute concurrence with any deviation from the plans and specifications unless such deviations are specifically identified by the method described below, nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the submitted data. D. Processed shop drawings shall not be construed as change orders. The shop drawings shall demonstrate that the Contractor understands the design concept, indicate which equipment and materials he intends to provide, and detail the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and the design drawings and specifications are discovered, the design drawings and specifications shall govern. E. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions (which he shall confirm and correlate at the job site), fabrication processes and techniques of construction and coordination of his work with that of other trades. The Contractor shall check and verify all measurements and review shop drawings before submitting them and sign a statement on the shop drawings which signifies that they comply with plans and specifications and that equipment is dimensionally suitable for the application. If any deviations from the specified requirements for any item of material or equipment exist, such deviation shall be expressly stated in writing and incorporated with the submittal. The Owner's Electrical General Provisions 2600010-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE copies (two of each) of the reviewed submittals shall be retained by the Contractor until completion of the project and presented in bound form to the Owner. F. Shop drawings and manufacturer's published data shall be submitted for: 1. All panelboards 2. All circuit breakers 3. Service and equipment disconnects (indicating on cut sheet what equipment is being served) 4. Lighting control equipment and devices 5. Lighting fixtures 6. Wiring devices 7. Heat trace and associated controls 1.11 USE OF THE LANDSCAPE AND/OR ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall obtain, at the Contractor's expense, from the Owner's Representative or Engineer a set of AutoCad or compatible format landscape and engineering drawings on electronic media where desired by the Contractor and/or required by the Specifications for use in preparing the shop drawings, coordination drawings, and record drawings. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner's Representative and Engineer a written release of liability acceptable to the Owner's Representative and Engineer prior to receiving the electronic media. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STANDARD FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All electrical materials shall be acceptable for installation only if labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities. 2.2 Substitutions of Material after Award of Contract A. Other items of material and equipment may be offered (at the Contractor's option) as alternates to specified items, either as provided for in the Proposal Forms or, if no provisions are made, by submitting it with his bid on the Bidder's letterhead. B. Such alternate proposal shall not be included under the base bid and must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. If any such alternate material proposals are considered, the Contractor shall submit a list of the proposed alternate substitution items in accordance with the requirements of "Review of Proposed Substitutions". Electrical General Provisions 2600010- 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 2.3 BID ALTERNATE(S) A. Refer to Division 1 and all contract documents for additional information. B. Alternate(s) for Material and Equipment 1. Equipment and material bid alternate(s) shall be proposed as additive or deductive alternate(s) to specified items by submitting it as a separate line item from the base bid on the Bidder's letterhead. 2. Such bid alternate proposals shall not be substituted or included in the base bid. Bid alternate proposal(s) must be accompanied by full descriptive data on the proposed equipment, together with a statement of the cost to be added or deducted for each item. The bid alternate shall include all materials, equipment, labor, electrical connections, coordination with all other trades, etc. for a complete and operational system. 3. The Contractor shall submit the bid alternates at the time the base bids are due. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION A. Contractor's personnel and subcontractors selected to perform the work shall be well versed and skilled in the trades involved. B. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other project components. Electrical power wiring and low voltage wiring for traffic control equipment, pay stations, ticket dispenser, pay booths shall be coordinated with reviewed shop drawings, owner's representative, and installing contractors/vendors. C. Coordinate installation of all electrical work with mechanical contractor and other contractors. Field coordination of specific details of all electrical work with general contractors and other contractors. D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work for the project. E. Any changes or deviations from the drawings and specifications must be accepted in writing by the Owner's Representative/Engineer. All errors in installation shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. All specialties shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Where detail or specific installation requirements are not provided, manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed. F. Upon completion of work, all equipment and materials shall be installed complete, thoroughly checked, correctly adjusted, and left ready for intended use or operation. All work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all residue shall be removed from surFaces. Exterior surfaces of all material and equipment shall be delivered in a perfect, unblemished condition. G. Contractor shall provide a complete installation, including all required labor, material, cartage, insurance, permits, and taxes. Electrical General Provisions 2600010- 6 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.2 CHASES, OPENINGS, CUTTING, AND PATCHING A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to eliminate where possible, cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of streetscape floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roofs. Any damage to the building, structure, piping, ducts, equipment or any defaced finish shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. Any necessary cutting, channeling, drilling or anchoring of raceways, outlets, or other electrical equipment shall be perFormed in a careful manner, and as accepted by the Owner's Representative. B. All penetrations required through existing concrete construction shall be core drilled at minimum size required. Precautions shall be taken when drilling to prevent damage to structural concrete. Contractor shall obtain permission from the Owner's Representative before proceeding with drilling. 3.3 PROGRESS OF WORK A. Order the progress of electrical work to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition will permit. Any cost resulting from defective or ill timed work perFormed under this Section shall be borne by this Contractor. 3.4 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Obtain and pay for all permits and licenses required and furnish the Owner's Representative (for the Owner), a certificate of final inspection and approval from the authorities having jurisdiction over the electrical installation. 3.5 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. PerForm all trenching and backfilling required by work performed under this Section in accordance with the excavating and grading specifications as herein specified. This work shall comply with the requirements of Table 300-5 of the National Electrical Code. B. Excavate trenches to the depth required for the utilities involved. The trench bottom shall be graded true and free from stones or soft spots. Trenches through specially treated or surfaced areas, such as paving or blacktop, shall have the width of the surface cutting extended for a width of eight inches (8") on each side of the open trench. Unless otherwise noted, the disturbed surfaces shall be replaced equal to the original construction, to the original grade with the same type of material, and to the same depths and limits as the materials removed. After acceptance by the Owner's Representative, backfill, tamp, and compact to insure against the possibility of differential settling, in conformity with Division 2 Specifications. Verify location of existing or new utilities and, if damaged by this Contractor, replace or repair. Electrical General Provisions 2600010- 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide all cutting, trenching, backfilling, patching and refinishing or resurFacing required for electrical work in a manner meeting the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Arrange and be held responsible for delivery and safe storage of materials and equipment for electrical installation. B. Store materials and equipment for easy inspection and checking. C. Carefully mark and store all materials. D. Deliver materials to the job site in stages of the work that will expedite the work as a whole. E. Carefully check materials furnished to this Contractor for installation, and provide receipt acknowledging acceptance of delivery and condition of the materials received. Thereafter, assume full responsibility for its safekeeping until the final installation has been reviewed and accepted. 3.8 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for the protection thereof, whether or not such facility is to be removed or relocated. Moving or removing any facility must be done so as not to cause interruption of the work of Owner's operation. B. Close all conduit openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover all fixtures and equipment and protect against injury. At the final completion, clean all work and deliver in an unblemished condition, or refinish and repaint at the discretion of the Owner's Representative. C. Any equipment or conduit systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above "MILL" or "SHOP" conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction. 3.9 GUARANTEE A. The entire electrical system installed under this Contract shall be left in proper working order. Replace, without additional cost, any work, material or equipment, which develops defects in design or workmanship within one (1) year from date of final acceptance. Electrical General Provisions 2600010- 8 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.10 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are received and Owner's personnel have been thoroughly indoctrinated in the maintenance and operation of all equipment. B. Operating manual, parts lists, and indoctrination of operating and maintenance personnel: Furnish the services of a qualified representative of the supplier for each item or system itemized below who shall instruct specific personnel, as designated by the Owner, in the operation and maintenance of that item or system. C. Instruction shall be made when the particular system is complete and shall be of the number of hours indicated and at the time requested by the Owner. A representative of the Electrical Contractor shall be present for all demonstrations. SYSTEM HRS.OF INSTRUCTION Lighting control systems 2 Electrical distribution equipment (under 600 volts) 1 including motor control centers D. Deliver three (3) complete operating manuals and parts lists to the Owner (or his designated representative) at the time of the above required indoctrination. Fully explain the contents of the manuals as part of required indoctrination and instruct the Owner's personnel in the correct procedure in obtaining service, both during and after the guarantee period. The operating manual and parts lists shall give complete information as to whom the Owner shall contact for service and parts, including the address and phone number. Furnish evidence that an authorized service organization regularly carries a complete stock of repair parts for these items (or systems), and that the organization is available for service. Service shall be furnished within twenty four (24) hours after requested. E. Clean-up: Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the electrical installation and leave the premises and all equipment, lamps, fixtures, etc. in a clean, orderly condition. Any costs to the Owner for clean-up of the site will be charged against the Contractor. F. Acceptance Demonstration: Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by the Owner's Representative, the Contractor shall demonstrate for the Owner the operation of the entire installation, including all systems provided under this contract. G. Operating and Acceptance Tests: Provide all labor, instruments, and equipment for the performance of tests as specified. Submit three (3) copies of a typewritten test report for the Owner's Representative for his approval. H. PerForm a careful inspection of the electrical service equipment, electrical distribution equipment, and cable connections to verify that all connections are mechanically and electrically tight. I. Measure the resistance to ground for the service ground, which shall not exceed ten (10) ohms under normal soil moisture conditions. If required, install additional ground provisions in a manner accepted by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. Electrical General Provisions 2600010- 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.11 IDENTIFICATION A. General: Provide the following services and materials to assist the Owner in operation and maintenance. B. Directory Cards, Nameplates and Labels: No temporary markings, which are visible on equipment, shall remain after the project is complete. Repaint trims, housing, etc., where such markings cannot be readily removed. Defaced finishes must be refinished. All engraved metal or plastic nameplates shall be white letters on a black or gray background. Raised letter type tape shall not be used. No abbreviations in labeling will be permitted without special approval. All panelboards shall be labeled as designated on the electrical drawings. Thoroughly clean surface to which pressure sensitive type labels are applied to assure adherence of label. Directory cards, nameplates, and labels shall indicate the general area and type of electrical load served by each circuit. Provide the following types of labels at these locations. 1. On each feeder switch, combination starter, or circuit breaker located in service equipment, the main pane►board, and all special equipment housed in cabinets, the labeling shall be one fourth inch (1/4") minimum height letters. 2. On each separate mounted disconnect and starter for a motor or fixed appliance, indicate motor or appliance designation, voltage, and phase. (Motor or appliance designations shall be as given on the Mechanical or Architectural plans.) Use three-sixteenth inch (3/16") minimum height letters. 3. On all branch circuit panelboards indicate panel designation, voltage and phase. Use three-fourths inch (3/4") minimum height stenciled letters in metal tape or one-half inch (1/2") engraved letters on laminated nameplate. Apply to the inside of each door. 4. For all branch circuit panelboard directories, provide neatly typed, removable cards and protective plastic faces. Spare circuit breakers shall be identified as such. 5. For all device plates for switches used to control exhaust fans or other equipment, provide one-eighth inch (1/8") minimum height black filled, engraved letters on stainless steel device plates. 6. For all receptacle device plates, provide one-eighth inch (1/8") minimum height letters on white (normal power) nameplates indicating panel and circuit number. 7. For all exposed conduits, junction boxes, wiring gutters, etc., provide three- fourths inch (3/4") minimum height stenciled letters, or one-half inch (1/2") minimum height pressure sensitive labels equal to Brady self-sticking vinyl cloth. Labels shall be provided at the following locations: a. Entering or leaving panels or switchgear or enclosures. b. All junction boxes shall be identified as to circuits contained within. 8. Underground Utility Identification: Provide a six-inch (6") wide, yellow colored plastic tape. Install the tape for the continuous length of all underground primary raceways provided under this contract. Tape shall be buried not less than twelve inches (12") below finished grade. Tape shall be Brady "Identoline" or acceptable and imprinted in large, legible, black letters "Caution — Electrical Utilities Below". Electrical General Provisions 2600010- 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.12 CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING AND POWER A. Provide all temporary facilities required to supply construction power and light. Install and maintain facilities in a manner that will protect the public and workmen. Comply with all applicable laws and regulations. B. Upon completion of the work, remove all temporary facilities from the site. C. The General Contractor shall pay for all power and light used by him and his subcontractors where construction power is separately metered, or is taken from the permanent project metered service solely for construction use. D. The cutoff date for power cost allocation where permanent meters are used shall be either the agreed date of occupancy by the Owner or the date of final acceptance of the project, whichever shall be the earlier date. Electrical General Provisions 2600010- 11 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.13 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING AND CONNECTIONS Furnish, set in place, and FURNISHED SET IN WIRED wire, except as indicated, all UNDER PLACE OR CONNECTED heating, ventilating, air MTD. UNDER UNDER conditioning, plumbing, fire protection, motors and controls in accordance with the following schedule. Carefully coordinate with work performed under the Mechanical Division of these specifications.ITEM Equipment motors and MD MD ED thermal overload, resistance heaters. 3 Motor controllers, magnetic MD ED(1) ED starters, reduced voltage starters and overload rela s. Disconnect switches, fused ED(1) ED(1) ED or unfused, h.p. rated switches, thermal overload switches and fuses, manual o eratin switches. Pushbutton stations, pilot MD MD(2) MD(2) lights, multi-speed switches, float switches, thermostats, control relays, time clocks, control transformers, control panels, motor valves, damper motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches and interlocks. Contactors, 120V control ED ED ED circuit outlets for control panels and for boiler controls and for fire protection controls and smoke detectors. Electrical General Provisions 2600010- 12 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE MD=Mechanical, Division 15. ED=Electrical, Division 16. a. If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, then wiring and connections only by ED. b. If float switches, line thermostats, p.e. switches, time switches, etc., carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, the Mechanical Division shall furnish them. They shall be set in place and connected under the Electrical Division, except there where such items are an integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc., they shall be set in place under the Mechanical Division and connected by the Electrical Division. If they do not carry the full load current to any motor, they shall be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechanical Division. c. Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm system by ED; all control function wiring by MD. B. Provide electrical connections to mechanical equipment. Refer to the Mechanical specifications and plans covering sprinkler systems, motor interlocks, switching, etc. Provide wiring, conduit, outlets and final electrical connections to all equipment. C. Where motor controllers are furnished by others, install controller and provide connections at line and load side of controllers. D. Where reduced voltage, multiple speed, duplex, triplex, lead-lag, pony motor and other unusual controller types are utilized, coordinate specific requirements of motor(s) and controller and provide required wiring between motor(s) and controller. E. Provide branch circuits and connections to sump and sewage ejector pump alarm bell system. Connect to emergency power distribution system. 3.14 OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT A. Provide electrical connections to owner furnished equipment. All power and control wiring and raceways shall be field coordinated. B. Inspect owner furnished equipment for damage, defects, missing components, etc. Report deficiencies to the Owner immediately. Do not install or connect deficient equipment. C. Provide supports, fastenings, and auxiliary hardware necessary for a complete installation in accordance with the finished building conditions. 3.15 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION A. Examination 1. Verity field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on drawings. 2. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. Electrical General Provisions 2600010- 13 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Owner's Representative before disturbing existing installation. 4. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. B. Preparation 1. Coordination outages with Owner's Representative/Owner. 2. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. 3. Existing telephone system: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner/Owner's Representative in writing at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. C. Demolition and Extension of Existing Electrical Work 1. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Division 1, Division 2, and this section. 2. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. 3. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. 4. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. 5. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets, which are not removed. 6. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. 7. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. 8. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. 9. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. 10. Maintain access to existing electrical installations, which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. 11. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installation, or as specified in individual section. D. Cleaning and Repair 1. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment, which remain or are to be reused. E. Installation 1. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division 1. END OF SECTION Electrical General Provisions 2600010- 14 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 260100 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS A. All materials shall conform to current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as the electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All electrical materials shall be acceptable for installation only if labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities. C. All electrical equipment shall have a NEMA rated housing suitable for the location installed. D. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of damage and corrosion, unless specifically directed to reuse any existing materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS A. Provide raceways as required for all electrical systems. B. Rigid conduit shall be hot-dipped, galvanized steel with zinc coating or corrosion resistant lacquer on the inside, and shall comply with Underwriter's Laboratories Standard UL6 and American National Standards Institute C80-1. Fittings shall be threaded. C. Plastic coated conduit shall be rigid steel conduit having a 0.030 inch minimum thickness; factory bonded PVC jacket. D. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be galvanized on the outside and coated on the inside with a smooth hard finish of lacquer, varnish or enamel. EMT shall comply with UL Standard UL797 and ANSI C80-3. EMT fittings shall be steel compression gland type. Two and one half inch (2-1/2") and larger may be steel setscrew type. Where a grounding conductor is pulled, set screw type fittings of any size are allowed. E. Flexible conduit shall be galvanized steel with steel fittings as manufactured. One-half inch (1/2") minimum trade size; except that three eighths (3/8") minimum trade size will be acceptable for recessed fixtures only. F. Wireways, where indicated on the drawings, shall be hinged cover type, sized as indicated; complete with elbows, tees, connectors, adapters, etc. All parts shall be factory fabricated and of the same manufacturer, and designed for use together. Basic Materials and Methods 2600100-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE G. Rigid, heavywall, Schedule-40, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic conduit, for direct burial shall meet requirements of Underwriters' Laboratories. All offsets and ells shall be rigid, galvanized steel conduit having a 0.030 inch minimum thickness, factory bonded PVC jacket, using a prejacketed couplings to provide substantially watertight jacketing system. 2.2 OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet boxes shall be constructed of zinc-coated or cadmium plated sheet steel. B. All boxes provided shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the number of conductors entering the box in addition to the devices installed in the box, per the National Electrical Code. C. Equip fixture outlet boxes with three-eighths inch (3/8")fixture studs. 2.3 JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES, AND CABINETS A. Junction and Pull Boxes 1. Construct junction or pull boxes not over 150 cubic inches as standard outlet boxes, and those over 150 cubic inches the same as "cabinets", with screw covers of the same gauge metal. Removable covers must be accessible at all times. Mount per"Outlets" Section. 2. Provide a standard access panel having a hinged metal door neatly fitted into a flush metal trim, where a junction box or equipment is located above furred ceilings or in finished walls. Coordinate location and type with the Owner's Representative. B. Cabinets 1. Cabinets shall meet National Electrical Code requirements, be of standard make, UL labeled, of sheet steel with corrosion resistant finish, and with ample space for all wires, connections and equipment. Provide each cabinet with a door and flush catch and lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. Furnish the Owner with two (2) keys per panel. 2. Cabinet fronts shall consist of sheet steel panels with hinged doors. Fronts for flush cabinets shall be approximately three-fourths (3/4") larger on all sided than cabinet and set so the front will rest firmly against the finished wall surFace. 3. Provide suitable devices for securing, supporting and adjusting panelboard interiors and fronts. Cabinets shall be arranged to provide a wiring gutter not less than three inches (3") (larger where specified by the National Electric Code). C. Boxes and cabinets shall be weatherproof construction wherever applicable. 2.4 WIRE AND CABLE A. Conductors shall be in accordance with the applicable sections of UL and IPCEA Standards. Minimum conductor size shall be No. 12 AWG for light and power, and No. Basic Materials and Methods 2600100- 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 14 AWG for control, unless noted otherwise on the drawings or in the specifications. No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid, and No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. B. Voltage range 0 — 24: High conductivity copper, thermo-plastic insulation, 300 volt rating. C. Voltage range 24 — 600: High conductivity copper, moisture-resistant thermo-plastic insulation, 600 volt 75°C rating for general use. For HID fixtures and wiring within 3 inches of fluorescent ballasts wire shall be copper, minimum 90°C rated. Sizes indicated are for installation in a maximum 30°C ambient. Conductor ampacity shall be derated for higher ambient installations. 600 volt aluminum wire and cable in sizes 1/0 and larger may be substituted for copper on services and feeders, if ampacity is equal to or greater than copper and voltage drop is equal to or less than copper. Aluminum wire and cable shall be terminated at switches, lugs, circuit breakers, etc. with Mac- adapt series "MPT" machine compression adapters or equivalent. D. Terminating fittings or connectors shall be a type suitable for the specific cable furnished. E. Insulation: Conductor insulation types shall be rated for wet and dry locations (unless specifically noted otherwise) and shall be accepted by the National Electrical Code for the particular application. Wire and cable shall have the following (or better) insulation classes: 1. Wiring in high temperature areas, where the temperature will exceed 165°F, shall be rated 105°C (221°F) minimum, and a type accepted by local code. This shall include any wiring within three feet (3'-0") horizontally or ten feet (10'-0") above any boiler or heating appliance. 2. Wiring installed in floor slabs on earth fill, in conduit in fill under floor slabs, and wiring to exterior fixtures, devices, outlets, etc., subject to weather, Type THW. 3. Feeders and other wiring No. 4 AWG and larger, Type THW. 4. Other wiring No. 6 AWG and smaller, Type TW. F. Color Coding: 1. Wiring for control systems to be installed in conjunction with mechanical and miscellaneous equipment shall be color coded in accordance with the wiring diagrams furnished with the equipment. Branch circuit wiring, including circuits to motors, and all feeders shall be coded by line or phase as follows: 2. Wire No. 2 AWG and smaller shall be factory color coded. Wire No. 1 AWG and larger may be color coded by field painting or color taping of six inch (6") length of exposed ends. 120/208 Volts A = Black B = Red C = Blue Neutral = White Ground = Green Basic Materials and Methods 2600100-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 2.5 WIRE CONNECTIONS A. No. 6 AWG and larger wire: Connectors and lugs shall be solderless or compression type. No. 8 AWG and smaller wire: Twist tight and apply insulated pressure connectors. Connectors shall be pressure, copper (steel not acceptable), splice caps with nylon insulator. 2.6 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide enclosed, fusible or nonfusible safety switches where indicated and herein specified. Safety switches shall bear UL label and each enclosure shall be the NEMA type suitable for the surrounding area and conditions. Switches shall be heavy duty, horsepower rated, and shall have quick-break mechanisms. Switches used on motor circuits shall have adequate horsepower ratings for the motors served. 2.7 WIRING DEVICES AND DEVICE PLATES A. Provide the following devices where indicated on the drawings. Types or devices other than those listed below shall be of the same standard or quality. Devices shall have screw type terminals. 1. Receptacles: Where special receptacles are required, verify the exact type required to mate with equipment cord-caps before ordering. Receptacles and plug configurations shall conform with NEMA Standards for amperage and voltage classification and shall comply with NEMA WD-1 and UL 20 tests. a. Grounding type duplex throughout. b. Duplex weatherproof receptacle shall have integral ground-fault protection, with "in-use" type, cast aluminum lockable cover. c. Special outlets: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Switches: Switches, unless noted, shall be the a-c, tumbler, quiet type; 20A rated. 3. Device Plates: Provide a device plate for each outlet to suit the device installed and blank plates or covers for junction boxes or empty outlets. Flush device plates shall be satin brush finish stainless steel, 0.030 inch thick and provided in mechanical room and exterior outlets. Interior outlets shall be thermoplastic cover plates, color as directed by Architect. a. Device plates shall be one-piece type and a shape suitable for the devices and outlets installed. Sectional device plates will not be permitted. Where exposed wiring is permitted, device plates shall be galvanized. b. Provide blank plates for all unused telephone outlets. Finish shall match other plates in area. c. Where the device plate does not cover the outlet opening, the Contractor shall patch the opening to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. Basic Materials and Methods 2600100- 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOTOR CONTROL A. Thermal overload relays shall be set at one-hundred fifteen percent (115%) of the nameplate full load motor current for 40°C rise motors. B. Dual element fuses shall be sized at one-hundred fifty percent (150%) of nameplate full load motor current. 3.2 CONDUIT SYSTEMS A. General: 1. Provide conduits as required below for all systems, unless noted. The cut ends of all conduits shall be reamed properly to prevent damage to conductor insulation. 2. Conduit sizes not noted on the drawings shall be in accordance with requirements of the National Electrical Code, Table 3C, (except flexible connections for lighting fixtures, use Table 350-12) for the quantities and sizes of wire installed. Where nonmetallic conduit is utilized, the Contractor shall provide sizes as required to conform with the fill requirements calculating the grounding wire as an additional insulated conductor. 3. Securely fasten all conduits. Embedded conduit shall be securely tied in place to rebar and/or wire mesh. 4. Lay out work in advance to avoid excessive concentrations of multiple conduit runs. 5. Locate conduits so that the strength of structural members is unaffected and the conduits do not conflict with the services of the other trades. Install one-inch (1") or larger, conduit in or through structural members (beams, slabs, etc.) only when and in a manner accepted by the Owner's Representative. B. Above Grade Conduit Installation 1. Above-Grade: Defined as the area above finished grade for a building exterior and above the bottom floor slab for a building interior. Installation of all materials for above-grade conduits shall conform with the following: a. Install conduits concealed except at surface cabinets, motor and equipment connections, and in mechanical equipment rooms. Install a minimum of six inches (6") from flues, steam pipes or other heated lines. b. Provide flashing and counter-flashing for waterproofing conduits, outlets, fittings, etc., that penetrate the roof. Route all (exposed or concealed) conduit as high as possible, parallel or perpendicular to building lines using right-angle turns and symmetrical, concentric bends. c. Support all horizontal and vertical runs of conduit a minimum five feet (5'- 0") on center from structural members by using Unistrut and/or Brady clips manufactured for securing conduit. d. Provide sleeves in forms for new concrete walls, floor slabs and partitions for passage of empty three-fourths inch (3/4") conduit for every four (4) spares, spaces or unused poles of each flush mounted branch circuit Basic Materials and Methods 2600100- 6 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE panelboard. Terminate these empty three-fourths inch (3/4") conduits in a junction box which, after construction is complete, is accessible and will enable future branch circuit extensions from the panel. e. Provide conduit expansion joints with necessary bonding conductor at building expansion joints where required to compensate for conduit or building thermal expansion and contraction. f. Terminate conduits one and one-fourth inch (1/4") and larger with insulated bushings or raintight connectors with insulated throats. 2. Rigid Conduit: Hot-dipped, galvanized rigid steel conduit (GRC) shall be installed in the following above-grade areas: a. Where exposed to weather. b. Where exposed to mechanical injury. c. Where specifically required by the National Electrical Code. d. All remaining areas except where other conduit is specially permitted in the following paragraphs. e. Provide double locknuts and bushings on conduits terminating at outlet boxes, cabinets, gutters, etc. 3. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may be installed as follows: a. Concealed locations in furred walls or ceilings. b. Embedded in above-grade concrete walls and floor slabs. c. Exposed in interior locations. d. EMT fittings shall be steel compression gland type for EMT two inches (2") and smaller. Setscrew steel fittings will be equivalent for larger sizes. All fittings shall be made up wrench tight. 4. Flexible metal conduit shall be provided in sufficient (minimum 2'-0"), maximum of 6'-0") lengths for: a. Makeup of motor or equipment and raceway connections where isolation of sound and vibration transmission is required. For these equipment connections in locations exposed to weather or in interior locations subject to moisture, liquidtight flexible conduit shall be used. b. Connections to recessed lighting fixtures. c. In remodel areas where raceways must be fished in existing walls and ceilings as specified by the Engineer. d. All lengths of flexible metal conduit (including liquidtight) shall contain a separate grounding conductor as outlined under"Grounding". C. Below Grade Conduit Installation: 1. Below-Grade: Defined as the area below finished grade for a building exterior and below or within the bottom floor slab for a building interior and within exterior building walls that are below grade. Below-grade conduit terminated under main service equipment, padmounted transformers, etc., above floor slabs and equipment foundations shall project two inches (2") minimum above floor or foundation finish to prevent water entry. Install exterior underground conduits thirty inches (30") minimum below finished grade. a. Non-Encased Conduit: Unless specifically noted on the drawings for concrete encasement, provide rigid PVC conduit for installations in or below slabs-on-grade, in earth, or in gravel. Offsets and ninety-degree elbows shall be rigid, galvanized, steel conduit with a 0.030 inch minimum thickness, factory bonded, PVC jacket and pre-jacketed couplings to provide substantially watertight jacketing. Basic Materials and Methods 2600100- 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE b. For multiple runs of conduit, provide plastic spacers on maximum ten foot (10'-0") centers to maintain horizontal and vertical spacing of the conduits. 1) Joints shall be solvent welded in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2) Ducts, fittings, elbows and cement shall be produced by the same manufacturer. 3.3 OUTLETS A. The exact location of outlets and equipment shall be governed by structural conditions and obstructions, or other equipment items. When necessary, relocate outlets so that when fixtures or other devices are installed. Verify final location of all outlets, panels, equipment, etc., with Owner's Representative prior to rough-in. Locations may be adjusted by the Owner's Representative up to ten feet (10'-0") from the locations shown without additional cost. Outlet boxes in finished ceilings or walls shall be fitted with appropriate covers, set flush with the finished surface. B. Where more than one switch or device is located at one point, use gang boxes and covers, unless otherwise indicated. Provide barrier partitions between adjacent switches located in the same box when voltage between switches exceeds 300 volts. Sectional switch boxes or utility boxes will not be permitted. C. Back-to-back outlets in a wall, or "Through-wall" type boxes are not permitted. Provide minimum twelve-inch (12") long nipple to offset outlets shown on opposite sides of a common wall to minimize sound transmission. 3.4 CABINETS AND PANELBOARDS A. Cabinets shall be set rigidly in place with fronts straight plumb. Center panelboard interiors in panelboard door opening and adjust dead fronts fully outward to meet the trim. 3.5 WIRE AND CABLE A. Provide a complete system of conductors in raceway systems. Wiring shall be routed through an accepted raceway regardless of voltage application. Branch circuits whose length from panel to first outlet exceeds seventy-five (75'-0") for 120 volt circuits shall be No. 10 AWG, or larger, as required to limit voltage drop to 3%. B. All wire shall be insulated for 600 volts. Wire sizing noted on drawings shall extend for the entire length of a circuit (e.g. taps and risers up lighting poles) unless noted. C. Install wire in raceways in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Use an accepted wire-pulling lubricant. Strip insulation so as to avoid nicking wire. Basic Materials and Methods 2600100- 8 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 3.6 WIRE AND CABLE CONNECTIONS A. General: Terminating fittings, connectors, etc., shall be a type suitable for the specific cable furnished. Fittings shall be made up tight. Make up all terminations in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations using special washers, nuts, etc., as required. B. Connectors and Lugs: Splices and connections shall be made as follows: 1. Connect No. 6 AWG and larger wire to panels and apparatus with properly sized solderless or compression lugs or connectors. 2. Connect No. 8 AWG and smaller wire by twisting tight, then applying wire-nut or pressure connectors. 3.7 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Install safety and disconnect switches in general area or on equipment and accessible to maintenance personnel. Secure switches firmly to supporting structure with acceptable fasteners. Verify size of switches for each installation. Where practicable, switches shall be mounted so that the top of the switch is six feet, three inches (6'-3") above the finished floor or surface. 3.8 WIRING DEVICES A. Install wiring devices of the types indicated on the drawings. All connections shall be made up tight and the devices set plumb. Use care in installing devices in order to prevent damage to the device and the wires in the outlet box. B. Device Plates: Provide a device plate for each outlet to suit the device installed, and install blank plates or covers for junction boxes and empty outlets. 3.9 SUPPORT AND HANGERS A. Support and align all raceways, cabinets, equipment, transformers, boxes, fixtures, etc., in an accepted manner and as herein specified. Support raceways on accepted types of wall brackets, specialty spring steel clips or hangers, ceiling trapeze hangers, or mallable iron straps. Plumbers perforated straps and twisted iron wire not permitted. Do not suspend raceways or equipment from ductwork, or from water, or other piping, but provide independent and secure support methods. END OF SECTION Basic Materials and Methods 2600100- 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 260400 - SERVICE & DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The services will be 208Y/120 volts, three-phase, four-wire, will be available at the secondary terminals of padmounted transformer. Contractor shall coordinate connections to utility transformer and raceways entering the transformer vault with Holy Cross Energy. 1.2 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall be designed, tested and assembled in accordance with the applicable standards of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) and the Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). B. Submit complete shop drawings with outline dimensions, descriptive literature and complete description of the frame size, trip setting, class, and interrupting rating of all breakers. Available spaces shall be identified. 1.3 METERING FACILITIES A. Metering equipment shall be a separate part of the main service equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D. Panelboards, main switchboard and/or motor control centers shall all be of the same manufacture. 2.2 METERING FACILITIES A. Meters, meter bases, current and potential transformers are to be furnished by the utility company. 2.3 GROUNDING A. Ground rods shall be copper clad metal, three-quarter inch by ten feet (3/4" x 10'-0") long. Service & Distribution 2600400-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE B. Ground bus bars shall be a minimum of 12 inches long by 3 inches high constructed of a drilled copper bus on stand off insulators. 2.4 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall be of the ratings and configurations shown on the Drawings. Panelboards and overcurrent protection devices shall have a minimum short circuit rating as specified herein or greater where indicated on the Drawings. 1. 208Y/120 volt branch panelboards: 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes minimum interrupting capacity. B. Enclosures shall be corrosion resistant galvanized (zinc finished) sheet steel. Fronts shall be cold rolled steel, finish coated with ANSI 61 grey enamel over a rust inhibitor. Panel locks shall be keyed alike. Recessed flush mounted panels shall have overlapping front. C. Doors for branch panelboards shall be one piece bolt on front with a lockable hinged door over the overcurrent protection devices. D. Space for future devices shall include all necessary bus, supports, and connections. E. Bus bars shall be sequence phased, rigidly supported by high impact resistant, insulated supporting bus assemblies to prevent vibration and resulting damage when subjected to stress, vibration, or short circuits. Solderless terminations shall be suitable for either copper or aluminum wire or cable. F. Bus bars shall be of the ampere rating shown on the Drawings. Bus bars shall be plated aluminum or copper sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. G. Provide a copper equipment ground bus in each panelboard. H. Branch Circuit Panelboards: Maximum allowable physical dimensions: 24 inches wide by 6 inches deep per section. I. All panelboards shall use molded case circuit breakers: 1. Completely sealed enclosure. Toggle type operating handle. Trip ampere rating and ON/OFF indication clearly visible. 2. Thermal-magnetic trip-free, trip-indicating, quick-make, quick-break, with inverse time characteristic. Single-handle and common tripping on multi-pole breakers. 3. External handle shall be suitable for locking in the OFF position. 4. Silver alloy contacts with auxiliary arc-quenching devices. 5. Breakers for lighting circuits shall be SWD rated. 6. Provide main breakers in panelboards served from transformers. 7. Shunt trip breakers shall be supplied with 120V AC coils. Service & Distribution 2600400- 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 METERING FACILITIES A. Current and potential transformers and watt-hour meters shall be provided by the utility company. 3.2 GROUNDING A. Service equipment, conduit systems, supports, cabinets, equipment, transformers, fixtures, the grounded circuit conductor, etc., shall be properly grounded in accordance with the latest issue of the National Electrical Code. Provide all bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps, etc., as required for complete grounding. Route ground conductors to provide the shortest and most direct path to the grounding electrode system. Ground connections shall have clean contact surfaces, tined and sweated while bolting. Install all ground conductors in conduit. Make readily accessible connections to a continuous, metallic, underground cold water piping system at the point where it enters the building. It this is not practicable, connect to a cold water pipe and provide a meter jumper. Make connections to the water pipe that grounds the conduit enclosing the conductor as well as the conductor. Bond the service equipment to a separate grounding electrode per Code requirements. B. Provide a separate grounding conductor, securely grounded on each side of all raceways containing sections of plastic or flexible raceways. Size in accordance with the National Electrical Code and route inside raceway. C. Provide a green grounding jumper from the ground screw to a box grounding screw or clip for all grounding type devices. Use insulated wire. D. Provide grounding type bushings for all secondary feeder conduits that originate from the secondary section of the main distribution panel and individually bond this raceway to the ground bus in the secondary section of the distribution panel. E. Provide a separate grounding conductor for all feeders, branch circuits, and multi-outlet assemblies. 3.3 PANELBOARDS A. Install panelboards with the top of the trim six-feet, three-inches (6'-3") from the finished floor. B. Field check all panelboard loading and reconnect circuits as required to provide balanced phase and line loads. C. Cables installed in wire gutters of panelboards shall be neatly bundled, routed, and supported. Minimum bending radii as recommended by the wire and cable manufacturer shall not be reduced. D. Where panelboards are mounted recessed flush in wall, maintain fire integrity of wall. Service & Distribution 2600400-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE END OF SECTION Service & Distribution 2600400- 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE SECTION 260521 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. 3. Poles and accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CRI: Color-rendering index. B. HID: High-intensity discharge. C. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. D. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination. E. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters. 2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories. 6. Photoelectric relays. 7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. 8. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data. 9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. Exterior Lighting 260521-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for components involved. 11. Anchor bolts for poles. B. Samples for Verification: For products designated for sample submission in Exterior Lighting Device Schedule. Each sample shall include lamps and ballasts. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaries and to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."\ D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660. B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation. C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perForate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Exterior Lighting 260521- 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide manufacturers listed in Luminaire Schedule on drawings. Base bid shall include listed fixtures. Deduct alternate fixtures may be presented as a separate deduct alternate at the time of the bid submission. 2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. I. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and - tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. J. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Owner's Representativeural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC- SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." Exterior Lighting 260521-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE 2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. a. Color: Match Owner's Representative's sample of custom color. 2.3 EXTERIOR LIGHTING A. Low-Temperature Ballast Capability: Rated by its manufacturer for reliable starting and operation of indicated lamp(s) at temperatures minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C) and higher. B. Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast provided at temperatures 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) and higher. 2.4 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4. 1. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis. B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components. 1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel. D. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2.5 POLE ACCESSORIES A. Duplex Receptacle: 120 V, 20 A in a weatherproof assembly complying with Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for ground-fault circuit-interrupter type. 1. Nonmetallic polycarbonate plastic or reinforced fiberglass cover, color to match pole, that when mounted results in rated weather proof, in-use cover. 2. With cord opening. 3. With lockable hasp and latch that complies with OSHA lockout and tag-out requirements. Exterior Lighting 260521- 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming 3.2 POLE INSTALLATION A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole. B. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt tempiates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." C. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer. 1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. 2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space. 3. Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole. D. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable). 3.3 GROUNDING A. Ground metal poles and support structures per Town of Vail requirements and drawings. B. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source. Exterior Lighting 260521- 6 Lionshead Parking Entry Vail, Colorado February 12, 2014 BGCE END OF SECTION Exterior Lighting 260521- 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc January 27, 2014 SECTION 31 1000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if provided, to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, grass, and other vegetation to remain or as designated by Owner's Representative in pre- construction conference. 2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, grass, and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above-and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. 7. Removing existing fill. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 2. Division 31 Section "Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control" for storm water erosion and sediment mitigation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friab�e, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. SITE CLEARING 31 1000-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc January 27, 2014 1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain on Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. B. Record drawings, identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. Information required may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner's Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner's Representative and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing indicated removal and alteration work on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner's Representative before award of Contract. Authority and permits for performing indicated removal and alteration work on adjacent rights-of-way shall be obtained by Contractor. 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed in writing by Owner's Representative. C. Protect improvements on adjacent and Owner's property. D. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. SITE CLEARING 31 1000-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc January 27, 2014 E. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. F. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. G. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to parties having jurisdiction. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving," (PART 2— PRODUCTS). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks, survey control points, monuments, property line pins and other reference points from disturbance during construction. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace by a registered Colorado Professional Land Surveyor at no cost to Owner. B. Provide erosion control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust from leaving project site. C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore or replace damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner's Representative. 3.2 TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash. B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. SITE CLEARING 31 1000-3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc January 27, 2014 C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying and backfill with soil as soon as possible. D. Repair or rep�ace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Owner's Representative. 1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by the qualified arborist. 3.3 UTILITIES A. Contractor will locate, identify, arrange for disconnect and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed before site clearing. 1. Verify that utilities indicated as abandoned have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing. 2. Arrange with utility companies having jurisdiction to shut off indicated utilities. B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by anyone unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner's Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's Representative's written permission. C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. D. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 2 Sections covering site utilities. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 15 Mechanical or Division 16 Electrical Sections. E. After removal of underground utilities, as indicated, properly cap and/or plug existing lines to remain in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. SITE CLEARING 31 1000-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc January 27, 2014 3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and completely remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. 5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earth moving is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered or as determined by Geotechnical Engineer in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading a thicker layer of topsoil. 3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above and below grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated on plans. SITE CLEARING 31 1000-5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc January 27, 2014 1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw- cut faces vertically. 2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion. C. Remove existing fill. Refer to Geotechnical Investigation and/or drawings for information regarding suitability for re-use and estimates of location/extent of existing fill. 3.7 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. END OF SECTION 31 1000 SITE CLEARING 31 1000-6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 31 2000 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if provided, to this Section. B. Additional information concerning earth moving may be found on the civil drawings, in the project geotechnical report and Town of Vail construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern. C. C. Additional information concerning earth moving may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by CTL Thompson, Inc. dated December 23, 2013. All requirements of this report shall be followed. The information shown in this report is for information and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to field verify conditions indicated. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing and grading subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and grasses, and exterior plants. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures including overexcavation of existing unsatisfactory on-site soil materials and replacement with structural fill. 3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase and base course for asphalt or concrete paving. 5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 2. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for drainage of foundations, slabs-on-grade, walls, and landscaped areas. 3. Division 31 Section "Trenching and Backfilling" for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 4. Division 31 Section "Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control" for erosion and sedimentation control measures. C. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits and fees required for the work of this section, including erosion and sediment control and water quality permits required by EARTH MOVING 31 2000-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 the Town of Vail and the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Wa- ter Quality Control Division. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill approved by Geotechnical Engineer. E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. F. Excavation: Removal of all material of whatever character required for the work encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated, including boulders. See Section 3.4 for definition of unclassified and classified excavation. G. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed or approved by Owners Representative and the testing and inspections agency to correct unsatisfactory conditions. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract Provisions for changes in the Work. H. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and more than 30 feet (9 m) in length. I. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Owner's Representative. Unauthorized excavation including disposition of overexcavated materials and other work resulting from slides, cave-ins, swelling, upheaval, or remedial work, as well as remedial work directed by Owner's Representative, shall be without additional compensation. J. Fill: Fill is all material placed to raise the grade of the site or to backfill excavation, upon which the Geotechnical Engineer has made sufficient tests and observations to enable him to issue a written statement that, in his opinion, the fill has been placed and compacted in accordance with the requirements of these specifications. EARTH MOVING 31 2000-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 K. Structural Fill: Select granular material for use below floor slabs and to 5-feet-0-inches beyond building lines. On-site material may be used if approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. L. Underslab Gravel: Imported Class 6 road base per Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (current addition) or material approved by Geotechnical Engineer. M. Rock Excavation: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd.for Bulk Excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation which in the Geotechnical Engineer's opinion cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydrau�ic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 Ibf and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 Ibf; measured according to SAE J-1179. 2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210- hp flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-Ibf breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732. N. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanica� and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surFace. O. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk. P. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. Q. Utilities: Include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Material Test Reports: Provided by Contractor from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. EARTH MOVING 31 2000-3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable codes, ordinances, regulations, references and standards in ef- fect at bid date: 1. Uniform Building Code (UBC) or International Building Code (IBC) per jurisdiction criteria. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (test methods as specified hereaf- ter)(ASTM). 3. State and local codes. B. In case of conflict between the above codes, regulations, references and standards and these specifications, the more stringent requirements shall govern. C. Testing Agency: The Contractor will employ a qualified independent Geotechnical test- ing agency. Contractor shall furnish testing agency access to work, facilities and inci- dental labor required for testing. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all work requiring testing. D. Geotechnical Engineer: All materials and operations under this section of the specifi- cations shall be executed under the supervision of a Geotechnical Engineer who will place qualified personnel on the site during earth moving operations as necessary. The Geotechnical Engineer shall approve all foundation excavations and give written approval of the completed foundations to the Owner's Representative at the following times: 1. When excavations are first open. 2. Just prior to placing of concrete, shall test and control the fill compaction, ap- prove the materials and method of placing and compacting and give written ap- proval to the Owner's Representative that all bearing surfaces and fill require- ments have been inspected. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Geotechnical Engineer when tests are to be made. E. For approval of imported or on-site fill material, notify the Geotechnical Engineer at least four (4) working days in advance of intention to import material, designate the proposed borrow area and permit the Geotechnical Engineer to sample as necessary from the borrow area for the purpose of making acceptance tests to prove the quality of the material. The Geotechnical Engineer report on the acceptability shall be final and binding. F. Reference Standards: Compaction Standard: Standard Proctor Density ASTM D698. A. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner's Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Locations, sizes and depths or invert elevations of existing utilities as shown on the drawings are based on information provided by others, and believed to EARTH MOVING 31 2000-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 be correct, but may not be absolutely so. Such information is therefore presented only as approximations, and should be verified prior to construction. Protect from damage any sewer, water, gas, electric, phone or other pipe lines or conduits uncovered during the work until they have been examined by the Owner's Representative. If such lines are found to be abandoned and not in use, remove affected sections without extra cost. If such lines are found to be in use, carefully protect and carry on work around them. If Owner's Representative deems it advisable to move such lines, Owner will pay cost of moving. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by anyone unless permitted in writing by Owner's Representative and then only after arranging to provide tempo- rary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Contact utility-locator service for area where project is located before excavating. 2. Notify Owner's Representative not less than two (2) days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 3. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's Representative's written permission. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. C. Remove all existing fill deemed by Geotechnical Engineer to be unsatisfactorily placed. D. Existing Contours and Elevations: Contours and spot elevations of existing ground el- evations at the site, and approximate elevations of finish grade cuts, fills, and excava- tions for the Work are shown on Drawings. Contours and elevations for existing ground lines are based on information provided by others, and are believed to be cor- rect, but may not be absolutely so. Existing contours and elevations should therefore be considered approximate, and should be verified at the site prior to construction. E. Verification of Existing Conditions: Visit the site prior to submission of bids. Verify ex- isting conditions, elevations, and contours. In the event of discrepancies between ex- isting conditions and those indicated on the Contract Documents or survey, contact the Owner's Representative for clarification. F. Existing Benchmarks: Carefully preserve and maintain existing benchmarks, monu- ments, property line pins, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace by a registered Colorado Professional Land Surveyor at no additional cost to Owner. G. Frost Protection: When freezing temperatures may be expected, do not excavate to the full depth indicated unless the footing or slabs are to be poured immediately after the excavation has been completed. If placing of concrete is delayed, protect the bot- toms of excavations from frost until concrete is placed. 1.7 WARRANTY Settlement in backfill, fill or in structures built over backfill or fill, which may occur within the specified project warranty period, shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Any structures damaged by settlement shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. EARTH MOVING 31 2000-5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Satisfactory Soiis: Shall meet approval of Geotechnical Engineer and shall be free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. Clean, on-site, natural soils, or imported materials, as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups, as identified by the Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Backfill and Fill: Approved by Geotechnical Engineer. E. Structural Fill: Approved by Geotechnical Engineer. F. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 '/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1 '/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. H. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 '/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. I. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. J. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 '/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. K. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. L. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand. M. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 2.2 GEOTEXTILES A. SubsurFace Drainage and Separation Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins EARTH MOVING 31 2000-6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288. Utilize Mirafi 140N or as recommended by Geotechnical Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations. B. Preparation of subgrade for earth moving operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31 Section "Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control," during earth moving operations. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and rights-of-way. D. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. E. Cold Weather Work: Prevent frost from entering bearing stratus upon which construction will take place or in areas where fill will be placed in that season. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurFace ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 3. Obtain and comply with all provisions of the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division, Construction Dewatering Permit. C. Protection of Persons and Property: 1. Provide all necessary measures to protect workmen and passersby. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of the Work, as required by municipal or oth- er authorities having jurisdiction. EARTH MOVING 31 2000-7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Protect adjacent streets, roadways, and properties throughout the entire opera- tion. Protect newly graded areas from destruction by weather or runoff. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other improvements from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other haz- ards created by earth moving operations. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: All excavation (other than rock excavation) is considered as unclassified and is defined as removal of all material encountered, regardless of soil type. Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include soil materials, and obstructions. Unclassified excavation is considered normal excavation and no extra costs will be allowed. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil ma- terials and rock, rep�ace with satisfactory soil materials. 2. Remove material of every nature or description encountered in obtaining required lines and grades. Excavate and/or place and compact fill to provide for building pad elevation(s) required by drawings. 3. Excavate wide enough at foundations and retaining walls to permit erection and removal of forms, application of dampproofing or waterproofing. 4. Pitch grading around excavations to prevent water from running into excavated areas. 5. Pre-rip hardpan and soft bedrock with single-tooth ripper or other suitable equip- ment to facilitate excavation with conventional earth-moving equipment. 6. Bearing soils disturbed by excavating equipment must be recompacted to 95 percent of maximum Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698) prior to placing concrete. 7. Exposed areas which will receive fill once properly cleaned, shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 8-inches, conditioned to near optimum moisture content, and compacted. B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth excavation and rock excavation. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Owner's Representative. 1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. a. Intermittent drilling; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation. C. Stability: EARTH MOVING 31 2000-8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Slope sides of excavations in compliance with OSHA requirements and local codes or ordinances. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Continuously monitor cut slopes for distress. Take all necessary precautions to safeguard workers, structures, and utilities. 3. Provide all necessary shoring, sheeting, or bracing of sides of excavations re- quired to prevent caving, erosion, and gullying. Provide underpinning of existing structures or other improvements adjacent to excavations which are subject to damage. D. Unanticipated Conditions: Notify the Owner's Representative immediately upon finding evidence of previous structures or filled materials which penetrate below designated excavation levels, groundwater or water-bearing strata, or other conditions which are not shown or which cannot be reasonably assumed from existing surveys and geotechnical reports. Secure the Owner's Represenative instruction before proceeding with further work in such areas. E. Rock Excavation: Includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction. Rock excavation in unconfined areas is defined as removal and disposal of material which in the Geotechnical Engineer's opinion, cannot be excavated without continuous and systematic drilling and blasting, or continuous use of a suitable ripper or other special equipment. 1. Unanticipated Rock Excavation: Rock excavation that is not indicated on existing surveys or which cannot be reasonably assumed from geotechnical studies of the site and which could not have been anticipated without extensive investigations. Unanticipated rock excavation shall be subject to change order procedures or previously agreed upon unit prices. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated e�evations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10-foot. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Overexcavate existing soils by a depth of at least four (4) feet. Remove excavated soils from site and replace with acceptable structural fill. 2. Excavation Below Slab on Grade: Overexcavate existing fill material within the proposed footprint of the slabs to a minimum depth of two (2) feet and replace with imported materials as approved by Geotechnical Engineer. B. Existing man-made fill shall be removed under structures as required by the Geotechnical Engineer. EARTH MOVING 31 2000-9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. B. Scarify subgrade soils beneath exterior slabs, sidewalks and pavements to a minimum depth of 8-inches, moisture condition and recompact as specified. C. Overexcavate existing fill material within the proposed footprint of the paving to a minimum depth of two (2) feet and replace with imported materials as approved by Geotechnical Engineer. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Trenching and Backfilling," for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify Geotechnical Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Owner's Representative and Geotechnical Consultant determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic- tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Remove and replace soft areas. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. 3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Owner's Representative, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Owner's Representative, without additional compensation. 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be EARTH MOVING 31 2000-10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 used when approved by Geotechnical Engineer. If approved by Geotechnical Engineer, structural fill placed at 100 percent ASTM D698, 2 percent below to 1 percent above optimum moisture may be used. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Owner's Representative. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials in approved locations without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.11 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 8. Acceptance of subgrade by Geotechnical Engineer. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Trenching and Backfilling," for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 3.13 SOIL FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. 1. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 hor- izontal so fill material will bond with existing material. 2. In areas of fill, scarify natural soil following removal of unsatisfactory material, to a depth of 8-inches. EARTH MOVING 31 2000-11 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations per the geotechnical report and as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill or structural fill as approved by Geotechnical Engineer. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill or reconditioned on-site soils or imported fi�ls of native soils as approved by Geotechnical Engineer. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill or reconditioned on-site soils or imported fills of native soils as approved by Geotechnical Engineer. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to optimum or to 3 percent over optimum moisture content for clay soils, or within 2 percent of optimum moisture content for granular soils. Refer to geotechnical study for additional recommendations. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content beyond the tolerances described above and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under exterior flatwork, slabs, steps, and pavements: excavate existing soils then import, place and compact two (2) feet of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 98 percent. 2. Under footings and interior floor slabs: excavate existing soils then import, place and compact four (4) feet of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 98 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent. 4. Compact foundation wall backfill to 95 percent. 5. Compact scarified subgrade soils to 95 percent. EARTH MOVING 31 2000-12 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 6. Compact retaining wall backfill to 95 percent. 3.16 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 0.10 feet. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 0.10 feet. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 0.10 feet. 4. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of '/2-inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Install separation geotextile, if requested by Geotechnical Engineer, on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement. 3. Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 4. Place subbase and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 5. Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 6. Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. EARTH MOVING 31 2000-13 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.18 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows: 1. Install subdrainage geotextile if required by Geotechnical Engineer on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. 4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Owner's Representative. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Perform field moisture tests in accordance with ASTM D3017. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies at a minimum: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. EARTH MOVING 31 2000-14 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.20 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surFaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Owner's Representative; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 31 2000 EARTH MOVING 31 2000-15 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 31 2333— TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if provided, to this Section. B. Additional information concerning trenching and backfilling may be found on the civil drawings, in the project geotechnical study/report and Town of Vail construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern. C. Additional information concerning earthwork may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by CTL Thompson, Inc. dated December 23, 2013. All requirements of this report shall be followed unless noted otherwise. The information shown in this report is for information and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to field verify conditions indicated. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 2. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 3. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility structures. 4. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, site excavating, filling and grading. 3. Division 31 Section "Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control" for erosion and sediment control. 4. Divisions 22, and 26 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures, if available. 5. Division 33 Section "Water Utility Distribution Piping"for water pipe installation. 6. Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage Piping" for storm sewer system installation. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Shoring Design: Provide the services of a professional engineer to design all shoring, bracing, and underpinning required to protect the safety of workers and integrity of adjacent existing structures or other improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as backfill approved by Geotechnical Engineer. E. Unclassified Excavation: Removal of all material of whatever-character required for the work encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated, including bou�ders. F. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed or approved by Owner's Representative and the testing and inspections agency to correct unsatisfactory conditions. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. G. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. H. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Owner's Representative. Unauthorized excavation including disposition of overexcavated materials and other work resulting from slides, cave-ins, swelling, upheaval, or remedial work, as well as remedial work directed by Owner's Representative, shall be without additional compensation. I. Rock Excavation: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 force of not less than 28,090 Ibf and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 Ibf; measured according to SAE J-1179. 2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210- hp flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-Ibf breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732. J. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk. K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. L. Utilities: Includes on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Each type of plastic warning tape. B. Samples: Contractor to submit representative samples of all materials proposed for use in bedding and trench backfilling operations to the testing and inspections agency for analysis and determination of compliance with the requirements specified herein. C. Material Test Reports: Provided by Contractor from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. D. Pre-Excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: 1. All testing and inspections required herein will be performed by an independent testing and inspection agency employed by the Contractor. 2. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all work requiring testing or inspection services. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all applicable requirements of the Occupa- tional Safety and Health Administration and local and State rules, regulations, and or- TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 dinances concerning shoring, bracing, or sloping of excavations and safety of workers. Safety of workers is the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Coordination: Coordinate scheduling and procedures for trench excavation, bedding, and backfilling with other Sections whose work relates to or is affected by this work. A. Pre-Construction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner's Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which also may be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Locations, sizes and depths or invert elevations of existing utilities as shown on the drawings are based on information provided by others, and are believed to be correct, but may not be absolutely so. Such information is therefore presumed only as approximations and should be verified prior to construction. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by anyone unless permitted in writing by Owner's Representative and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify Owner's Representative not less than two (2) days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's Representative's written permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. C. Existing Benchmarks: Carefully preserve and maintain existing bench marks, monuments, property line pins, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace them by a registered Colorado Professional Land Surveyor at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Verification of Existing Conditions: Visit the site prior to submission of bids. Verify existing conditions, elevations, and utility locations. In the event of discrepancies between existing conditions and those indicated on the Contract Documents or survey, contact the Owner's Representative for clarification. 1.7 WARRANTY Settlement in backfill, fill or in structures built over backfill or fill, which may occur within the specified project warranty period, shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Any structures damaged by settlement shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Utility Trench Bedding Materials: 1. Agency Requirements: Bedding requirements shall be in accordance with juris- diction having control over utility. B. Utility Trench Backfill Materials: 1. Existing soils obtained from trench excavations, including granular or aggregate base course from removed pavements, broken and pulverized claystone or clay- stone-sandstone bedrock may be used for backfilling trenches, provided it meets any special requirements of the Utility Agency and Geotechnical Engineer. Bed- rock must be processed and broken or pulverized so that the maximum particle or fragment size does not exceed three-inches (3-inches). C. Unsuitable Utility Trench Materials: Materials unsuitable for bedding and backfilling in- clude highly organic soils, ASTM D2487 Group PT topsoil, and soils containing roots, vegetable matter, trash, and debris. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Shoring and Bracing: Provide all materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers, and cross-braces, in good and serviceable condition, as required for safety and by governing authorities. B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31 Section "Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control," during earthwork operations. D. Existing Utilities: 1. General: Location of existing utilities shown on the plans are approximate only. The Contractor shall be responsible to locate all existing underground utilities in areas of the work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection during ex- cavation and backfilling operations. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted pip- ing or other utilities be encountered during excavations, consult the Owner's Representative immediately for direction. Cooperate with the Utility Agency in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the Utility Agency. 2. Active Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Owner or by adjacent properties, except when permitted in writing by the Owner's Representative, and then only after acceptable temporary utility ser- vices have been provided. Remove or relocate utilities only as indicated or spec- ified. 3. Inactive Utilities: Report inactive or abandoned utilities encountered in excavat- ing or grading operations, and remove, plug, or cap as required. In the absence of specific requirements, plug or cap such utility lines at least 5-feet -0-inches outside new building walls, or as required by local requirements. 4. Removal: Demolish and completely remove from the project site all existing un- derground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with Utility Agencies for discontinuance of services if lines are active. E. Protection of Persons and Property: 1. Provide all necessary measures to protect workmen and passersby. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of the work, as required by municipal or other authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Protect adjacent streets, structures, and other improvements from damage caused by settlement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by trench excavations. F. Protect subgrades and trench bottoms soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. G. Cold Weather Work: Prevent frost from entering bearing strata upon which construction will taken place or in areas where fill will be placed in that season. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.3 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations and to collection or runoff areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and diversions away from trench excavations. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. C. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surFace water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 3. Obtain and comply with all provisions of the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division, Construction Dewatering Permit. 3.4 SHORING AND BRACING A. Provide shoring and bracing of excavations as required for safety and by governing authorities. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. 3.5 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. Where trenches or other utility excavations are made in existing paved areas, saw-cut pavement surface to create a clean break line. Cut pavement a minimum of 12-inches beyond trench width on each side of trench; remove and dispose of existing surFace course and aggregate base course, leaving a 12-inches wide undisturbed subgrade lip on each side of trench. B. After trench has been backfilled and compacted, place new pavement in accordance with applicable requirements of Division 32 Sections as applicable, for Asphaltic or Portland cement concrete pavement and in accordance with Authorities having jurisdiction. 3.6 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. C. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit. 1. Slope sides of trenches or provide shoulders in accordance with OSHA requirements and as required by Utility Agency standards. 2. Continuously monitor cut slopes and trenches for distress or movement. Provide all necessary shoring and bracing required to protect the life and safety of workmen performing excavation or installing piping or conduit. D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches a minimum of 3 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course and backfill with a 6- inches layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installing pipe. 3.8 BEDDING OF PIPES A. After completion of trench excavation and before installation of piping, install not less than 3-inches of approved bedding material in trench bottom for support of pipe. Dig bell holes in bedding deep enough to provide a minimum of 2-inches clearance between the bell and bedding material. Fully support pipe on bedding material for the full length of the pipe barrel. B. After pipe is adjusted for line and grade, and all jointing is complete, carefully place and tamp bedding material under the haunches of the pipe and in the previously dug bell holes. C. Install bedding to a minimum depth of 12-inches above top of pipe prior to starting placement of compacted backfill. Lightly compact or tamp bedding material in a manner to avoid displacement of or damage to the pipe. 3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials in approved locations without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surFace water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soi� materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.10 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. After installation of utility piping or lines have been completed, locations recorded, trash or other debris removed from excavations, and bedding placed and approved, backfill promptly as work and weather conditions permit. Do not backfill trenches until all required pipe system tests and inspections have been made, unless partial backfilling is required to restrain pipe under test pressures. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. C. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. D. Place backfill materials in layers not more than 8-inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4-inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand operated tampers. Use hand held tools or compacting devices for trench backfill, until a minimum compacted thickness of 3-feet - 0-inches above top of pipe is achieved. Mechanical or power compactors may be used thereafter. E. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer of backfill to specifications. F. Compact each layer to not less than 95% of maximum standard Proctor density (ASTM D698). Thoroughly compact by means of inechanical tampers areas which cannot be properly compacted by means of rolling equipment. G. Backfill to subgrade elevation shown for finish grading, topsoil placement, or paving. H. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. I. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing. J. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. K. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, and 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.11 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Division 33 Section "Subdrainage Systems." B. Subsurfiace Drain: Place subsurFace drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 inches of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches thick. Overlay drainage backfill with 1 layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inches thick compacted layers to final subgrade. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. PerForm field moisture tests in accordance with ASTM D3017. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies at a minimum: 1. Trench Backfill: The density tests shall be performed during backfilling at specified depths in the trench to ensure that the required density and moisture is obtained throughout. For trenches less than 30-inches in depth, density tests shall be taken within 18-inches above the top of pipe or conduit and at the surface / top lift as a minimum. For trenches greater than 30-inches in depth, density tests shall be taken within 18-inches of the top of the pipe or conduit, and at 2-foot vertical intervals to the top of the trench with the final test at the surFace / top lift. For service lines, conduct one (1) test per every service line per utility type at specified depths. At a minimum, test intervals and quantities shall meet or exceed the requirements of the local utility agency. D. When testing agency reports that backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Owner's Representative; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.14 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT A. Cleanup: Remove excess materials not required for backfilling purposes, including excess spoil material, accumulated debris, and rubbish from site. Burning of waste material is prohibited. 3.15 RESTORATION A. Adjacent Improvements: Restore all fences, irrigation ditches, yards, lawns, and other structures or surfaces to condition equal to or better than before work began. 3.16 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 31 2333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 2333-11 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 31 2500 - TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply [if provided,] to this Section. B. Additional information concerning temporary erosion and sedimentation control may be found on the civil drawings and Town of Vail construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern. C. Additional information concerning erosion may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by CTL Thompson, Inc. dated December 23, 2013. All requirements of this report shall be followed unless stated otherwise. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Included. Furnish, install, maintain, and remove temporary erosion and sedimentation controls as shown on the drawings or specified herein, or as required to complete the work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, site excavating, filling and grading. 3. Division 31 Section "Trenching and Backfilling" for excavating and backfilling of utilities. B. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits and fees required for the work of this section, including erosion and sediment control and water quality permits required by the Town of Vail and the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division. C. Erosion Control: The Erosion and Sedimentation Control Drawings included in the Contract Documents is the minimum requirement to be implemented. Provide additional control as necessary to meet applicable local and State criteria. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Unclassified Excavation: Removal of all material of whatever character required for the work encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated, including boulders. TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 2500-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Fill: Fill is all material placed to raise the grade of the site or to backfill excavation, upon which the Soils Engineer has made sufficient tests and observations to enable him to issue a written statement that, in his opinion, the fill has been placed and compacted in accordance with the requirements of these specifications. D. BMP: Best Management Practice. Erosion and sediment control devices, which may consist of silt fence, sediment control logs, crates, filter fabric, riprap, etc. E. SWMP: Storm Water Management Plan. Identifies BMPs, which are erosion and sediment control measures for the project. F. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. H. Utilities: Include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services to buildings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: All submittals are to be made to the Owner's Representative. If provided refer to Division 1 section "Submittal Procedures." B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published descriptive literature and complete specifications for manufactured products specified herein and utilized on the project. 1. Geotextiles. 2. Erosion Control Fabric. 3. Sediment Control Logs. 4. Silt Fence. 5. Riprap. C. Storm Water Management Plan: 1. The Contractor shall provide a Storm Water Management Plan (SWMP) addressing erosion and sediment control measures for all sites with over one acre of disturbed ground. The Contractor is responsible for providing a Storm Water Management Report. 2. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining all required permits including a General Permit application for Storm Water Discharges associated with construction activities at least ten (10) days prior to start of construction. Permits are to be filed with the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division. 3. Contractor shall have the Storm Water Management Plan (SWMP) and report available on-site at all times. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable local, State and Federal ordinances, rules and regulations concerning sedimentation control and storm water ru noff. B. In case of conflict between the above codes, regulations, references and standards and these specifications, the more stringent requirements shall govern. C. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner's Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 2500-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Verify all existing conditions affecting the work of this section prior to submitting bids or proposals. Additional compensation will not be allowed for revisions or modification of work resulting from failure to verify existing conditions. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control measures shall be maintained until permanent measures are in place. All damaged, disturbed or devices filled with sediment, which may occur within the specified project warranty period, shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Any devices damaged by erosion or sediment shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Materials: Provide one or more of the following materials, as shown on the plans or as applicable for site conditions: 1. Sand bags. 2. Silt fences. 3. Rock riprap. 4. Temporary seeding. 5. Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. 6. Biodegradable twisted jute or spun-coir mesh, 0.92 Ib/sy minimum, with 50 to 65 percent open area. 7. Drainage geotextile. 8. Impervious fill. 9. Inlet protection. 10. Other materials proposed for use on-site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Determine the existing ground elevations, drainage patterns, and changes to such patterns during excavation in order to satisfactorily plan and provide materials for adequate erosion and sediment control devices. 3.1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and rights-of-way according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 2500-3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. D. Secure grading permit from agency having jurisdiction prior to commencing grading operations. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this section will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Devices. Erosion and sedimentation control measures to be taken during construction include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Apply soil stabilization within 14 days to all disturbed areas that are to be dormant for a period longer than 30 calendar days after reaching grade. Stabilize soil with mulch anchored per criteria of authorities having jurisdiction. Temporarily revegetate areas that will remain in an interim condition for more than three (3) months. 2. Roads and parking areas indicated to be paved may be covered with an appropriate aggregate base course in lieu of mulch. Temporary mulching or aggregate base course is not required if final pavement construction will take place within 30 days after grading to final contours. 3. Soils that will be stockpiled for more than 30 days must be mulched and seeded within 14 days after stockpile construction. 4. Prevent sediment from leaving the project site by installing a silt fence or other BMPs as indicated on the plans. Protect existing storm inlets adjacent to the site by an approved gravel filter. 5. Locate stone stabilization pads at all points of vehicular ingress and egress to the construction site. 6. Provide temporary erosion controls consisting of berms at the top of slopes and interceptor ditches at ends of berms and at those locations which will eliminate or minimize erosion during construction, along with temporary seeding, temporary diversion, chutes, and down pipes and lining of water courses. 7. Temporary sedimentation controls shall consist of silt dams, traps, silt fence, barriers, and appurtenances at the top of spoil and borrow area slopes and where runoff water exits the site. 8. Maintain the available silt holding capacity of silt dams, fence traps and barriers until no longer needed. The sediment capacity of sediment retainage areas shall be at a minimum, the capacity shown on the plans in conformance with Urban Drainage Criteria Manual, Volume 3. Prior to removal, obtain concurrence of the Owner's Representative and Engineer. 9. Remove accumulated sediment and debris from a BMP when the sediment level reaches one-half the height of the BMP, or at any time the sediment or debris adversely impacts the functioning of the BMP. 10. Remove filter stone or cloth which has become dislodged. Place new filter and fence. 11. The erosion/sediment control plan shows the minimum required for the project. If it becomes apparent that additional controls are necessary, the Engineer shall be TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 2500-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 notified and with approval of the Owner's Representative additional controls shall be installed. B. Chemicals and Pollutants: 1. Store construction materials and chemicals that could contribute pollutants to the runoff within an enclosure, container, or dike located around the perimeter of the storage area, to prevent discharge of these materials into runoff from the construction site. 2. Locate areas used for collection and temporary storage of solid and liquid waste away from the storm drainage system. Provide covering or fencing as required to prevent windblown materials; construct perimeter dike to contain liquid runoff. These measures may not be necessary if materials are immediately placed in covered waste containers. 3. Perform equipment maintenance in designated areas using measures such as drip pans to control petroleum products spillage. 4. Immediately clean up and properly dispose of spills of construction related materials such as paints, solvents, or other chemicals. C. Final Stabilization and Long-Term Management: 1. Final stabilization shall be achieved through permanent vegetation and landscaping after construction of all buildings and paved surfaces. 2. With approval of the Town of Vail, temporary erosion and sediment control measures may be removed within 30 days after final site stabilization is achieved or after temporary measures are no longer needed. D. Inspection and Maintenance: Inspect erosion and sediment control measures weekly during construction. In addition, inspect all facilities immediately after any significant runoff or snowmelt which results in runoff. Repair or otherwise mitigate any damage to the erosion and sediment control facilities at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.5 CLEANING A. Removal of Controls: Remove controls upon completion of that portion of the work for which controls were furnished. Leave the site and work area in a clean condition. END OF SECTION 31 2500 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 2500-5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 32 1216 -ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if provided to this Section. B. Additional information concerning asphalt paving may be found on the civil drawings, in the project geotechnical report and Town of Vail construction standards. In case of conflict between the drawings, jurisdictional criteria and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern. C. C. Additional information concerning asphalt paving may be found in the geotechnical investigation report by CTL Thompson, Inc. dated December 23, 2013. All requirements of this report shall be followed unless noted otherwise. The information shown in this report is for information and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to field verify conditions indicated. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot-mix asphalt paving overlay. 4. Asphalt surface treatments. 5. Cold milling of existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling and site grading. 2. Division 32 Section "Pavement Markings"for pavement striping and symbols. C. References: 1. Town of Vail Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition. 2. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition and all appropriate standard special provisions. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms. B. CDOT: State of Colorado Department of Transportation. ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. CDOT Specifications: Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition and all appropriate standard special provisions. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving in accordance with Section 401 of the CDOT Specifications. 1. Standard Specification: CDOT Specifications. 2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in CDOT Specifications do not apply to this Project. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. B. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work. C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material. D. Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by providers. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot- mix asphalt similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service perFormance. 2. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot- mix asphalt paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Testing Agency: 1. All testing and inspections required herein will be perFormed by an independent testing and inspection agency employed by the Contractor. 2. Notify the testing and inspection agency not less than 48 hours in advance of all work requiring testing or inspection services. B. Testing Requirements: Asphalt Paving shall be tested for gradation, asphalt content and in-place density in accordance with CDOT Specifications, the current edition of CDOT Field Materials Manual, and local Regulatory Agency requirements, whichever are the most stringent. C. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner's Representative. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Tack Coats: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 60 deg F (15 deg C). 2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910. 3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement. 4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface or air temperature in the shade of 50 deg F and rising at time of placement. B. Coordination and Scheduling: 1. Cooperate with other trades and arrange scheduling to avoid damage to other work, including grading, site utilities and piping, exterior concrete, landscaping and irrigation systems. 2. Before commencing pavement operations, ascertain that utility lines, site lighting and wiring, piping, curb and gutter work, general grading and heavy trucking is complete so that such operations will not damage paving work. 3. Mask off and protect exposed building surfaces and abutting concrete from damage or staining by tack coat and paving operations. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations meeting the requirements of the CDOT Specifications. B. Asphalt Concrete Aggregate: Clean, hard, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel, or natural gravel conforming to the requirements of Subsection 703.04 of the CDOT Specifications and Grading SX and S (Table 703-4). C. Mineral Filler: Rock dust, slag dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic cement, or other suitable mineral material conforming to the requirements of Subsection 703.06 of the CDOT Specifications. 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Cement: The asphalt cement to be used on this project shall be PG 58-28 conforming to the requirements of Subsection 702.01 of the CDOT Specifications. B. Tack Coat: AASHTO M 140, emulsified asphalt or AASHTO M 208, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. C. Fog Seal: AASHTO M 140, emulsified asphalt or AASHTO M 208, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted at the factory in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Water: Potable. 2.3 MIXES A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes. Furnish job-mix formulas for each pavement type, conforming to the requirements of Subsection 401.02 of the CDOT Specifications. Mix aggregates and bituminous materials in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 401.15 of the CDOT Specifications. Use approved job mix formulas. Mix to comply with the following requirements: 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located. 2. Base Course: Grading S. 3. Surface Course: Grading SX. B. Emulsified-Asphalt: Shall conform to AASHTO M140 or M208 in accordance with Subsection 702.03 of the CDOT Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subgrade is unfrozen, free of water, snow, and ice otherwise in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads. B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction. Scarify, regrade and recompact surFace of subgrade that is pumping or deforming as required to provide true levels, uniform slopes and proper total thickness of paving as required in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 COLD MILLING A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated. 1. Mill to a depth of a minimum 1 '/2-inches or as indicated on the plans. 2. Mill to a uniform finished surface free of gouges, grooves, and ridges. 3. Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course. 4. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling. 5. Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep material separate from milled hot-mix asphalt. 6. Transport milled hot-mix asphalt to asphalt recycling facility. 7. Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust. ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.3 PATCHING A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade. B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformiy to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.2 gal./sq. yd.. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. C. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing pavements. B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch. 1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than '/4 inch wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than '/4 inch wide. Fill flush with surFace of existing pavement and remove excess. C. Hot-applied joint sealant being a single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3405 or D1190. 1. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 702.06 for joint and crack sealant material requirements. 2. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 408.01 and 408.03 for joint and crack sealant installation requirements. 3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Immediate�y before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course. B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials. C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gal./sq. yd.. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 3.6 PAVING GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION A. Apply asphalt binder uniformly to existing pavement surfaces at a rate of 0.25 gal./sq. yd.. B. Place paving geotextile promptly according to manufacturer's written instructions. Broom or roll geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches and transverse joints 6 inches. 1. Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage and place hot-mix asphalt paving overlay the same day. 3.7 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated on the plans or as directed by Geotechnical Report. Maximum lift thickness shall be 3-inches. Minimum lift thickness shall be 1'/2-inches for Grading SX and 2- inches for Grading S. 2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. Maximum lift thickness shall be 2-inches. 3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 235 deg F. 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surFace free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat. B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course. C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 3.8 JOINTS A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, 6 to 12 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints as described in AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements." 5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density. 3.9 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. When paving surface temperature falls below 185 deg F (85 deg C) no further compaction effort will be permitted unless approved. B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density in accordance with Subsection 401.17 of the CDOT Specifications. 1. Pavement shall be compacted to a density of 92°/o to 96% of the maximum theoretical density, determined according to Colorado procedure 51. Field density determination will be in accordance with Colorado Procedure 44 or 81. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surFaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm. ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.10 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. Base Course: Plus or minus '/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus '/4 inch, no minus. B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: '/4-inch. 2. Surface Course: 3/16-inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is '/a-inch. 3.11 MANHOLE FRAME ADJUSTMENTS A. Set frames for manholes and other such units within areas to be paved to '/4-inch minimum to '/z-inch maximum below final grade as part of this work. Include existing frames or new frames furnished under other sections of these specifications. B. Set cover frames to '/a-inch minimum and '/z-inch maximum below surface of adjacent pavement. Surround frames set to grade with a ring of compacted asphaltic concrete base prior to paving. Place asphaltic concrete mixture up to 1-inch below top of frame, slope to grade, and compact with hand tamping. Adjust frames as required for paving. C. Provide temporary closures over openings until completion of rolling operations. Remove closures at completion of work. ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.12 SURFACE TREATMENTS A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. to existing asphalt pavement and allow to cure. With a fine sand, lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal. B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to cure. 1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from specified requirements. B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549. D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances. E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979. 1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications. 2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. a. One core sample will be taken for every 350 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken. b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. F. Asphalt Content and Gradation. Testing agency will take sample of uncompacted paving mixtures at a minimum frequency of every 1,000 tons according to Colorado Procedure — Laboratory CPL-5120 and Colorado Procedure CP-31. G. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 Conforming to the specified requirements will be in according with Subsection 105.03 of the CDOT Specifications. 3.14 DISPOSAL A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on-site. END OF SECTION 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING 32 1216-10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 32 1313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if provided, to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes constructing exterior concrete paving on prepared subgrade or base course in accordance with these specifications. This work shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, thicknesses and typical cross-sections shown on the plans for the following: 1. Driveways and roadways. 2. Parking lots. 3. Curbs and gutters. 4. Sidewalks, steps, ramps. 5. As detailed on the plans. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course. 2. Division 32 Section "Pavement Marking"for pavement striping and symbols. 3. Division 32 Section "Concrete Pavement Joint Sealants" for expansion and contraction joints. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Town of Vail Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition. B. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume. B. CDOT: State of Colorado Department of Transportation. C. CDOT Specifications: Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition. CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. ADA Handbook: Americans with Disabilities Act Standards for Accessible Design, U.S. Department of Justice. E. ANSI A117.1: Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, American National Standard Institute. F. Refer to ACI 301: (American Concrete Institute — Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete), for additional definitions. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix, and includes alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materia�s: 1. Aggregates. 2. Cement. 3. Admixtures. D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials used in the project complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or adhesive. 8. Joint fillers. E. Field quality-control test reports. F. Pavement Joint Layout Plan: Plan to show joint locations and typical dimensions for review and approval by engineer. G. Traffic Control Plan: For work in the public right-of-way. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94/C 94 M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete Association's (NRMCA) Plant Certification Program. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source. E. ACI Publications: Comp�y with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Concrete Testing Service: The Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. G. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at project site as directed by Owner's Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." H. Regulatory Requirements: I. Comply with Town of Vail standards for sidewalks, curbs, ramps, gutters, and driveway approaches or aprons, including standard dimensions, profiles, thicknesses, reinforcing, and compressive strength. In the event of conflict between the Contract Documents and the standards, the more stringent requirements will apply. 1. Comply with applicable requirements of ADA Handbook, ANSI A117.1, and local and State codes and ordinances regarding walks, steps, ramps and curb ramps. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. B. Coordination and Scheduling: Coordinate with other trades and arrange scheduling to avoid damage to other work including grading, site utilities and piping, asphalt paving, landscaping and irrigation systems. C. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions and existing conditions shown on the drawings by taking field measurements prior to start of work. Report discrepancies to the Owner's Representative for clarification and make minor adjustments in layout as required by field conditions and as approved by the Owner's Representative, at no additional cost to the Owner. CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Environmental Requirements: Perform work only under suitable weather conditions. Comply with the environmental requirements of Section 3.6 for concrete placement. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surFaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet or less. B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. B. Reinforcement Bars: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. C. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. D. Tie Bars: CDOT Section 709 and ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. E. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2.4 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER A. Sealed Joints: Preformed, compressible fiber or cork filler material complying with ASTM D1751 or D1752, Type II, guaranteed compatible with expansion joint sealant materials, '/z-inches thick unless otherwise indicated. Provide high-impact polystyrene removable "void cap"to create '/2-inches deep reveal for installation of sealant. B. Self-Sealing Joints: Preformed, compressible asphalt fiber joint filler complying with ASTM D994, '/2-inches thick unless otherwise indicated. Do not use asphalt fiber filler in joints to receive elastomeric joint sealants. 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use one of the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project: 1. Portland Cement: CDOT Section 701 and ASTM C 150, Type I/II or I/IILA, gray. a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: CDOT Section 703 and ASTM C 33, coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 3. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling. C. Water: CDOT Section 712 and ASTM C 94/C 94M potable. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: CDOT Section 711 and ASTM C 260. C. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. l. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 6. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 7. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.7 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long. 2.8 CURING MATERIALS: CDOT SECTION 711 A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd. (305 g/sq.m) dry. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, waterproof paper, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. 1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L. F. White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type II, Class B. 1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method. 2. Do not use Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing agency. B. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4,500 psi (30.6 MPa). CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm). 4. Minimum 564 Ib. Cement per cubic yard. (CDOT Ciass P) C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 4.0 to 7.0 percent. D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture, plasticizing and retarding admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 20 - 30 percent Class F Fly Ash CDOT Section 601.02, Class P Concrete. G. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 Ib/cu. yd. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surFaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic- tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch require correction according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earth Moving." C. Subgrade shall be tested by Geotechnical Engineer and pass required tests prior to concrete pavement placement. D. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after non-conforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 12-inch overlap of adjacent mats. CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct/install construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Contractor to provide plan of joint placement for the Engineers approval. 3. The distance between joints shall not exceed in feet, twice the pavement thickness in inches. (i.e.: 6-inches PCC pavement to utilize maximum 12-foot joint spacing.) B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at expansion joints. 1. Contractor may uti�ize preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. C. Expansion Joints: Form expansion joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints in pavement between existing and new concrete, and buildings and new concrete. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler no less than 1/2 inch or no more than 1 inch below finished surface for joint sealant. 4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with groover tool to the indicated radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surFace finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surFaces. CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. 3. Tied Contraction Joints: Install deformed bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment. D. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 304R requirements and recommendations for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery to the project site. F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. G. Do not add water to concrete surface during finishing operations. H. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. I. Consolidate concrete according to AC1301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations in ACI 309R. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices. J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface p�ane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surFaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surFace treatments. CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 L. Curbs/Gutters and Pans: Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified with expansion joints at intervals of approximately 100 feet and tooled contraction joints at 10-foot intervals When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. M. Walks: Minimum 4-inches thick, with expansion joints at intervals of approximately 100 feet and tooled contraction joints at intervals equal to width of walks or maximum 5- foot intervals. Tool edges to rounded profile and finish as noted herein or shown on the drawings. Contractor may utilize sawed contraction joints. Pitch walks 3/16- inches per foot for drainage unless otherwise indicated. N. Ramps: Construct ramps similar to walks. Comply with applicable ADA Handbook, ANSI A117.1, and local and State codes, ordinances, and details including maximum allowable slope not to exceed 1 foot vertical in 12 foot horizontal, with maximum rise not to exceed 30-inches between level landings. O. Steps: Minimum 6-inches thick at intersection of treads and risers, reinforced as indicated. Slope treads '/4-inches to nosing, and tool nosings to uniform '/2-inches radius. Finish as specified below. P. Paving: Minimum 6-inches thick unless otherwise indicated. Provide contraction joints at a minimum 12-feet -0-inches EWW. Provide fibermesh reinforcing. Place concrete paving over compacted subgrade as specified in Division 2 Section "Earth Moving". Provide minimum 1% slope for drainage unless otherwise indicated. Q. Driveway Approaches: Minimum 6-inches thick, unless otherwise indicated or required by local public works standards or building codes. Construct to radius of flare indicated, and taper or warp into alignment with adjacent curbs, gutters, and walks. Place approaches over compacted subgrade as specified in Division 2 section "Earth Moving." Refer to drawing and details for any reinforcing requirements. R. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver machine during operations. S. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength. T. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-11 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. U. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. V. Wet-Weather Placement: Do not begin to place concrete while rain, sleet, or snow is fa��ing unless adequate protection is provided and, when required, acceptance of protection is obtained. 3.7 FLOAT FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. B. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surFace finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. C. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surFace with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float- finished concrete surFace perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine- line texture. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow the recommendations of ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surFaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h before and during CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-12 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture- retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediate�y repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.9 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Compty with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch. 6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch. 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-13 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: l. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive- strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite strength test, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of composite strength specimens. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31 M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., provide at least two tests for every 100 cu.yd., (one set for each 50 cu. yd.). One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required. 7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete. C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner's Representative, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive- strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Owner's Representative, but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection. CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-14 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 F. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Owner's Representative. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section. B. Drill test cores where directed by Owner's Representative when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. END OF SECTION 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-15 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 32 1373— CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if provided, to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between cement concrete and buildings and structures. 3. Surface preparation including primers. 4. Joint backup material. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete pavement. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Town of Vail Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition. B. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer. C. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 1373 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for sealants. E. Warranty: As required by Division 1 — Warranty Section: Contractor agrees to repair or replace joint sealers (including labor, materials, and any necessary associated costs) which fail to perform as watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not c�early specified by submitted manufacturer's data as an inherent quality of material for exposure indicated. Provide warranty signed by Installer and Contractor. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Work under this section shall be subject to all applicable provisions of federal, state and local rules and regulations. B. Applicator: Company specializing in application of sealants with five (5) years minimum experience and be acceptable to manufacturer. Manufacturer's field representative shall visit site and make suggestions. C. Adhesion Tests: Prior to any sealant application, perform adhesion tests as directed by sealant manufacturer's technical representative. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Install sealant materials in strict accordance with all safety and weather conditions recommended by manufacturer, product literature, or Material Safety Data Sheets. Do not proceed with insta�lation of sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation. Proceed only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high-early bond strength. Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in lower third of manufacturer's recommended installation temperature range. CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 1373 - 2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.2 JOINT SEALANTS A. Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 6690 or D1190. 1. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 705.01 and 705.09 for joint and crack sealant material requirements. 2. Refer to CDOT Standard Specification, Section 412.18 for joint and crack sealant installation requirements. 2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant. D. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to contro� sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. 2.4 PRIMERS A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from manufacturers recommendations. CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 1373 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.3 JOINT DESIGN A. Sealant depth is measured at the center (thin) section of sealant bead. B. Install sealants to depths and widths as recommended by sealant manufacturer and as shown on the drawings. Also, conform to the following general limitations if not in conflict with sealant manufacturer's recommendations. 1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of joint width, but neither more than 5/8 inch deep nor less than 3/8 inch deep. 2. For normal moving joints not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but neither more than 5/8 inch deep nor less than '/4 inch deep. 3. Depth of sealant must not exceed width of joint. 4. Sealant joints shall not be less than '/4 inch in width and '/4 inch in depth. 5. Sealant joints shall not exceed 2 inches in width in a single application. 3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Preparation work shall result in clean surfaces in all areas where sealant is to be adhered. Such surfaces shall be free of any old sealant, contaminants and impurities which are deleterious to bonding or adhesion of primers or sealant. B. Clean ferrous metals of all rust, mill scale and coatings by wire brush or grinding. Any equipment used to remove rust shall be free of oil contaminants. CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 1373 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Wire brush masonry joint surFaces, then blow clean with oil free compressed air. D. Apply primer per manufacturer's recommendations. Allow primer to dry prior to applying sealant. E. Do not caulk joints until they are clean, dry, and free of dust, loose mortar, old sealant, foreign matter or other bond inhibiting materials, and in compliance with requirements of manufacturer of materials, details shown on drawings, and specific requirements of other sections of specifications. 3.5 JOINT BACKING A. Use joint backing to control depth of joint to specified thickness. B. Select joint backing size to allow for 25% compression of backing when inserted into joint. C. Where shown on drawings where depth of joint will not permit use of joint backing, or wherever recommended by sealant manufacturer, install bond-breaker tape to prevent three-sided adhesion. D. Do not leave voids or gaps between ends of joint backing units. 3.6 APPLICATION/INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANT A. Apply sealants neatly, in a good and workmanlike manner which meets following minimum requirements or standards. Specific instructions of manufacturer must also be followed. B. Apply sealant using a gun with proper size nozzles. Use sufficient pressure to fill all voids and joints solid to backup material, with complete wetting of all joint bond surfaces. C. Applied sealant shall form a full, smooth, uniform bead, free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities. D. After joint has been completely filled with sealant, neatly tool joint sealant to eliminate air pockets or voids, and to provide a smooth, slightly concave, neat appearing finish, with sealant surface slightly below adjoining surFaces. Wetting of finished surface will not be allowed. E. Where horizontal joints are located between a horizontal surFace and vertical surFace, fill joint to form a slight cove, so joint will not trap moisture and dirt. F. Protect adjacent surfaces and systems from sealant material. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 1373 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 G. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. H. Tooling of Non-Sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. I. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. J. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sea�ants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 3.9 JOB SITE CLEAN-UP A. Sealant applicator must remove all excess materials from job site. B. Leave all surrounding areas where joint sealant has been applied free of excess sealant, debris and foreign substances. END OF SECTION 32 1373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 1373 - 6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 321400 - UNIT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete pavers set in aggregate setting beds. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for cast-in-place concrete curbs and gutters serving as edge restraints for unit pavers. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates. B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Pavers. C. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, according to ASTM C 136. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit paver indicated. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For unit pavers. Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements, including compliance with standards. Provide for each type and size of unit. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests perFormed by a qualified testing agency, for unit pavers, indicating compliance with requirements. UNIT PAVING 321400 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. For solid interlocking paving units, include test data for freezing and thawing according to ASTM C 67. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from single source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 2.2 CONCRETE PAVERS A. Concrete Pavers: Solid paving units made from normal-weight concrete with a compressive strength not less than 10,000 psi, water absorption not more than 5 percent according to ASTM C 140, and no breakage and not more than 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance according to ASTM C 67. 1. Thickness: 2-3/8 inches. 2. Face Size and Shape: 7 7/8" x 3 5/8". 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. UNIT PAVING 321400 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.3 CURBS AND EDGE RESTRAINTS A. Job-Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mixed concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength as indicated on drawings. 2.4 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with [ASTM D 448 for Size No. 57] [ASTM D 2940/D 2940M, subbase material] [requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving"for subbase material]. B. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with [ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8] [ASTM D 2940/D 2940M, base material] [requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving"for base course]. C. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33/C 33M for fine aggregate. D. Stone Screenings for Leveling Course: Sound stone screenings complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 10. E. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve. 1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color. F. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications; made from polyolefins or polyesters, with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2, AASHTO M 288. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 3. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure, ASTM D 4355. G. Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile fabric, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2, AASHTO M 288. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 3. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure, ASTM D 4355. H. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered with the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. UNIT PAVING 321400 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive unit paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Proof-roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase and base course for unit pavers. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work. B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable. 1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used. D. Joint Pattern: Running bond. E. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving. F. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers. 1. Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3.4 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 laboratory density. B. Proof-roll prepared subgrade to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. UNIT PAVING 321400 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Place aggregate subbase and base, compact by tamping with plate vibrator, and screed to depth indicated. D. Place drainage geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches. E. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches, taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and uniform until pavers are set and compacted. F. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds. G. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch and a maximum of 1/8 inch, being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers. 1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars on sides of each unit. H. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-Ibf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Use vibrator with neoprene mat on face of plate or other means as needed to prevent cracking and chipping of pavers. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. I. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling. J. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints. K. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later. 3.5 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with grout. Point joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for sealant application. C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean. 1. Remove temporary protective coating as recommended by coating manufacturer and as acceptable to paver and grout manufacturers. 2. Do not allow protective coating to enter floor drains. Trap, collect, and remove coating material. UNIT PAVING 321400 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 END OF SECTION 321400 UNIT PAVING 321400 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 32 1723 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 specification. Sections apply if provided, to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: Furnish and install all painted lines, directional arrows, handicapped symbols, or similar markings on paved surfaces, as shown on the drawings or specified herein, as required by jurisdiction having authority, and as required to complete the work. B. Related Work: 1. Division 32 Section "Asphaltic Paving"for materials, installation and minimum requirements. 2. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving"for materials, installation and minimum requirements. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comp�y with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are described herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. B. Town of Vail Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, latest edition. C. Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition. D. "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" latest edition. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's published descriptive literature and complete specifications for products specified herein. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Pavement marking applicator shall be regularly engaged in this type of work, and shall provide adequate, experienced manpower and proper equipment to complete the work. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions of Colorado State Department of Highways Specification Sections 627, 708, and 713. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers, with labels intact and legible. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply pavement marking when ambient air and pavement surface temperature is below 40°F for paint and below 50°F for epoxy and thermoplastic marking materials, or when moisture in any form is present on the pavement surFace. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Traffic Marking Paint: Acrylic Waterborne Paint or Low Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) solvent base paint, lead and chromate free, ready-mixed, cold-applied traffic marking paint complying with CDOT specification table 708-1, white or yellow color as PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 1723-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 designated on the plans for striping and lane markings, white and blue at international handicapped parking symbols. Acceptable products include Devoe Exterior"Safety Line" or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work of this Section will be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work implies acceptance of all areas and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Allow fresh pavement surfaces to weather at least 30 days prior to application of traffic marking paint. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Traffic Marking Paint: Unless otherwise indicated, apply traffic marking paint in nominal 4-inches wide stripes at the rate of 100 to 110 sf/gal. B. Patterns and Symbols: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, apply traffic markings in nominal 4-inches wide stripes with clear and sharp dimensions. See drawings for striping patterns, directional arrows and symbols. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, use yellow markings at lane striping and directional symbols, white markings at parking striping and white and blue markings at international handicapped symbols. 3. Comply with ANSI 117.1 and ADA requirements for graphic symbols, stall widths, and access aisles at handicapped parking spaces. Provide approved templates for symbols and directional arrows. END OF SECTION 32 1723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 1723-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 31 1000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if provided, to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, grass, and other vegetation to remain or as designated by Owner's Representative in pre- construction conference. 2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, grass, and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above-and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. 7. Removing existing fill. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 2. Division 31 Section "Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control" for storm water erosion and sediment mitigation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friab�e, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. SITE CLEARING 31 1000-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain on Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. B. Record drawings, identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. Information required may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as directed by Owner's Representative prior to start of construction. Contractor to comply with requirements, which may also be included in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner's Representative and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for perForming indicated removal and alteration work on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner's Representative before award of Contract. Authority and permits for performing indicated removal and alteration work on adjacent rights-of-way shall be obtained by Contractor. 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed in writing by Owner's Representative. C. Protect improvements on adjacent and Owner's property. D. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. SITE CLEARING 31 1000-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 E. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. F. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. G. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to parties having jurisdiction. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving," (PART 2— PRODUCTS). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks, survey control points, monuments, property line pins and other reference points from disturbance during construction. If disturbed or destroyed, restore or replace by a registered Colorado Professional Land Surveyor at no cost to Owner. B. Provide erosion control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust from leaving project site. C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore or replace damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner's Representative. 3.2 TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash. B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. SITE CLEARING 31 1000-3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying and backfill with soil as soon as possible. D. Repair or rep�ace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Owner's Representative. 1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by the qualified arborist. 3.3 UTILITIES A. Contractor will locate, identify, arrange for disconnect and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed before site clearing. 1. Verify that utilities indicated as abandoned have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing. 2. Arrange with utility companies having jurisdiction to shut off indicated utilities. B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by anyone unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner's Representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's Representative's written permission. C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. D. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 2 Sections covering site utilities. Removal of underground utilities may also be included in Division 15 Mechanical or Division 16 Electrical Sections. E. After removal of underground utilities, as indicated, properly cap and/or plug existing lines to remain in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. SITE CLEARING 31 1000-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and completely remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. 5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earth moving is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered or as determined by Geotechnical Engineer in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading a thicker layer of topsoil. 3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above and below grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated on plans. SITE CLEARING 31 1000-5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw- cut faces vertically. 2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion. C. Remove existing fill. Refer to Geotechnical Investigation and/or drawings for information regarding suitability for re-use and estimates of location/extent of existing fill. 3.7 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. END OF SECTION 31 1000 SITE CLEARING 31 1000-6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 328400 - PLANTING IRRIGATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED - Work of this Section generally includes provisions for the installa- tion of an underground landscape irrigation system including the following: A. Static pressure verification and coordination of irrigation system installation with landscape material installation. B. Trenching, stockpiling excavation materials, refilling and compacting trenches. C. Complete irrigation system including but not limited to piping, water meters, back- flow preventer assemblies, valves, fittings, heads, controllers and wiring, and fi- nal adjustments to insure complete coverage. D. Water connections. E. Replacement of unsatisfactory materials. F. Clean-up, Consultant Reviews, and Project Acceptance. G. Tests. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Examine all sections related to project work. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 - General requirements as well as provisions of all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations. B. Conform to requirements of reference information listed below except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified in Contract Documents. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Specifications and Test Methods specifically referenced in this Section. 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - UL Wires and Cables. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications - Installer shall have had considerable experience and demonstrate ability in the installation of irrigation system(s) of specific type(s) in a neat orderly, and responsible manner in accordance with recognized standards of workmanship. To demonstrate ability and experience necessary for this Pro- ject, submit if requested by Owner, prior to contract award the following: 1. List of 3 projects completed in the last 2 years of similar complexity to this Project. Description of projects shall include: a. Name of project. b. Location. c. Owner. d. Brief description of work and project budget. B. Special Requirements: 1. Work involving substantial plumbing for installation of copper piping, backflow preventer(s), and related work shall be executed by licensed and bonded plumber(s). Secure a permit at least 48 hours prior to start of installation. 2. Tolerances - Specified depths of mains and laterals and pitch of pipes are minimums. Settlement of trenches is cause for removal of finish grade treatment, refilling, compaction, and repair of finish grade treatment. 3. Coordination with Other Contractors - Protect, maintain, and coordinate Work with Work under other Section. 4. Damage To Other Improvements - Contractor shall replace or repair damage to grading, soil preparation, seeding, sodding, or planting done under other Sections during Work associated with installation of irrigation PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 system at no additional cost to Owner. C. Pre-Construction Conference - Contractor shall schedule and conduct a confer- ence to review in detail quality control and construction requirements for equip- ment, materials, and systems used to perform the Work. Conference shall be scheduled not less than 10 days prior to commencement of Work. All parties re- quired to be in attendance shall be notified no later than 7 days prior to date of conference. Contractor shall notify qualified representatives of each party con- cerned with that portion of Work to attend conference, including but not limited to Architect, Consultant, Contractor's Superintendent, and Installer. 1. Minutes of conference shall be recorded and distributed by Contractor to all parties in attendance within five days of conference. 1.05 SUBMITTALS - Prepare and make submittals in accordance with conditions of the Con- tract. A. Materials List - Submit three copies of a complete materials list indicating manu- facturer, model number, and description of all materials and equipment to be used. Show appropriate dimensions and adequate detail to accurately portray in- tent of construction. B. Record Drawings (As-Builts): 1. At onset of irrigation installation secure Autocadd files of original irrigation de- sign from Owner, IF THEY EXIST (Contractor responsible for verification with Owner). At the end of every day, revise as-built prints for work accomp�ished that day in red ink. As-built field prints shall be brought up-to-date at the close of the working day every Friday by a qualified draftsperson. A print of record plan(s) shall be available at Project Site. Indicate zoning changes on weekly as-built drawings. Indicate non-pressure piping changes on as-builds. Upon completion of Project, submit for review, prior to final acceptance, final set of as-built mylars and an Autocadd disk copy. Dimensions, from two permanent points of reference (building corners, sidewalk, road intersections or permanent structures), location of following items: a. Connection to existing water lines. b. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimension maximum 100 feet along routing). c. Sprinkler control valves. d. Quick coupling valves. e. Manual drains and stop and waste valves. f. Drip line blow-out stubs. g. Control wire routing if not with pressure mainline. h. Gate valves. i. Control wire and data cable splices j. Water meters k. Locations of all sleeving including size, quantity and depth of new sleeving I. Flow sensors m. Master valves 2. Owner's Representative will not certify any pay request submitted by the Contractor if the as-built drawings are not current, and processing of pay request will not occur until as-builts are up-dated. C. Operation Instructions - Submit 3 written operating instructions including winteri- zation procedures and start-up, with cut sheets of products, and coordinate con- troller/watering operation instruction with Owner maintenance personnel. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Controller Charts: a. Do not prepare charts until Consultant has reviewed record (as- built) drawings. b. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller installed. 1) Chart may be reproduction of record drawing, if scale per- mits fitting of controller door. If photo reduction prints are required, keep reduction to maximum size possible to re- tain full legibility. 2) Chart shall be blueline print of actual "as-built" system, showing area covered by that controller. c. Identify area of coverage of each remote control valve, using a distinctly different pastel color drawing over entire area of cover- age. d. Following review of charts by Consultant, they shall be hermetical- ly sealed between two layers of 20-mm thick plastic sheet e. Charts shall be completed and reviewed prior to final review of ir- rigation system. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING - Deliver, unload, store, and handle materi- als, packaging, bundling, products in dry, weatherproof, condition in manner to prevent damage, breakage, deterioration, intrusion, ignition, and vandalism. Deliver in original unopened packaging containers prominently displaying manufacturer's name, volume, quantity, contents, instructions, and conformance to local, state, and federal law. Re- move and replace cracked, broken, or contaminated items or elements prematurely ex- posed to moisture, inc�ement weather, snow, ice, temperature extremes, fire, or jobsite damage. A. Handling of PVC Pipe - Exercise care in handling, loading and storing, of PVC pipe. All PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle which allows length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external loads. All sections of pipe that have been dented or damaged shall be discarded, and if in- stalled, shall be replaced with new piping. 1.07 JOBSITE CONDITIONS: A. Protection of Property: 1. Preserve and protect all trees, plants, monuments, structures, and paved areas from damage due to Work of this Section. In the event damage does occur, all damage to inanimate items shall be completely repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner, and all injury to living plants shall be repaired by Owner. All costs of such repairs shall be charged to and paid by Contractor. 2. Protect buildings, walks, walls, and other property from damage. Flare and barricade open ditches. Damage caused to asphalt, concrete, or oth- er building material surFaces shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. Restore disturbed areas to original condition. B. Existing Trees: 1. All trenching or other Work under limb spread of any and all evergreens or low branching deciduous material shall be done by hand or by other methods so as to prevent damage to limbs or branches. 2. Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees use all possi- ble care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation, in areas where 2 inch and larger roots occur, shall be done by hand. Roots 2 inch- es or larger in diameter, except directly in the path of pipe of conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 scarring or excessive drying. Where a trenching machine is operated close to trees having roots smaller than 2 inches in diameter, wall of trench adjacent to tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through roots. Trenches adjacent to trees shall be closed within 24 hours, and when this is not possible, side of trench adjacent to tree shall be kept shaded with moistened burlap or canvas. C. Protection and Repair of Underground Lines: 1. Request proper utility company to stake exact location (including depth) of all underground electric, gas, or telephone lines. Take whatever pre- cautions are necessary to protect these underground lines from damage. If damage does occur, Utility Owner shall repair all damage. Contractor shall pay all costs of such repairs unless other arrangements have been made. 2. Request Owner, in writing, to locate all private utilities (i.e., electrical ser- vice to outside lighting) before proceeding with excavation. If, after such request and necessary staking, private utilities that were not staked are encountered and damaged by Installer, Owner shall repair them at no cost to Installer. If Contractor damages staked or located utilities, they shall be repaired by Utility Owner at Contractor's expense unless other ar- rangements have been made. D. Replacement of Paving and Curbs - Where trenches and lines cross existing roadways, paths, curbing, etc., damage to these shall be kept to a minimum and shall be restored to original condition. 1.08 WARRANTY/GUARANTY: - Manufacturer shall warrant materials against defects for a period of two years from date of Substantial Completion. Installer(s) shall guaranty workmanship for similar period. A. Settling of backfilled trenches that may occur during guaranty period shall be re- paired at no expense to Owner, including complete restoration of damaged prop- e rty. B. Expenses due to vandalism before substantial completion shall be borne by Con- tractor. C. Owner will maintain turf and planting areas during warranty period, so as not to hamper proper operation of irrigation system. 1.09 MAINTENANCE: A. Furnish the following maintenance items to Owner prior to final Acceptance: 1. Two Sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling, and ad- justing each type of sprinkler head and valve supplied on this Project. 2. One eight foot valve key for operation of stop and waste valve. 2. Two six foot valve keys for operation of gate valves. 3. Two keys for each automatic controller. 4. Two quick coupler keys and two matching hose swivels for each type of quick coupling valve installed. 5. Two aluminum drain valve keys of sufficient length for operation of drain valves. 6. One hand-held Rainmaster Promax maintenance radio kit (complete) in- clude transmitter, receiver, cables, etc, or similar comparable equipment depending on the system installed. B. Winterization - include cost in bid for winterizing complete system at conclusion of sprinkling season (in which system received final acceptance) within 3 days notification by the Owner. System shall be voided of water using compressed air or similar method reviewed by Consultant. Reopen, operate, and adjust system PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 malfunctions accordingly during April of following season within 3 days of notifi- cation by Owner. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.0 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A) Comply with requirements in the piping schedule for applications of pipe, tube, and fit- ting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. B) Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball- and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends. C) PE Pipe with Controlled ID: ASTM F 771, PE 3408 compound; SIDR 11.5. 1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609, nylon or propylene plastic with barbed ends. Include bands or other fasteners. D) PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 40. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466, Schedule 40. 2. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464, Schedule 80. 3. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket ends. E) PVC Pipe, Pressure Rated: ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467, Schedule 40. 2. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket or threaded ends. 2.1 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A) Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B) Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise in- dicated. C) Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. D) Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux ac- cording to ASTM B 813. E) Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. F) Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING A) PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 40. B) PVC Pipe, Pressure Rated: ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21. 2.3 MANUAL VALVES A) Curb Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. 2. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C800. b. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 c. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50) Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Material: Brass or bronze with ball or ground-key plug. e. End Connections: Matching piping. f.Stem: With wide-tee head. B) Curb-Valve Casing: 1. Standard: Similar to AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve casings. 2. Top Section: Telescoping, of length required for depth of burial of curb valve. 3. Barrel: Approximately 3-inch (75-mm) diameter. 4. Plug: With lettering "WATER." 5. Bottom Section: With base of size to fit over valve. 6. Base Support: Concrete collar. C) Shutoff Rods for Curb-Valve Casings: Furnish one steel tee-handle shutoff rod with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve for Project. D) Brass Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Legend Valve. b. NIBCOINC. c. Red-White Valve Corporation. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f.Ends: Threaded or solder joint if indicated. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full. E) Bronze Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Legend Valve. b. NIBCOINC. c. Red-White Valve Corporation. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. F) Plastic Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. KBI (King Bros. Industries). b. Legend Valve. c. NIBCOINC. d. Spears Manufacturing Company. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-122. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. Body Material: PVC. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 d. Type: Union. e. End Connections: Socket or threaded. f.Port: Full. G) Bronze Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. NIBCOINC. b. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. Class: 125. c. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). d. Body Material: ASTM B 62 bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. e. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. f.Stem: Bronze, nonrising. g. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. h. Packing: Asbestos free. i. Hand wheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. H) Iron Gate Valves, Resilient Seated: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. b. NIBCOINC. c. Danfoss FlowMatic 2. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C509. OR AWWA C515 b. Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa) minimum. c. Body Material: Ductile or gray iron with bronze trim. d. End Connections: Mechanical joint or push-on joint. e. Interior Coating: Comply with AWWA C550. f.Body Design: Nonrising stem. g. Operator: Stem nut. h. Disc: Solid wedge with resilient coating. I) Iron Gate Valve Casings: 1. Standard: AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve casings. 2. Top Section: Adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve. 3. Barrel: Approximately 5-inch (125-mm) diameter. 4. Plug: With lettering "WATER." 5. Bottom Section: With base of size to fit over valve. 6. Base Support: Concrete collar. J) Operating Wrenches for Iron Gate Valve Casings: Furnish one steel tee-handle oper- ating wrench with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut for Project. K) Iron Gate Valves, NRS: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Legend Valve. b. NIBCOINC. c. Red-White Valve Corporation. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Danfoss FlowMatic PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: All bronze. f.Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. 3. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: All bronze. f.Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. 2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTER A) Backflow Requirements, inspections and Tests: Backflow prevention devices shall be selected from a list of approved devices set forth by the State of Colorado and Town of Vail. Reduced Pressure Assemblies (RP) will be the only accepted styles of back- flow prevention devices. This section shall be approved by the local water purveyor prior to installation. B) Backflow Prevention Location: Backflow is an existing installation within the "Ticket Sales Office" mechanical room. Any modification to existing installation to be approved by owner's representative prior to work being executed. C) Up to 2"taps shall be a FEBCO 825 Series, reduced pressure backflow preventer. It will be sized in accordance with manufacture's recommended velocities, but no veloci- ties shall exceed the normal industry practice of 7.5 feet per second through the back- f►ow device. For 3" Taps and larger the backflow device shall be a FEBCO 880V re- duced pressure backflow preventer. It will be sized according to manufacturer's rec- ommend velocities, but no velocities shall exceed normal industry practice of 7.5 feet per second through device. 2.5 CHECK VALVES A) Brass Spring Check: 1. Manufacturers: a. Simmons Manufacturing 2. Description: a. Lead free. b. Silicon bronze cast body. c. Silicon bronze cast poppet. d. Sizes from 1" to 6" FPT. e. Working pressure—400 PSI. f.Buna-N O-ring, stainless steel spring washer and lock nut. B) PVC Spring Check: 1. Manufacturers: a. Matco-Norca, La Palma, CA. b. NDS Flow Control. 2. Description: a. Body, spigot, connector seat, cup— PVC. b. Seal, EPDM. c. Spring, stainless steel adjustable from 2-5 Ibs. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 d. Working pressure— 200 PSI. e. Stress up to 2". 2.6 MASTER CONTROL VALVES: A) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Rain Bird Corporation. B) Description: 1. The electric remote control valve shall be a normally closed 24 VAC 50/60 Hz (cycle/sec) solenoid actuated globe/angle pattern design having a flow rate of 60- 300 GPM's with a pressure loss not to exceed 4.9 PSI. The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 200 psi (13,8 Bars). 2. The valve body and bonnet shall be a combination of heavy cast red brass body and heavy-duty, glass-filled UV-resistant nylon bonnet and have stainless steel bolts. The diaphragm shall be of nylon reinforced nitrile rubber. 3. The valve shall have both internal and external manual open/close control (inter- nal and external bleed) to manually open and close the valve without electrically energizing the solenoid. The valve's internal bleed shall prevent flooding of the valve box. 4. The solenoid shall require 24 VAC 50/60 Hz power and open with 19.6 VAC min- imum at 200 psi (13,8 Bars). At 24 VAC, average inrush current shall not exceed 0.41 amps. Average holding current shall not exceed 0.28 amps. 5. The valve shall have a brass flow control stem for accurate manual regulation and/or shut-off of outlet flow. The valve must open or close in less than 1 minute at 200 psi (13,8 Bars) and less than 30 seconds at 20 psi (1,4 Bars). 6. The BPES valve shall have a self-cleaning stainless steel screen designed for use in dirty water applications. All BPES valves include scrubber feature. 7. The valve construction shall be such as to provide for all internal parts to be re- movable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. C) Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Size: See plans. 2. Design Flow Rate: See plans. 3. Design Inlet Pressure: See plans. 4. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: See plans. 2.7 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES A) Bronze, Automatic Control Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Rain Bird Corporation. b. Netafim USA. 2. Description: Cast-bronze body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual- flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid. B) Plastic, Automatic Control Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Rain Bird Corporation. 2. Description: Molded-plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual- flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid. 2.8 TRANSITION FITTINGS A) General Requirements: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. B) Transition Couplings: PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Smith-Blair, Inc; a Sensus company. b. Viking Johnson. 2. Description: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling for underground pressure piping. C) Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Spears Manufacturing Company. 2. Description: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-socket or threaded end. D) Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. NIBCOINC. b. Spears Manufacturing Company. 2. Description: MSS SP-107, PVC four-part union. Include one brass threaded end, one solvent-cement-joint plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES A) Pressure Gauges: ASME B40.1. Include 4-1/2-inch- (115-mm-) diameter dial, dial range of two times system operating pressure, and bottom outlet. 2.10 SPRINKLERS A) General Requirements: Designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indi- cated at available water pressure. B) Plastic, Pop-up, Gear-Drive Rotary Sprinklers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Rain Bird Corporation. 2. Description: a. Body Material: ABS. b. Nozzle: ABS. c. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel. d. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant. 3. Capacities and Characteristics: a. Flow: See plans. b. Pop-up Height: See plans. c. Arc: See plans. d. Radius: See plans. e. Inlet: See plans. C) Plastic, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Rain Bird Corporation. 2. Description: a. Body Material: ABS. b. Nozzle: ABS. c. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel. d. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant. e. Pattern: Fixed, with flow adjustment. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Capacities and Characteristics: a. Nozzle: ABS. See plans. b. Flow: See plans. c. Pop-up Height: See plans. d. Arc: See plans. e. Radius: See plans. f.lnlet: See plans. D) Plastic Shrub Sprinklers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Rain Bird -1400 series bubblers. 2. Description: a. Body Material: ABS or other plastic. b. Pattern: Fixed flow. 3. Capacities and Characteristics: a. Configuration: See plans. b. Flow: See plans. c. Arc: See plans. d. Radius: See plans. e. Mounting Height: See plans. f.lnlet: See plans. 2.11 SWING JOINTS A) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Rain Bird Corporation. 2. Lasco Fittings, Inc. 3. Spears Manufacturing B) Description: Factory-fabricated, pressure rated to 315 PSI at 73 degrees F when test- ed in accordance with ASTM D3139. Rigid PVC construction, ASTM D1784, NTP threads per ASTM D2464 and ASTM D2466. Each orating joint shall be sealed with a Buna rubber O-ring installed in pre-compressed sealing groove free of parting lines to prevent leakage. 2.12 QUICK COUPLERS A) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Rain Bird Corporation. B) Description: Factory-fabricated, bronze or brass, two-piece assembly. Include cou- pler water-seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, rubber- covered cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key. 1. Locking-Top Option: Vandal-resistant locking feature. Include one matching key. 2.13 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTIES A) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Agrifim. 2. Maxijet, Inc. 3. Netafim USA. 4. Rain Bird Corporation. B) Freestanding Emitters: Device to deliver water at approximately 20 psig (138 kPa). 1. Body Material: PE or vinyl, with flow control. 2. Riser to Emitter: PE or PVC flexible tubing. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 11 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Capacities and Characteristics: a. Flow: See plans. b. Tubing: PE or PVC: See plans. c. Mounting Height: See plans. C) Drip Tubes with Direct-Attached Emitters: 1. Tubing: Flexible PE or PVC with plugged end. 2. Emitters: Devices to deliver water at approximately 20 psig (138 kPa). a. Body Material: PE or vinyl, with flow control. b. Mounting: Inserted into tubing at set intervals. 3. Capacities and Characteristics: a. Tubing Size: See plans. b. Length: See plans. c. Emitter Spacing: See plans. d. Emitter Flow: See plans. D) Drip Tubes with Remote Discharge: 1. Tubing: Flexible PE or PVC with plugged end. 2. Emitters: Devices to deliver water at approximately 20 psig (138 kPa). a. Body Material: PE or vinyl, with flow control. b. Mounting: Inserted into tubing at set intervals. 3. Capacities and Characteristics: a. Tubing Size: See plans. b. Length: See plans. c. Emitter Spacing: See plans. d. Emitter Flow: See plans. e. Branch Tubing Size: See plans. f.Branch Tubing Length: See plans. E) Off-Ground Supports: Plastic stakes. F) Application Pressure Regulators: Brass or plastic housing, NPS 3/4 (DN 20), with cor- rosion-resistant internal parts; capable of controlling outlet pressure to approximately 20 psig (138 kPa). G) Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; of size and capacity required for devices downstream from unit. H) Air Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts. I)Vacuum Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts. 2.14 CONTROLLERS A. Description: The Rain BirdT"' PAR+ESD Satellite Controller with LINK 450-470MHz UHF Radio communication B. The Rain BirdT"' PAR+ESD Satellite Controller specifications include but are not limited to: 1. Microprocessor-based, solid-state controllers. 2. Controller shall be capable of activating up to 72 individual stations. 3. Controller shall be a stand-alone controller, or as a satellite controller operated under Rain Bird central control. 4. Controller shall be a stand-alone controller with the capability of 72 addresses. 5. Controller shall have the capability of adding a central control Interface Board, C. Controller shall be housed in a sturdy, heavy duty temperature and chemical resistant, injection-molded high-impact resistant, plastic pedestal enclosure. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 12 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. The pedestal enclosure shall be 34-3/4" (883mm) tall, 17" (432mm) wide and 21" (533mm) deep. E. The enclosure shall be complete with mounting template and hardware for bolting to a poured concrete base. F. The top cover shall have a key-operated lock. G. The plastic enclosure shall have a front and a back removable panel for convenient access to both compartments of the pedestal for installation. The pedestal enclosure shall be gray in color H. Controller shall be UL & C-UL listed, CE approved and C-Tick compliant I. Controller units shall be capable of operating under the following power requirements 50/60 Hz frequency: J. 115 VAC Nominal [98-132 VAC], K. 220 VAC Nominal [208-232 VAC] L. 240 VAC Nominal [225-255 VAC] M. The transformer shall be capable of stepping down 115/220/240 VAC input power to 26.5 VAC output power for the operation of solenoid remote control valves and/or valve-in-head sprinklers. N. The transformer shall be rated at 5.25 AMP capacity for operating a maximum of sixteen (16) standard Rain Bird solenoids at one time at 60 Hz, or twelve (12) standard Rain Bird solenoids at one time at 50 Hz. O. Transformer connector shall have two "pigtails" pre-installed into the power connector to facilitate wiring to primary power. P. For operation at 120 VAC, one wire shall be plugged into the common terminal and the other into the neutral terminal. Q. For 220/240 VAC operation, these same positions correspond to the two hot terminals. R. The mounting bracket shall be capable accommodating conduit diameters of up to one inch. S. Each unit shall have a circuit breaker that can be reset, rated 5.25 AMPS. T. All controllers shall be grounded to 10 OHM or less. U. The unit shall use relays and metal oxide varistor (MOV) surge arrestors to electrically isolate the circuitry from field noise, while providing a physical gap to protect against surge damage from coming in on the field wiring. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 13 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 V. The panel which houses the Main Logic Board shall have a detachable harness that connects to the Power Interconnect Board in the pedestal base, allowing for quick removal of the panel assembly. W. The controller shall use EPROM chips assembled on a carrier socketed on the printed circuit boards to allow easy upgrade of the controller software. X. The OSM-S shall be installed in the pedestal base with harnesses that daisy chain the OSM-S together. Y. The harnesses shall allow for easy field upgrades to increase total capacity up to 72 stations. The OSM-S shall have standard station switches with AUTO, OFF and ON positions. Z. Plastic pedestal models shall have up to three 24-station terminal boards available to facilitate field wire installation. AA. Each board in turn shall have its own preinstalled 18-gauge wire harness, with the other ends of the harnesses prewired in groups of eight into connectors for quick and simple connection to the OSM-S. BB. The panel assembly of the controller shall have a sealed and sloped keypad and display to keep moisture and contaminants away from the critical electronic components of the unit. CC. A clear, 32-character (two lines of 16 characters each) alphanumeric crystal display shall be used to show the operational information and diagnostic data of the controller in an easy to read manner. DD. Indicating LEDs shall give a visual indication of the active schedules and the central control status. EE. The control panel shall have 20 large, raised buttons with clear, descriptive icons and English labeling to facilitate local programming. FF. The controller shall have eight (8) user-selected languages: English, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Portuguese, Spanish and Dutch. GG. A language display shall act as a prompt. HH. In stand-alone mode, the controller units shall have six (6) automatic and two (2) multi- manual schedules available. II. Each of the independent schedules shall have the capability of up to 12 start times per day. JJ. Schedules with overlapped start times shall automatically "stack". KK. Water budgeting for each independent schedule shall be user-selectable from 0 to 200% in 10% increments, to allow automatic changes to operating times of stations within the schedule without separately reprogramming each station. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 14 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 LL. Each individual station shall allow for the setting of operation times from one (1) minute to 120 minutes maximum time, in one (1) minute increments. MM. The CONTROL mode shall provide for four (4) controller control modes: NN. "OFF" - for rain shut-down 00. "MANUAL" - for manual starts only to operate PP. "LOCAL" -to operate the controller in stand-alone mode only QQ. "MAXI" - for central control operation RR. MAXI shall be selected to allow the PAR+ES controller to respond to the Rain Bird central computer program. SS. This feature will only be active if the Maxi Interface Board is installed. Under central control, the controller shall ignore any of its own individual LOCAL programming unless a loss of control communication from the central is detected. TT. Under LOCAL operation the controller shall be programmed for its desired operation at the controller itself. UU. In the MANUAL mode, the controller shall be capable of manual operation only with no LOCAL or Maxi (central control) schedules capable of operating. VV. Under the OFF "rain shut-down" condition, scheduled irrigation activity will not be initiated at the controller. 6. The Controller shall be capable of multi-station operation, simultaneously operat- ing up to six (6) automatic schedules with a limit of twelve solenoids (at 50Hz) or sixteen solenoids (at 60 Hz) operating at one time. a. Multi-station programming shall be accomplished by having the capability to assign any station to one of six (6) different schedules. b. The controller shall have the capability to operate one station from each of these six (6) schedules simultaneously. c. All stations within a given schedule shall line up and operate in sequence one after the other. Any given station may be assigned to more than one schedule. d. The controller shall be capable of operating two (2) multi-manual programs, M1 and M2 7. Under central control operation, all station timing (for the 16-72 individual stations) of the controller unit shall be done from the central control unit and NOT accord- ing to the LOCAL schedules that may be programmed at the controller itself. a. A controller with more than 24 stations shall be assigned to two (2) (25 to 48 stations) or three (3) (49 to 72 stations) different central control chan- nels. b. When operating in central control mode, the programming on the controller unit itself shall be functional only in case of an emergency, should the communication link between the controller and the central be lost. c. The change over from "central control" MAXI mode to the "stand-by" LOCAL program shall take place automatically when communication is lost PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 15 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 between the central and the satellite. It will not require a trip to the field to set each controller unit to "stand-by" LOCAL mode of operation. 8. The controller, when operated by the central control, shall be capable of RANDOM ACCESS or operation of the individual stations and is not required to be operated in numerical sequence. a. Any of the stations may be repeated anywhere within the schedule's cycle of operation, as often as desired and for a different amount of time on each repeat. b. It also shall be possible to place any individual station of a controller in as many different schedules as may be desired. c. There will be no limit or restriction as to the number of individual scheduled cyc�es a given station may be scheduled in at any time. 9. The built-in, back-up program and nonvolatile memory shall maintain schedules and time-of-day during a power outage for up to 10 years. WW. The controller shall be a two-wire path decoder based control system. XX. Output power for the decoders shall be adjustable from the controller YY. Inrush and holding current values shall be adjustable from the controller. ZZ. Central Control Interface-MIM-LINK AAA. The interface shall be a Rain BirdT"" "MIM-LINK" interface with all solid-state electronic circuitry and two-way 450-470MHz UHF radio frequency receiver. BBB. It shall provide the necessary interface between the computer and the LINK field satellite controllers. CCC.The interface shall provide true two-way radio communication from the computer out to the LINK field satellite controllers and "feedback" radio communication from the LINK field satellite controllers to the computer. DDD. Each interface shall be capable of controlling up to 112 LINK channels within a maximum of four (4) groups. EEE. Status lights shall indicate activity on the various groups as to LINK satellites being operated and individual stations in operation on each of these satellites. FFF. A memory switch shall provide for visual past performance operation in the field GGG.The MIM-LINK interface shall have the capability of manually operating any stations of any satellites directly from the MIM-LINK. HHH.The MIM-LINK interface shall be complete with 117/220 VAC power supply cord and an RS-232-C communication cable to be connected between the interFace and the serial port of the computer. III. The MIM unit shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with rust preventative plating and a "baked-on" enamel finish. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 16 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 JJJ. The unit shall be mounted near the central computer. KKK. The MIM_LINK shall have a power supply fuse. LLL. The model, location and number of PAR+ES controllers shall be as shown on the drawings or as instructed and shall be as manufactured and furnished by Rain Bird Corporation, Azusa, California, 91702, U.S.A. MMM. Irrigation decoder specifications include but are not limited to: NNN.The decoder addresses shall be pre-coded to eliminate confusion associated with user-defined decoder addressing. OOO.The decoders shall be fully encapsulated creating a completely waterproof seal. PPP. The field decoder shall be black in color for North America and black outside of North America. QQQ.The line surge protector decoder shall be yellow in color. RRR.The sensor decoder shall be green in color. SSS. The decoders mounting shall be recommend to be placed in a valve box but shall be direct burial capable. TTT. The decoder electrical input shall be: UUU. Nominal Voltage: 34 Vpp (24V AC)from two wire line VVV. Minimum Voltage: 21 Vpp (15V AC) WWW. Maximum Voltage: 36 Vpp (25V AC) XXX. The maximum 14 gauge cable run shall be: YYY. Star: 2.4 miles Maximum Critieal Path Lengths far 2-Wire Paths Max.Length For Critical Path oh�,s pe��aoa��r _ Nora��r�al �hr�s pe�Km(per �t�r L4op 1Nire Size cor�du�t�sr}MiCes Km Miles Krn � �VVile� �.. 2.5 mm� 7.50hms1'Km 3.0� 1.8� 1�,�i[� 7.4b 14 AWG 2.58 4hm�lTfl�i�' I 2.66 � 1.65 I 1fl.�3 6.61 12 AW� 1.5��hmslT f��' 4.23 � 2.G3 16.93 1 Q.S� ZZZ. Loop: 9.6 miles AAAA. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 17 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 BBBB. The decoder/solenoid wires shall have a maximum electrical resistance of 3 ohms. CCCC. The maximum decoder/solenoid 14 gauge cable run shall be a maximum of 456 feet. DDDD. Wiring for the decoders shall be a Maxi-CableT"' (double jacketed) wire. EEEE. The environment shall be: FFFF. Working Range: 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C) GGGG. Storage Range: -4° to 158° F (-20° to 70° C) HHHH. Humidity: 100% IIII. Shall have five different field decoder options to allow the user to choose the precise amount of landscape irrigation control needed. JJJJ. Rain BirdT"" FD101Go1f field decoder interfacing signal line and valve. KKKK. Rain BirdT"' FD102Go1f field decoder interfacing signal line and valve or pair of valves. LLLL.Rain BirdT"' FD202Go1f field decoder interfacing signal line and 2 valves or 2 pair of valves. MMMM. Rain BirdT"' FD401Go1f field decoder interfacing signal line and up to 4 individual valves. NNNN. Rain BirdT"" FD601 Golf field decoder interfacing signal line and up to 6 individual valves. 0000. Rain BirdT"" FD101Go1f field decoder interfacing signal line and valve specifications include but are not limited to: PPPP. Power Draw: 0.5mA (idle), 18 mA (per active solenoid) QQQQ. Dimensions: Length: 2.77 in. (70 mm), Diameter 1.5 in. (40 mm) RRRR. Solenoids: 1 with individual control SSSS. Wires: Blue to cable, white to solenoid TTTT. Surge protection shall be required every 500 ft. UUUU. The field decoder shall be gray in color for North America and black outside of North America. VVW. Rain BirdT"" FD102Go1f field decoder interfacing signal line and valve or pair of valves specifications include but are not limited to: WWWW. Power Draw: 0.5mA (idle), 18 mA (per active solenoid) PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 18 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 XXXX. Dimensions: Length: 3.35 in. (85 mm), Diameter 1.77 in. (45 mm) YYYY. Solenoids: 1 or two simultaneously ZZZZ. Wires: Blue to cable, white to solenoid AAAAA. Surge protection shall be required every 500 ft. BBBBB. The field decoder shall be gray in color for North America and black outside of North America. CCCCC. Rain BirdT"' FD202Go1f field decoder interfacing signal line and 2 valves or 2 pair of valves specifications include but are not limited to: DDDDD. Power Draw: 1.OmA (idle), 18 mA (per active solenoid) EEEEE. Dimensions: Length: 3.35 in. (85 mm), Diameter 1.97 in. (50 mm) FFFFF. Solenoids: 1 to 4 simultaneously GGGGG. Wires: Blue to cable, white and brown to solenoids HHHHH. Surge protection shall be required every 500 ft. IIIII. The field decoder shall be gray in color for North America and black outside of North America. JJJJJ. Rain BirdT"' FD401 Golf field decoder interfacing signal line and up to 4 individual valves specifications include but are not limited to: KKKKK. Power Draw: 1.OmA (idle), 18 mA (per active solenoid) LLLLL. Dimensions: Length: 3.94 in. (100 mm), Diameter 2.56 in. (65 mm) MMMMM. Solenoids: 1 to 4 with individual control NNNNN. Wires: Blue to cable, color coded to solenoids 00000. Surge protection shall be built into the decoder. PPPPP. The decoder shall have an input fuse of 300-500mA, thermal. QQQQQ. The field decoder shall be gray in color for North America and black outside of North America. RRRRR. Rain BirdT"' FD601Go1f field decoder interfacing signal line and up to 6 individual valves specifications include but are not limited to: SSSSS. Power Draw: 1.OmA (idle), 18 mA (per active solenoid) TTTTT. Dimensions: Length: 3.94 in. (100 mm), Diameter 2.56 in. (65 mm) PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 19 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 UUUUU. Solenoids: 1 to 6 with individual control VVWV. Wires: Blue to cable, color coded to solenoids WWWWW. Surge protection shall be built into the decoder. XXXXX. The decoder shall have an input fuse of 300-500mA, thermal. YYYYY. The field decoder shall be gray in color for North America and black outside of North America. ZZZZZ. The Rain BirdT"' LSP1 Golf Line Surge Protector decoder specifications include but are not limited to: AAAAAA. The line surge protector decoder shall be grounded on a two-wire path every 500 feet (150 meters) or every 8 decoders, whichever is smaller. BBBBBB. The LSP1 Golf Line Surge Protector decoder shall be placed on a two wire path with FD101 Golf field decoder interFacing signal line and valves, FD102Go1f field decoder interfacing signal line and valve or pair of valves, and FD202Go1f field decoder interfacing signal line and 2 valves or 2 pair of valves. CCCCCC. The LSP1 Golf Line Surge Protector decoder shall be used for surge protection only, and shall not have a decoder address. DDDDDD. The LSP1 Golf Line Surge Protector decoder shall protect against 40V, 1.5kW trasil. EEEEEE. The Rain BirdT"' SD-210Go1f Sensor Decoder specifications include but are not limited to: FFFFFF. The SD-210Go1f Sensor Decoder shall be an interface to flow sensors. GGGGGG. When the SD-210Go1f Sensor Decoder is wired to a flow sensor it shall monitor the current flow rate at a flow monitor by sending a pulse signals to the controller. 2.15 BOXES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES A) Plastic Boxes: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. 2. Description: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with grade. a. Size: As required for valves and service. b. Shape: Rectangular. c. Sidewall Material: PE. d. Cover Material: PE. e. Lettering: "VALVE BOX." 3. All lids shall be branded with the application/appurtenance that is located in the box, including, but not limited to, zone numbers, isolation valves, air vents, drain valves, quick connects, and wire junction box. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 20 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B) Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum to 3 inches (75 mm) maximum. 2.16 WIRE CONNECTORS– LOW VOLTAGE A) Manufacturers: 1. 3M DBY/R Pre-Filled Wire Connector B) Description: 3MT"' Direct Bury Splice Bulk DBR/Y-6 is a premium moisture-resistant connector that is used to electrically connect and moisture seal thicker insulation wire. Consists of a 3MT"^ Spring Connector R/Y and a high impact, UV-resistant tube pre- filled with moisture-resistant grease. UL-listed for direct bury and rated for 600V. 100/box bulk. 1. Agency Approvals: UL 2. Conductor Sizes: 10 AWG, 18 - 10 AWG, 18 AWG 3. Connection Type: Wire 4. Connector Style: Direct Bury 5. EU RoHS Compliant: Yes 6. Flame Retardant: UL-94 V-2 7. Maximum Wire Gauge: 10 AWG 8. Minimum Wire Gauge: 18 AWG 9. Operating Temperature Range (Celsius): -40 Degrees C to 105 Degrees C 10. Operating Temperature Range (Fahrenheit): -40 to 221 Degree Fahrenheit 2.17 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE A) Control wiring shall be either direct burial or installed in conduit. 1. Direct Burial: a. Conductor construction is soft drawn bare copper meeting the require- ments of ASTM Specification B-3. No. 14 AWG minimum. The insulation is a linear low density, high molecular weight polyethylene for systems ap- plications of up to 600 vo�ts. b. Application: Suitable for use as power and control wire for irrigation sys- tems. c. Conductor: Soft drawn bare copper (ASTM Specs. B-3 and B-8), Solid (No. 14 AWG minimum). d. Insulation: Polyethylene (PE) e. Temperature: 75°C f.Voltage: 600 volts g. Conductor size: No. 14 AWG minimum; insulation thickness: 0.045 h. Material must be able to pass the following tests without showing signs of degradation: (i) Cold Bend—The insulation shall not show any cracks when sample is bent around a 3X mandrel after being subjected to -25°C for four (4) hours. i. Electrical—AC test voltage, 60 seconds at 7500 volts. j. Mechanical Water Absorption—Insulation shall not absorb more than 25 mg mass of water per square inch. k. Sunlight Resistance Test—Samples conditioned for 300 hours of carbon- arc or xenon-arc exposure. 2. Conduit Wire–THWN Wire: a. Conductor construction is soft drawn bare copper meeting ASTM Specifica- tions B-3 and B-787, No. 14 AWG minimum. b. The insulation is a high quality polyvinylchloride (PVC) with a nylon jacket for systems applications of up to 600 volts and conductor temperatures up to 75°C. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 21 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 c. Application: Suitable for use as power wire for irrigation systems, when buried in conduit. d. Conductor: Soft drawn bare copper meeting applicable ASTM Specifica- tions. e. Solid (No. 14 AWG minimum). f.lnsulation: Polyvinylchloride (PVC) g. Jacket: Nylon h. Temperature: 90°C i.Voltage: 600 volts B) Feeder-circuit cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between building and controllers. C) Controller to Decoder Communications Path 1. Communication wire between the controller and the Decoder must utilize MAXI wire communication. Specifications shall be as follows: a. MAXI Wire, Hardwire Communications: the MAXI Type Communication wire for the Two-Wire paths shall be double jacketed, two-conductor cable intended for control of the Communications Signal and Feed-back Signal for the Rain Bird Central Computerized Control Systems. The cable shall be suitable for direct burial in the earth and also may be installed in ducts or conduits. b. Conductors: the Conductors shall be tin coated (for good mechanical bond- ing), soft drawn, annealed solid copper conforming to the requirements of ASTM-33. Each conductor shall be insulated with 4/64" (minimum) thick PVC conforming to the requirements of U.L. Standard #493 for thermo- plastic insulated underground feeder cables (TYPE UF). 2. The two (2) conductors shall be color coded with one conductor black and the other red. Both conductors shall be of the same size and shall be of sizes as specified and/or shown on the drawings and a required for the proper operation of the Satellite and Decoder units connected to it. 3. The wire manufacturer (not the wire broker) shall certify in writing, for each ship- ment, that the insulated conductors have been tested for and meet the require- ments of U.L. Standard #493 for thermoplastic-insulated, underground feeder ca- bles (TYPE UF). He shall also certify in writing that the individual conductors have a minimum insulation thickness of 4/64" throughout the entire length of the cable and that the finished cable meets the following requirements of the same standard: a. Dielectric Voltage Withstand Test: 5000V for 60 Seconds b. Tension and Elongation Test: 300 Ibf, no separation c. Impact Test: 6000V after the impact d. Crushing Resistance Test: an average of no less than 4500 Ibf flat e. Crushing Resistance Test: an average of no less than 1200 Ibf edge f.Cold Bend Test: No Cracks 4. Water Absorption: In addition, each shipment of cable shall include a current dat- ed listing card from the Underwriters showing the MANUFACTURER'S U.L. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER - as evidence that the MANUFACTURER is ap- proved to manufacture thermoplastic insulated underground feeder cable in ac- cordance with the U.L. Standard #493. 5. Outer Jacket: the two (2) conductors shall be laid parallel and covered with a Sol- id Color, HIGH DENSITY, sunlight resistant polyethylene outerjacket, of the color coding specified and conforming to the requirements of ICEA S-61-402 and NEMA WC 5. The MINIMUM jacket thickness, when measured at any point in contact with the PVC insulation of the copper conductor and to the outer surface PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 22 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 of the outer jacket, shall be 3/64"thick. The outer jacket shall be PRESSURE EXTRUDED so as to COMPLETELY FILL the interstices between the two insulat- ed wires. The polyethylene outer jacket shall conform to the following: 6. The entire outer polyethylene jacket shall be of the color specified for easy identi- fication of the Two-Wire path. Each Two-Wire Path on the system shall have a different color outer jacket for easy identification after installation and for easily distinguishing between the various Two-Wire paths on the system. Standard colors for the outer jacket color-coding shall be White, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Orange and Black. 7. The MAXIO Type Cable SHALL be marked on the jacket as follows - MAXI TYPE COMMUNICATION CABLE - 2/C ##AWG, along with the manufacturer's name and identification number (which is mandatory) and other designations, such as, voltage rating, etc., as may be appropriate. The wire shall not be marked with any other designation, except as noted above.The manufacturer shall also certify in writing that the POLYETHELENE outer jacket is of minimum thickness (3/64") throughout the entire length of the cable and that it does meet and conform to the requirements of ICEA S —61 —402 and NEMA WC 5 as outlined above for both Electrical Properties and Physical Properties. 8. The cable shall be shipped on non-returnable wood reels, in the lengths and col- or-coding outer jacket color as specified. 9. The MAXI Type Communication Cable, for the Two-Wire Paths of the various Rain Bird control systems shall meet or exceed the above specifications in all re- spects and all written certifications from the manufacturer shall be supplied with the wire as outlined and called for in these specifications. D) SURGE PROTECTION FOR THE TWO-WIRE PATH 1. An LSP-1 Surge Arrestor shall be installed on the 2-wire communication path at each controller location. The LSP-1 shall detect and transfer voltage surges of 60 volts or higher traveling along the 2-wire path to a local grounding system via the dedicated grounding wires provided at each end of the device. The LSP-1 Surge Arrestor shall be mounted in the stainless steel mounting bracket in the pedestal of the satellite unit or other suitable location. A local grounding system (ground rods, plates, cables, or combination) with a ground resistance of ten (10) ohms or less shall be provided at each LSP-1 location. 2. The surge arrestor shall be as manufactured and furnished by Rain Bird Corpora- tion. E) Wire splicing: 1. Wire splicing shall be avoided if possible. 2. Splicing materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating, spring- type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct burial. 3. Splices shall incorporate the following items: a. A solid mechanical connection of the copper conductors. b. Electrical insulation of the mechanical connection. c. A means to waterproof the insulated connection. d. "Strain Relief" to prevent the connection from coming apart. F) Wire conduit: 1. Conduit size and location shall be according to the electrical engineering plans by others. 2. Communication cable and branch circuit cables shall be in separate conduits. G) Grounding: PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 23 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Ground all wire systems in accordance with the latest version of the American Society of Irrigation Consultants Guideline 100 for Earth Grounding Electronic Equipment in Irrigation Systems. 2. Rain Bird warranties controllers, decoders and ancillary products used on a two- wire path only when connected to a grounding system with a ground resistance of ten (10) ohms or less. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CONDITIONS, LANDSCAPE PLAN REVIEW AND COORDINATION A. Contractor will be held responsible for coordination between landscape and irri- gation system installation. Landscape material locations shown on the Land- scape Plan shall take precedence over the irrigation system equipment locations. If irrigation equipment is installed in conflict with the landscape material locations shown on the Landscape Plan, the Contractor will be required to relocate the irri- gation equipment, as necessary, at Contractor's expense. B. Contractor is responsible to notify Consultant of any field conditions that conflict with directed work. If Contractor fails to notify Consultant of these conditions, Contractor will be held responsible for all costs associated with system adjust- ments required due to the change in field conditions. 3.02 STATIC PRESSURE VERIFICATION - Contractor shall field verify the static pressure at the project site, prior to commencing work or ordering irrigation materials, and submit findings, in writing, to Consultant. If Contractor fails to verify static water pressure prior to commencing work or ordering irrigation materials, Contractor shall assume responsi- bility for all costs required to make system operational and the costs required to replace any damaged landscape material. Damage shall include all required material costs, de- sign costs and plant replacement costs. 3.03 INSPECTION: - Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section is to be performed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been correct- ed. A. Grading operations, with the exception of final grading, shall be completed and approved by Owner before staking or installation of any irrigation system begins. B. Underground Utilities shall be installed prior to installation of irrigation system. If irrigation installation takes place prior to utility installation, Contractor shall notify Owner of this condition in writing prior to commencement of irrigation installation. 3.04 PREPARATION: A. Staking shall Occur as Follows: 1. Mark, with powdered lime, routing of pressure supply line and flag heads for first few zones. Contact Consultant 48 hours in advance and request review of staking. Proposed locations of all trees shall be field staked by Contractor and approved by Owner/Landscape Architect prior to Consult- ant review of irrigation staking. Consultant will advise installer as to the amount of staking to be prepared. Consultant will review staking and di- rect changes if required. Review does not relieve installer from coverage problems due to improper placement of heads after staking. 2. Contractor shall contact Consultant if field spacing varies by +/- 10% of the spacing shown on the irrigation plans. If Contractor fails to notify Con- sultant of variances exceeding 10%, Contractor assumes full responsibil- ity for the costs associated with any required system modifications deemed necessary by the Consultant or Owner. 3. If Project has significant topography, freeform planting beds, or other amenities, which could require alteration of irrigation equipment layout as deemed necessary by Consultant, do not install irrigation equipment in PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 24 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 these areas until Consultant has reviewed equipment staking. B. Install sleeving under asphalt paving and concrete walks, prior to concreting and paving operations, to accommodate piping and wiring. Compact backfill around sleeves to 95% Modified Proctor Density within 2°/a of optimum moisture content in accordance with STM D1557. C. Trenching - Trench excavation shall follow, as much as possible, layout shown on Drawing. Dig trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trench bottom shall be clean and smooth with all rock and organic debris removed. 1. Clearances: a. Piping 3 Inches and Larger - Make trenches of sufficient width (14 inches minimum) to properly assemble and position pipe in trench. Minimum clearance of piping 3 inches or larger shall be 5 inches horizontally on both sides of the trench. b. Piping Smaller than 3 Inches - Trenches shall have a minimum width of 7 inches. c. Line Clearance - Provide not less than 6 inches of clearance be- tween each line and not less than 12 inches of clearance between lines of other trades. 2. Pipe and Wire Depth: a. Pressure Supply Piping - 18 inches from top of pipe. b. PVC Sleeving - 18 inches from top of pipe. c. Non-pressure Piping (rotor) - 18 inches from top of pipe. d. Non-pressure Piping (pop-up) - 12 inches from top of pipe. e. Control Wiring/Data Cable - Side of pressure main or at 18 inch depth if installed in a separate trench with no mainline piping.. f. Drip Tubing - 12 inches from top of pipe. g. Emitter Tubing (Micro-tubing) - 8 inches from top of pipe. 3. Boring will be permitted only where pipe must pass under obstruction(s) which cannot be removed. In backfilling bore, final density of backfill shall match that of surrounding soil. It is acceptable to use sleeves of suitable diameter installed first by jacking or boring, and pipe laid through sleeves. Observe same precautions as though pipe were installed in open trench. 4. Vibratory Plow — Not an acceptable method of installation for irrigation piping and/or wiring. 3.05 INSTALLATION - Locate other equipment as near as possible to locations designated. Consultant shall review deviations prior to installation. A. PVC Piping - Snake pipe in trench as much as possible to allow for expansion and contraction. Do not install pipe when air temperature is below 40�F. Place manual drain valves at low points and dead ends of pressure supply piping to in- sure complete drainage of system. When pipe installation is not in progress, or at end of each day, close pipe ends with tight plug or cap. PerForm Work in ac- cordance with good practices prevailing in piping trades. 1. Solvent Weld PVC Pipe - Lay pipe and make all plastic to plastic joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Drip Tubing: 1. Make all fitting connections as per manufacturers recommendations. 2. Use only manufacturer provided or recommended hole punch when mak- ing penetrations in drip tubing for insert fittings. Use of any other hole punch shall be cause for immediate removal and replacement of all in- stalled drip tubing. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 25 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Install drip line blow-out stubs at all dead ends of drip tubing. C. Control Wiring: 1. Low Voltage Wiring: a. Bury control wiring between controller and electric valves in pres- sure supply line trenches, strung as close as possible to main pipe lines with such wires to be consistently located below and to one side of pipe, or in separate trenches. b. Bundle all 24 volt wires at 10 foot intervals and lay with pressure supply line pipe to one side of the trench. c. Provide an expansion loop at every pressure pipe angle fitting, every electric control valve location (in valve box), and every 500 feet. Form expansion loop by wrapping wire at least 8 times around a 3/4 inch pipe and withdrawing pipe. d. Make all splices and E.C.V. connections using 3M DBY connect- ors or similar dry splice method. e. Install all control wire splices not occurring at control valve in a separate splice va�ve box. f. Install one control wire for each control valve. g. Run two spare #14 AWG UFUL control wires and one common wire from controller pedestal to the end of each and every leg of mainline. Label spare wires at controller and wire stub box. 2. High Voltage Wiring for Automatic Controller: a. Provide 120 volt power connection to automatic controller. b. All electric work shafl conform to local codes, ordinances, and au- thorities having jurisdiction. All high voltage electrical work shall be performed by licensed electrician. D. Automatic Controller: 1. Install controller in accordance with manufacturer's instructions . 2. Connect remote control valves to controller in numerical sequence. 3. Owner shall approve final location of controller prior to installation. 4. Each controller shall be a dedicated separate ground wire and grounding rod as detailed. 5. All above ground conduit shall be rigid galvanized with appropriate fit- tings. All below ground conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC. E. Electric Control Valves - Install cross-handle four inches below finished grade. When grouped together, allow at least 12 inches between valve box sides. In- stall each remote control valve in a separate valve box. Install individual valve box flush with grade. F. Quick Coupling Valves - Install quick couplers on swing-joint assemblies plumb and flush to grade. Angled nipple relative to pressure supply line shall be no more than 45 degrees and no less than 10 degrees. G. Drip Valve Assemblies - Install drip valve assembly as necessary. H. Drip Emitters - Stake all surface emitters and with acceptable tubing stakes. I. Drain Valves - Install one manual drain valve on pressure supply line directly downstream of backflow preventer. Provide a three cubic foot drainage sump for drain valve. J. Valve Boxes: 1. Install one valve box for each type of valve installed. Valve box exten- sions are not acceptable except for master valves and flow sensors. In- stall gravel sump after compaction of all trenches. Place final portion of gravel inside valve box after valve box is backfilled and compacted. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 26 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Brand controller letter and station number on lid of each valve box. Letter and number size shall be no smaller than 1 inch and no greater in size than 1 1/2 inches. Depth of branding shall be no more than 1/8 inch into valve box lid. K. Gate Valves -to be determined if necessary. L. Sprinkler Heads - Install sprinkler heads where designated on Drawings or where staked. Set to finish as detailed. Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maxi- mum indicated on Drawing unless re-staked as directed by Consultant. In no case shall the spacing exceed maximum recommended by manufacturer. Install heads on swing joints or riser assemblies as detailed. Adjust part circle heads for proper coverage. Adjust heads to correct height after sod is installed. Plant placement shall not interfere with intended sprinkler head coverage, piping, or other equipment. Consultant may request nozzle changes or adjustments without additional cost to the Owner. M. Backflow Preventer-to be determined if necessary or re-use existing. N. Backfilling - Do not begin backfilling operations until required system tests have been completed. Backfill shall not be done in freezing weather except with re- view by Consultant. Leave trenches slightly mounded to allow for settlement af- ter backfilling is completed. Trenches shall be finish graded prior to walk-through of system by Consultant. 1. Materials - Excavated material is generally considered satisfactory for backfill purposes. Backfill material shall be free of rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 1 inch in maximum di- mension. Do not mix subsoil with topsoil. Material not suitable for backfill shall be hauled away. Contractor shall be responsible for providing suita- ble backfill if excavated material is unacceptable or not sufficient to meet backfill, compaction, and final grade requirements. 2. Do not leave trenches open for a period of more than 48 hours. Open excavations shall be protected in accordance with OSHA regulations. 3. Compact backfill to 90% maximum density, determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 utilizing the following methods: a. Mechanical tamping. b. Puddling or ponding. Puddling or ponding and/or jetting is prohib- ited within 20'-0" of building or foundation walls. O. Piping Under Paving: 1. Provide for a minimum cover of 18 inches between the top of the pipe and the bottom of the aggregate base for all pressure and non-pressure piping installed under asphaltic concrete or concrete paving. 2. Piping located under areas where asphalt or concrete paving will be in- stalled shall be bedded with sand (a layer 6" below pipe and 6" above pipe). 3. Compact backfill material in 6" lifts at 90% maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D155-7 using manual or mechanical tamping devices. 4. Set in place, cap, and pressure test all piping under paving, in presence of Owner prior to backfilling and paving operations. 5. Piping under existing walks or concrete pavement shall be done by jack- ing, boring, or hydraulic driving, but where cutting or breaking of walks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done and replaced at not cost to Owner. Obtain permission to cut or break walks and/or concrete from Owner. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 27 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 P. Water Supply and Point of Connection - Water supply shall be extended as shown from water supply lines. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Flushing - After piping, risers, and valves are in place and connected, but prior to installation of sprinkler heads, quick coupler assemblies, and hose valves, thor- oughly flush piping system under full head of water pressure from dead end fit- tings. Maintain flushing for 5 minutes through furthermost valves. Cap risers af- ter flushing. B. Testing - Conduct tests in presence of Consultant. Arrange for presence of Con- sultant 48 hours in advance of testing. Supply force pump and all other test equipment. 1. After backfilling, and installation of all control valves, fill pressure supply line with water, and pressurize to 40 PSI over the designated static pres- sure or 120 PSI, whichever is greater, for a period of 2 hours. 2. Leakage, Pressure Loss - Test is acceptable if no loss of pressure is evi- dent during the test period. 3. Leaks - Detect and repair �eaks. 4. Retest system until test pressure can be maintained for duration of test. 5. Before final acceptance, pressure supply line shall remain under pressure for a period of 48 hours. C. Walk-Through for Substantial Completion: 1. Arrange for Consultant's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Entire system shall be completely installed and operational prior to scheduling of walk-through. 3. Operate each zone in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk-through and additionally, open all valve boxes if directed. 4. Generate a list of items to be corrected prior to Final Completion. 5. Furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct all inade- quacies of coverage due to deviations from Contract Documents. 6. During walk-through, expose all drip emitters under operations for obser- vation by Consultant to demonstrate that they are perForming and in- stalled as designed, prior to placing of all mulch material. Schedule sepa- rate walk-through if necessary. 7. Supply Consultant with prints of irrigation as-builts prior to scheduling substantial completion walk-through. D. Walk-Through for Final Completion: 1. Arrange for Consultant's presence 48 hours in advance of walk-through. 2. Show evidence to Consultant that Owner has received all accessories, charts, record drawings, and equipment as required before Final Comple- tion walk-through is scheduled. 3. Operate each zone, in its entirety for Consultant at time of walk-through to insure correction of all incomplete items. 4. Items deemed not acceptable by Consultant shall be reworked to com- plete satisfaction of Consultant. 5. If after request to Consultant for walk-through for Final Completion of irri- gation system, Consultant finds items during walk-through which have not been properly adjusted, reworked, or replaced as indicated on list of in- complete items from previous walk-through, Contractor shall be charged for all subsequent walk-throughs. Funds will be withheld from final pay- ment and/or retainage to Contractor, in amount equal to additional time and expenses required by Consultant to conduct and document further PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 28 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 walk-throughs as deemed necessary to insure compliance with Contract Documents. 3.07 ADJUSTING - Upon completion of installation, "fine-tune" entire system by regulating valves, adjusting patterns and break-up arms, and setting pressure reducing valves at pro-per and similar pressure to provide optimum and efficient coverage. Flush and ad- just all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. Heads of same type shall be operating at same pressure +/- 7%. A. If it is determined that irrigation adjustments will provide proper coverage, and improved water distribution as determined by Consultant, contractor shall make such adjustments prior to Final Acceptance, as directed, at no additional cost to Owner. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes, degrees of arc, and control valve throttling. B. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finish grade unless otherwise noted on Construction Plans or directed by Consultant. C. Areas which do not conform to designated operation requirements due to unau- thorized changes or poor installation practices shall be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.08 CLEANING - Maintain continuous cleaning operation throughout duration of work. Dis- pose of, off-site at no additional cost to Owner, all trash or debris generated by installa- tion of irrigation system. END OF SECTION Verify that Section titles referenced in this Section are correct for this Project's Specifications; Section titles may have changed. PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 29 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 329115 - SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes planting soils specified according to performance requirements of the mixes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses"for placing planting soil for turF and grasses. 2. Section 329300 "Plants"for placing planting soil for plantings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AAPFCO: Association of American Plant Food Control Officials. B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. This can be amended or unamended soil as indicated. C. CEC: Cation exchange capacity. D. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of organic material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the point that it is beneficial to plant growth. E. Duff Layer: A surface layer of soil, typical of forested areas, that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. F. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use. G. Layered Soil Assembly: A designed series of planting soils, layered on each other, that together produce an environment for plant growth. H. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil amendments, and other materials to produce planting soil. I. NAPT: North American Proficiency Testing Program. An SSSA program to assist soil-, plant-, and water-testing laboratories through interlaboratory sample exchanges and statistical evaluation of analytica� data. SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 329115 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 J. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of undecayed plant and animal tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also called "humus" or "soil organic matter." K. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. L. RCRA Metals: Hazardous metals identified by the EPA under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act. M. SSSA: Soil Science Society of America. N. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. O. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms. P. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surFace soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surFace soil can be subsoil. Q. USCC: U.S. Composting Council. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include recommendations for application and use. 2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements. 3. Include sieve analyses for aggregate materials. 4. Material Certificates: For each type of imported soil and soil amendment and fertilizer before delivery to the site, according to the following: a. Manufacturer's qualified testing agency's certified analysis of standard products. b. Analysis of fertilizers, by a qualified testing agency, made according to AAPFCO methods for testing and labeling and according to AAPFCO's SUIP #25. c. Analysis of nonstandard materials, by a qualified testing agency, made according to SSSA methods, where applicable. B. Samples: For each bulk-supplied material, 1-quart volume of each in sealed containers labeled with content, source, and date obtained. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 329115 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of composition, color, and texture. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For each testing agency. B. Preconstruction Test Reports: For preconstruction soil analyses specified in "Preconstruction Testing"Article. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state-operated, or university-operated laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition; with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. 1. Multiple Laboratories: At Contractor's option, work may be divided among qualified testing laboratories specializing in physical testing, chemical testing, and fertility testing. 1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction soil analyses on existing on-site soil. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory samples will be taken. B. Preconstruction Soil Analyses: For each unamended soil type, perForm testing on soil samples and furnish soil analysis and a written report containing soil-amendment and fertilizer recommendations by a qualified testing agency performing the testing according to "Soil-Sampling Requirements" and "Testing Requirements" articles. 1. Have testing agency identify and label samples and test reports according to sample collection and labeling requirements. 1.9 SOIL-SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS A. General: Extract soil samples according to requirements in this article. B. Sample Collection and Labeling: Have samples taken and labeled by soil scientist under the direction of the testing agency. SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 329115 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Number and Location of Samples: Minimum of three representative soil samples from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for landscaping purposes. 2. Procedures and Depth of Samples: 12-18" 3. Division of Samples: Split each sample into two, equal parts. Send half to the testing agency and half to Owner for its records. 4. Labeling: Label each sampie with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location system, visible soil condition, and sampling depth. 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: Perform tests on soil samples according to requirements in this article. B. Physical Testing: 1. Soil Texture: Soil-particle, size-distribution analysis by one of the following methods according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods": a. Sieving Method: Report sand-gradation percentages for very coarse, coarse, medium, fine, and very fine sand; and fragment-gradation (gravel) percentages for fine, medium, and coarse fragments; according to USDA sand and fragment sizes. b. Hydrometer Method: Report percentages of sand, silt, and clay. 2. Bulk Density: Analysis according to core and clod methods per SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods." 3. Total Porosity: Calculate using particle density and bulk density according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods." 4. Water Retention: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1- Physical and Mineralogical Methods." 5. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods"; at 85% compaction according to ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor). C. Chemical Testing: 1. CEC: Analysis by sodium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods." 2. Clay Mineralogy: Analysis and estimated percentage of expandable clay minerals using CEC by ammonium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods." 3. Metals Hazardous to Human Health: Test for presence and quantities of RCRA metals including aluminum, arsenic, barium, copper, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If RCRA metals are present, include recommendations for corrective action. 4. Phytotoxicity: Test for plant-available concentrations of phytotoxic minerals including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chlorides, chromium, cobalt, copper, lead, lithium, mercury, nickel, selenium, silver, sodium, strontium, tin, titanium, vanadium, and zinc. SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 329115 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Fertility Testing: Soil fertility analysis according to standard laboratory protocol of SSSA NAPT NCR-13 1. Percentage of organic matter. 2. CEC, calcium percent of CEC, and magnesium percent of CEC. 3. Soil reaction (acidity/alkalinity pH value). 4. Buffered acidity or alkalinity. 5. Nitrogen ppm. 6. Phosphorous ppm. 7. Potassium ppm. 8. Manganese ppm. 9. Manganese-availability ppm. 10. Zinc ppm. 11. Zinc availability ppm. 12. Copper ppm. 13. Sodium ppm and sodium absorption ratio. 14. Soluble-salts ppm. 15. Presence and quantities of problem materials including salts and metals cited in the Standard protocol. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. 16. Other deleterious materials, including their characteristics and content of each. E. Organic-Matter Content: Analysis using loss-by-ignition method according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3-Chemical Methods." F. Recommendations: Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants indicated. Include, at a minimum, recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium fertilization, and for micronutrients. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable. B. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Do not move or handle materials when they are wet or frozen. 4. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate certificates. SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 329115 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Regional Materials: Imported soil, manufactured planting soil, soil amendments and fertilizers shall be manufactured within 50 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 200 miles of Project site. 2.2 PLANTING SOILS SPECIFIED ACCORDING TO PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Planting-Soil: Existing, on-site surface soil, with the duff layer, if any, retained; and stockpiled on-site. Using preconstruction soil analyses and materials specified in other articles of this Section, amend existing, on-site surFace soil to become planting soil. B. Planting-Soil: Imported, naturally formed soil from off-site sources modified to produce viable planting soil. Amend imported soil with materials specified in other articles of this Section to become planting soil complying with the following requirements: 2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by composting feedstock, and bearing USCC's "Seal of Testing Assurance," and as follows: 1. Reaction: pH of 5.5 to 8 2. Moisture Content: 30 to 60 by weight. 3. Organic-Matter Content: 30 to 65 percent of dry weight. 4. Particle Size: Minimum of 98 percent passing through a 1/2-inchsieve. B. Wood Derivatives: Shredded and composted, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials. C. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant g rowth. 2.4 FERTILIZERS A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of [20] [33] [50] percent available phosphoric acid. B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 329115 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified testing agency. C. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water- insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified testing agency. D. Chelated Iron: Commercial-grade FeEDDHA for dicots and woody plants, and commercial-grade FeDTPA for ornamental grasses and monocots. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Place planting soil and fertilizers according to requirements in other Specification Sections. B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in planting soil. C. Proceed with placement only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION OF UNAMENDED, ON-SITE SOIL BEFORE AMENDING A. Excavation: Excavate soil from designated area(s) to a depth of 12 inches and stockpile until amended. B. Unacceptable Materials: Clean soil of concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant g rowth. C. Unsuitable Materials: Clean soil to contain a combined maximum of 8 percent by dry weight of stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand. 3.3 PLACING AND MIXING PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE A. General: Apply and mix unamended soil with amendments on-site to produce required planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 8 inches. Remove stones larger than 4 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 329115 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Apply, add soil amendments, and mix approximately half the thickness of unamended soil over prepared, loosened subgrade according to "Mixing" Paragraph below. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil. C. Mixing: Spread unamended soil to total depth 4 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after mixing with amendments and natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. 1. Amendments: Apply soil amendments and fertilizer, if required, evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend them with unamended soil to produce planting soil. a. Mix fertilizer with planting soil no more than seven days before planting. D. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform the following tests: 1. Compaction: Test planting-soil compaction after placing each lift and at completion using a densitometer or soil-compaction meter calibrated to a reference test value based on laboratory testing according to ASTM D 698. C. Soil will be considered defective if it does not pass tests D. Prepare test reports. E. Label each sample and test report with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location system, visible conditions when and where sample was taken, and sampling depth. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and contamination. Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as required to perform planting operations: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Vehicle traffic. 4. Foot traffic. 5. Erection of sheds or structures. 6. Impoundment of water. 7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 329115 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. If planting soil or subgrade is overcompacted, disturbed, or contaminated by foreign or deleterious materials or liquids, remove the planting soil and contamination; restore the subgrade as directed by Architect and replace contaminated planting soil with new planting soil. 3.6 CLEANWG A. Protect areas adjacent to planting-soil preparation and placement areas from contamination. Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless otherwise indicated. 1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on-site where directed by Owner. END OF SECTION 329115 SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION) 329115 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Seeding. 2. Sodding. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 329300 "Plants" for trees, shrubs, ground covers, and other plants as well as border edgings and mow strips. 2. Section 334600 "Subdrainage"for below-grade drainage of landscaped areas. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. I. Surface Soil: Whatever soil is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture, stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. 1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier. C. Product Certificates: For fertilizers, from manufacturer. D. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to Project. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1.6 Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment. 1. Experience: Three years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full- time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 3. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory. 1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth. a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable. B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying. C. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or disp�acement of bulk materials; discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Spring Planting: Coordinate with Contractor's schedule. 2. Fall Planting: Coordinate with Contractor's schedule. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SEED A. Grass Seed Mix: Proprietary seed mix as follows: TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following Pawnee Buttes Seed Inc Dry Native Mountain Revegetation Mix: (10%) Fringed Bromegrass (10%) Nodding Brome (20%) Slender Wheatgrass (10%) Steambank Wheatgrass (2.5%) Canby Bluegrass (7.5%) Arizona Fescue (10%) Indian Ricegrass (5%) Thickspike Wheatgrass (5%) Bluebunch Wheatgrass (2.5%) Bottlebrush Squirreltail (2.5%) Sandburg Bluegrass (15%) Sheep Fescue Pawnee Buttes Seed Inc Low Grow Native Grass Mix: (10%) Big Bluegrass, Sherman (10%) Sandberg / Canby Bluegrass (10%) Indian Rice Grass (30%) Arizona Fescue, Redondo (40%) Sheep Fescue, Ovina 2.2 TURFGRASS SOD A. TurFgrass Sod: Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects and complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. B. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows: 'ESF Kentucky Bluegrass Blend Sod' Cut to 2" minimum depth. Emerald Sod Farms, 31581 E. 128th Ave, Commerce City, 80022 (303) 654 0202 OR equal. 2.3 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. 2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 sieve. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve. C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated. E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 sieve. G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials. H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight. I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. 2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4- inchsieve; soluble salt content of 7 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings. B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. C. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water- absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials. E. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth. 2.5 FERTILIZERS A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 1percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid. B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 Ib/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water- insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. 2.6 PLANTING SOILS A. Stockpiled Native Topsoil: 1. Quantity: A substantial quantity of native topsoil will result from construc- tion on site. Approximate quantity is unknown. 2. Stockpiling: Stripped topsoil will be stockpiled on the site under Civil work. 3. Composition: Fertile, friable, well-drained soil, of uniform quality, free of rocks, sticks, oils, chemicals, plaster, concrete and other deleterious ma- terials. 4. Analysis: Obtain an agricultural suitability analysis of the proposed top- soil from an accepted, accredited Testing Agency at Contractor's cost. 5. Test Results: Request Testing Agency to send one (1) copy of test results directly to Landscape Architect and one (1) copy to Owner. B. Imported Topsoil: 1. Quantity: Import topsoil as soon as an insufficient quantity of native soil is verified. Contractor shall calculate the quantity of topsoil needed to com- plete the work. 2. Cost: Paid for by Contractor on a unit price cost per cubic yard. Obtain authorization before ordering. 3. Stockpiling: Stockpile on site as directed by Owner. 4. Composition: To match or exceed in quality of native stockpiled topsoil, as determined by analysis similar to that described above. Imported top- soil shall be amended as necessary per soils analysis report. 5. Samples: Landscape Architect reserves the right to take samples of the imported topsoil delivered to the site for conformance to the specifica- tions. 6. Rejected Topsoil: Immediately remove rejected topsoil off the site at Con- tractor's expense. Cost of failed sample is responsibility of Contractor. 2.7 SOIL MIXES A. Native Planting Medium: To be used for all seeded areas, shrub beds and tree pits - Amount per Cubic Yard: 40% Topsoil 40% Subsoil TURF AND GRASSES 329200 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 20% Compost B. Flower Bed Mix: Planting Beds for Perennials -Amount per Cubic Yard: 80% Topsoil 20% Compost Materials 2.7 MULCHES A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley. B. Sphagnum Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture, and with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. C. Muck Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water- absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. D. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1- inch sieve; soluble salt content of 3 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings. 2.8 EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS A. Erosion-Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long. B. Erosion-Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable burlap or spun-coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92 Ib/sq. yd., with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long. C. Erosion-Control Mats: Cellular, nonbiodegradable slope-stabilization mats designed to isolate and contain small areas of soil over steeply sloped surFace, of [3-inch] [4-inch] [6-inch] <Insert dimension> nominal mat thickness. Include manufacturer's recommended anchorage system for slope conditions. 1. °=6�ouble click hc!r;� Rc� �ind, ev�lu�te, and insert list of manufacturers and ��_aroducts.> PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 3. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures; utilities; sidewalks; pavements; and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. 2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them. B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION A. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply fertilizer directly to sub-grade before loosening. 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surFace, and thoroughly blend planting soil. 3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod. B. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surFace-soil stripping operations, prepare surFace soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 6 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. 3. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property. C. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. D. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. E. Before planting, obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.4 SEEDING A. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer. B. Sow seed at rates specified and per the plant planting schedule and legend, if applicable. C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. D. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches thickness in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment. 1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment. E. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying compost mulch within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch and roll surface smooth. 3.5 SODDING A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvestinq. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. 1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs spaced as recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage. C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first THREE weeks after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod. 3.6 TURF MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf for a period of establishment of 120 days. Roll, re-grade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. B. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain height appropriate for species without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. C. Apply pesticides and other biological control agents ONLY IF ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY, and if so in strict accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. 3.7 TURF MAINTENANCE A. General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. 3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water turF with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate. 3.8 SATISFACTORY TURF A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Landscape Architect: 1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches. 2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities. B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory. 3.9 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. C. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established. D. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period. 3.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turF is established but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded Turf: not applicable— no seeded turf is specified in this project. 2. Sodded Turf: 120 days from date of substantial completion. a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turfi is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 11 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 END OF SECTION 329200 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 12 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 329300 - PLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plants. 2. Planting soils. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 328400 "Planting Irrigation"for permanent landscape irrigations systems. 2. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn) and meadow planting, hydroseeding, and erosion-control materials. 3. Section 329115 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification)" for permanent landscape irrigations systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with a ball size not less than sizes indicated; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1. C. Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than sizes indicated. D. Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than the minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. E. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. PLANTS 329300 - 1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 F. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants established and grown in-ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant. G. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. H. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides separately from pesticides. I. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. J. Planting Area: Areas to be planted. K. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See Section 329115 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification)" for drawing designations for planting soils. L. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation. M. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk. N. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface. O. Subgrade: The surFace or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turF areas unless otherwise indicated. 1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations. PLANTS 329300 -2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Include layout of plants staked or places at the proposed locations in quantities indicated. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials. 2. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species and size of plant material as it will be furnished to Project. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery. B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1. Trees and Shrubs: Three Samples of each variety and size delivered to site for review. Maintain approved Samples on-site as a standard for comparison. 2. Compost Mulch: 1-pint volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup. 3. Mineral Mulch: 2 Ib of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic bags labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be delivered and installed on-site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture, and makeup of the material. 4. Weed Control Barrier: 12 by 12 inches. 5. Proprietary Root-Ball-Stabilization Device: One unit. 6. Root Barrier: Width of panel by 12 inches. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons. B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. PLANTS 329300 - 3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 C. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to Project. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants. 1. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full- time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 3. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1. C. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. 1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container-grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes. 2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position. D. Plant Material Observation: Architect may observe plant material at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Architect may also observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. 1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site. E. Soil Analysis: For soil underlying areas to be planted anew furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory. PLANTS 329300 -4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling. 2. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth. a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. F. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable. B. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates. C. Deliver bare-root stock plants within 24 hours of digging. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. Transport in covered, temperature-controlled vehicles, and keep plants cool and protected from sun and wind at all times. D. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. E. Handle planting stock by root ball. F. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots that are in less than moist condition in water for two hours. Reject plants with dry roots. PLANTS 329300 - 5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. 3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 4. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine- mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly wet condition. 1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work. B. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Spring Planting: Coordinate with the Owner's Construction schedule. 2. Fall Planting: Coordinate with the Owner's Construction schedule. C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. Faulty performance of tree stabilization. 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Planting Completion a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 24 months b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months 1.13 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants PLANTS 329300 -6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period for Trees and Shrubs: 12 months from date of planting completion. 2. Maintenance Period for Ground Cover and Other Plants: 12 months from date of planting completion. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. D. Labeling: Label [each] [at least one] plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant. E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is indicated on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting. 2.2 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch sieve; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings. 2.3 FERTILIZERS A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 1 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid. PLANTS 329300 - 7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 Ib/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water- insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. E. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots. 1. Size: 10-gram tablets. 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent potassium, by weight plus micronutrients. 2.4 PESTICIDES A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated. 2.5 TREE-STABILIZATION MATERIALS A. Trunk-Stabilization Materials: 1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood or softwood with specified wood pressure-preservative treatment, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal by length indicated, pointed at one end. 2. Wood Deadmen: Timbers measuring 8 inches in diameter and 48 inches long, treated with specified wood pressure-preservative treatment. PLANTS 329300 -8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Flexible Ties: Wide rubber or elastic bands or straps of length required to reach stakes, turnbuckles or compression springs. 4. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, two- strand, twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter. 5. Tree-Tie Webbing: UV-resistant polypropylene or nylon webbing with brass grommets. 6. Guy Cables: Five-strand, 3/16-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc- coated turnbuckles or compression springs, a minimum of 3 inches long, with two 3/8-inch galvanized eyebolts. 7. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long. 8. Proprietary Staking-and-Guying Devices: Proprietary stake or anchor and adjustable tie systems to secure each new planting by plant stem; sized as indicated and according to manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Root-Ball Stabilization Materials: 1. Upright Stakes and Horizontal Hold-Down: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood or softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal by length indicated; stakes pointed at one end. 2. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. 3. Proprietary Root-Ball Stabilization Devices: Proprietary at- or below-grade stabilization systems to secure each new planting by root ball and that do not encircle the trunk; sized according to manufacturer's written recommendations unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Wood Pressure-Preservative Treatment: AWPA U1, Use Category UC4a; acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Root Barrier: Black, molded, modular panels 18 inches high (deep), 85 mils thick, and with vertical root deflecting ribs protruding 3/4 inch out from panel surface; manufactured with minimum 50 percent recycled polyethylene plastic with UV inhibitors. 1. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum. 2. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd . . ��1� �:: r-�ic ere to in ,- � �r��; „ ,, � : � �; i�� ,� ... �:�. C. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable. E. Planter Drainage Gravel: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8. PLANTS 329300 - 9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 F. Planter Filter Fabric: Woven or Nonwoven geotextile manufactured for separation applications and made of polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fibers or combination of them. 2.7 PLANTING SOILS A. Stockpiled Native Topsoil: 1. Quantity: An undetermined quantity of native topsoil will result from con- struction on site. Approximate quantity is unknown. 2. Stockpiling: Stripped topsoil will be stockpiled on the site under Civil work. 3. Composition: Fertile, friable, well-drained soil, of uniform quality, free of rocks, sticks, oils, chemicals, plaster, concrete and other deleterious ma- terials. 4. Analysis: Obtain an agricultural suitability analysis of the proposed top- soil from an accepted, accredited Testing Agency at Contractor's cost. 5. Test Results: Request Testing Agency to send one (1) copy of test results directly to Landscape Architect and one (1) copy to Owner's Representa- tive. B. Imported Topsoil: 1. Quantity: Import topsoil as soon as an insufficient quantity of native soil is verified. Contractor shall calculate the quantity of topsoil needed to com- plete the work. 2. Cost: Paid for by Contractor on a unit price cost per cubic yard. Obtain authorization before ordering. 3. Stockpiling: Stockpile on site as directed by Owner. 4. Composition: To match or exceed in quality of native stockpiled topsoil, as determined by analysis similar to that described above. Imported top- soil shall be amended as necessary per soils analysis report. 5. Samp�es: Landscape Architect reserves the right to take samples of the imported topsoil delivered to the site for conformance to the specifica- tions. 6. Rejected Topsoil: Immediately remove rejected topsoil off the site at Con- tractor's expense. Cost of failed sample is responsibility of Contractor. 2.6 SOIL MIXES A. Native Planting Medium: To be used for all seeded areas, shrub beds and tree pits - Amount per Cubic Yard: 40% Topsoil 40% Subsoil 20% Compost B. Flower Bed Mix: Planting Beds for Perennials -Amount per Cubic Yard: 80% Topsoil 20% Compost Materials PLANTS 329300 - 10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2.8 MULCHES A. Organic Mulch: Finely shredded hard wood bark. A. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1- inch sieve; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings. PART 3 - 2.8 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive plants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Verify that plants and vehicles loaded with plants can travel to planting locations with adequate overhead clearance. 3. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty. B. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turF areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations. B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required. D. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings. Provide notice to architect not less than seven day before planting for approval by Architect. PLANTS 329300 - 11 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT 3.4 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to Section 329115 "Soil Preparation (Performance Specification)." B. Placing Planting Soil: Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches Remove stones larger than 4 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to sub-grade before loosening. 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surFace, and thoroughly blend planting soil. C. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. E. Before p�anting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits . 1. Excavate with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 2. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter. 3. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertica� roots for bare-root stock. 4. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. 5. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling. 6. Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements. 7. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 8. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's personnel. PLANTS 329300 - 12 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 B. Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill soil unless otherwise indicated. 1. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil per the mix ratios specified in section 2.7 above in this specification. C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. 1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- diameter holes, 24 inches apart, into free-draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet, whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material. D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits. E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. 3.6 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. C. Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch adjacent finish grades. 1. Use planting soil specified in Section 2.4 for backfill. 2. Balled and Burlapped: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Container Grown: Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 4. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 5. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 6. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole. PLANTS 329300 - 13 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 7. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. D. Bare-Root Stock: Set and support bare-root stock in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch adjacent finish grade. 1. Use planting soil specified in Section 2.5 for backfill. 2. Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle with water until backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots. 3. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside soil-covered roots about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole or touching the roots. 4. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. E. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball. 3.7 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character. 3.8 TREE STABILIZATION A. Trunk Stabilization by Upright Staking and Tying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend one-third of trunk height above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. 2. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees with two stakes for trees up to 12 feet high and 2-1/2 inches or less in caliper; three stakes for trees less than 14 feet high and up to 4 inches in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees. 3. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. PLANTS 329300 - 14 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 4. Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. 3.9 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines per spacing on planting plan. B. Use planting soil specified in 2.4 for backfill. C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. 3.10 PLANTING AREA MULCHING A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 12 inches and secure seams with galvanized pins. B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. 1. Trees and Tree-like Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 4 inch average thickness, with 24 inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 3.11 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT A. General: Repair or replace existing or new trees and other plants that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs. 2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours, if approved. 3. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full- growth status, as determined by Architect. B. Remove and replace trees that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. PLANTS 329300 - 15 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. C. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. D. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site. E. At time of Substantial Completion, verify that tree-watering devices are in good working order and leave them in place. Replace improperly functioning devices. 3.13 PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. D. Apply pesticides and products and biological control agents only if absolutely necessary, and if so, in strict accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. END OF SECTION 329300 PLANTS 329300 - 16 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 33 1100 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply if available, to this Section. B. Additional information concerning water distribution systems may be found on the Civil Drawings. In case of conflict between the drawings and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern. 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Excavation, trenching, exploratory excavation (pothole), backfill, bedding, soil stabilization, ground water removal, connection to existing mains, and installation of pipe, fire hydrants, taps, valves, fittings, valve boxes, and all necessary appurtenances. Also includes removal and replacement of existing paving or concrete where required, haul and import of adequate backfill material to meet compaction requirements and removal of existing thrust blocks where necessary. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materia�s, site excavating, filling and grading. 3. Division 31 Section "Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control" for erosion and sediment mitigation. 4. Division 31 Section "Trenching and Backfilling" for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 5. Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving" for asphalt pavement removal, replacement, materials and testing. 6. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement removal, replacement, materials and testing. B. Permits and Fees: Contractor to obtain and pay for all permits required for work in this Section. Pay all fees for inspections by local authorities and utility agency for work specified in this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Piping specialties. 2. Fittings. 3. Valves, valve boxes and accessories. 4. Water meters and accessories. 5. Protective enclosures. WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 1100-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 6. Fire hydrants. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Precast concrete vaults, including frames and covers, ladders, and drains. C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor. D. Test Reports: Submit two (2) copies of laboratory gradation tests for bedding and trench stabilization materials, concrete mix design, asphalt mix designs, and compression test. E. Permits: Submit copies of all permits issued for project. Contractor is responsible for obtaining all applicable utility agency, Town, County, and State Permits for the project. F. Certificates: Submit two (2) copies of acceptance from Health Department prior to placing water system in service. G. Locates: Contractor must submit two (2) copies of utility locate drawings/receipts prior to beginning construction. H. As-Builts: Provide Engineer with copies of redlined, as-built plans upon completion of construction. Horizontal and vertical information is to be certified by a Professional Land Surveyor. 1.3 REFERENCE TO EAGLE RIVER WATER AND SANITATION DISTRICT STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS All work of this section shall be perFormed in conformance to the current published "Eagle River Water and Sanitation District Standard Specifications for Water Main Construction," dated January 2006 and as subsequently revised, which are incorporated into these specifications by reference. Supplementary requirements may be developed by the Engineer to address project-specific conditions, which may supersede the above-referenced specification. END OF SECTION 33 1100 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 1100-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 SECTION 33 4100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply if available, to this Section. B. Additional information concerning storm sewer systems may be found on the civil drawings. In case of conflict between the drawings and the information specified herein, the more stringent requirements shall govern. 1.2 REFERENCES A. State of Co►orado, Department of Transportation (CDOT): State Department of Highways Standard Construction Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, current edition. B. Town of Vail Standard Specifications for Design and Construction, Latest Edition. C. Reference Standards: Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes gravity-flow storm utility drainage piping outside the building, with the following components: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Drains and inlets. 3. Precast concrete manholes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section "Trenching and Backfilling" for excavating and backfilling of utilities. 2. Division 32 Section "Miscellaneous Concrete Paving"for concrete materials. 3. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving"for Site Grading. 4. Division 31 Section "Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control" for erosion and sedimentation control measures. C. Permits and Fees: 1. Obtain and pay for all permits required for the work of this section. STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-1 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Pay all fees for inspections by local authorities and utility agency for work specified in this section. D. Existing Utilities 1. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to excavate and verify the location (depth, horizontal alignment, etc.) of all existing utilities that may affect construction of the proposed storm utility drainage piping line. All exploratory excavations shall occur far enough in advance to permit any necessary relocation to be made with minimum delay and to verify existing vertical and horizontal location to determine alignment for the proposed storm utility drainage piping line. All costs incurred by the Contractor in making exploratory excavations shall be considered to be included in the unit price bid for construction of each section of storm utility drainage piping line or the associated structures. E. All standard details and specifications of the utility agency shall apply as noted on the construction permit and as required by the agency. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene Pipe. B. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe. C. RCP: Reinforced Concrete Pipe. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage-Piping Pressure Rating: 10-foot head of water. Pipe joints shall be watertight with gasketed joint. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Cleanouts, inlets and area drains. 2. Trench drainage systems. 3. Manholes. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments for the following: 1. Precast concrete manholes and other structures, including frames, covers and grates. 2. Storm Water Inlets. Include plans elevations, sections, details and frames, covers and grates. C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-2 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic inlets, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. D. Handle storm water inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. E. Deliver piping in manufacture's original bundles, securely strapped, and with protective blocking as required. Label or tag each bundle with type, size and quantity of material. F. Exercise care to prevent damage to materials during loading, transportation and unloading. Do not drop pipe or fittings. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN 375) 15" and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35 with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. B. HDPE PIPE AND FITTINGS C. A.ASTM D3350, AASHTO M294. Profile wall — Type S 2' minimum burial depth, 10' maximum burial depth, bell and spigot joint with water-tight, non-cleating, O-ring gasket, ASTM F477. 2.3 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. A.RCP Sewer Pipe and Fittings: According to the following: 1. ASTM C 76 and ASTM C 506 and ASTM C 507 for circular, arch, and vertical and horizontal elliptical pipe, respectively. Pipe shall be Class III, Wall B, unless otherwise noted. STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-3 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Joints: Water tight joints meeting ASTM C443 Standard Specification for joints in circular concrete sewer and culvert pipe, using rubber gaskets. 3. Flared End Sections: No standard specifications apply to concrete flared end sections. Provide manufactures specifications with shop drawings to Owner's Representative. 2.4 2.7 NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS A. A.Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. B. B.Sleeve Materials: 1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443m), rubber. 2. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 2.5 CLEANOUTS A. A.Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Josam Company. a. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Industries, Inc. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. f. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Zurn Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Top-Loading Classification(s): Heavy duty. 3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings. B. PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping. 2.6 MANHOLES A. Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1. Diameter: As shown on drawings (48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated). STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-4 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation. 3. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and the minimum thickness as noted on plans for walls and base riser section. 4. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness or as noted on the plans and the lengths to provide depth indicated. 5. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 6. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. B. Manhole Joint Sealant: All joints in the manhole barrel, cone and/or flat top sections including the joint between the cast-in-place base slab and the bottom barrel section shall be sealed with a preformed, flexible plastic gasket conforming to the following requirements: 1. The flexible plastic gasket shall be in conformance with Federal Specification SS- S 00210, "Sealing Compound, Preformed Plastic, for Expansion Joints and Pipe Joints." 2. The plastic sealing compound shall be packaged in extruded preformed rope-like shape of proper size to completely fill the joint when fully compressed. The material shall be protected by a suitable, removable, two-piece wrapper so that one wrapper may be removed as the compound is applied to the joint surface without disturbing the other wrapper, which remains attached to the compound for protection. The sealing compound shall be impermeable to water, have high immediate bonding strength to the primed concrete surface, and shall maintain permanent plasticity, resistance to water, acids, and alkalies. 3. All surfaces of the tongue and groove joint of the manhole barrel shall be primed with an approved priming compound prior to the installation of the sealing compound. The application of the priming compound and the sealing compound shall be accomplished in strict conformance with the manufacturer's instructions, as to the method of application, quantity of material, the grade of the materials, and the application temperatures. 4. All lifting holes shall be sealed with the plastic sealing compound. C. Manhole Steps: All manhole steps shall be similar and equal to those specified below and shall be installed in a straight line vertically. Manhole steps shall be cast into the wall at the same time the barrel section is cast. Except for unusual circumstances, steps which are inserted or grouted in the wall after the wall has been cast will not be accepted. Steps shall be installed with a nominal spacing of 15 inches (375-mm) and 6 inches (150-mm)from face of manhole. 1. Aluminum, Federal specification QQ-A-200/8, or ALMAG35. Two non-skid grooves in surface of step and capable of carrying load of 1000 Ibs. 6 inches (150 mm)from face of manhole. 2. Polypropylene Reinforced Plastic: ASTM Specifications. a. ASTM C-478. b. ASTM A-615 Grade 60 (steel rod). c. ASTM 2146 69, Type II Grade 16906 (polypropylene). STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-5 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 D. Manhole Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 3-inch to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. F. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ring and cover shall have a combined weight greater than 400 Ibs Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER." 1. Material: ASTM A 48, Class 35 gray iron, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Foundry-applied, SSPC-Paint 16, coal-tar, epoxy-polyamide paint or hot dipped asphalt; 10-mil (0.26-mm) minimum thickness applied to all surFaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 STORM WATER INLETS A. A.Gutter Inlets: Type as indicated on plans, in accordance with Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Details. B. Area Inlets: Type and manufacturer as indicated on plans. 2.8 CONCRETE A. A.General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. B.Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio, 5-7% entrained air and maximum 4 inch slump. Refer to Division 32 Concrete Paving for additional information. l. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel. 2.9 POLYMER-CONCRETE, CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Description, General: Modular system of precast, polymer-concrete channel sections, grates, and appurtenances; designed so grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling. Include number of units required to form total lengths indicated. Use model indicated on plans. B. Sloped-Invert, Polymer-Concrete Systems: Include the following components: 1. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 4-inch (102-mm) minimum inside width and deep, rounded bottom, with built-in invert slope of 0.6 percent and with outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. Include extension sections necessary for required depth. STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-6 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 a. Frame: Inciude gray-iron or steel frame for grate. 2. Grates with manufacturer's designation "Heavy Duty," with slots or perforations that fit recesses in channels. a. Material: Galvanized steel, gray iron. 3. Covers: Solid gray iron, if indicated. 4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Site excavation and filling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." B. Excavation and backfilling for utilities are specified in Division 31 Section "Trenching and Backfilling." 3.2 PREPARATION A. Piping: Prior to installation, verify that insides of pipe and pipe joints are clean and free of dirt, mud, oil, shavings from cutting, or other deleterious materials. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate location and arrangement of underground storm utility drainage piping. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. General: 1. Use only undamaged material. 2. Lay pipe on firm bedding with full length of barrel fully supported. Maintain straight lines and uniform grades between invert elevations shown. Inside of pipe shall be smooth and clean. 3. Begin all pipe installation at downstream end of pipe run, with lower segment of pipe in contact with specified bedding. Place bell or groove ends facing upstream. 4. Plug ends temporarily during installation, until connections are made to adjoining pipe or to manholes or inlet structures. 5. Trench excavation and placement and compaction of bedding and backfill are specified in Division 31 Section "Trenching and Backfilling." C. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-7 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Plug all lifting holes in pipe with approved rubber plug or grout. D. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. E. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. F. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both. G. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at slopes indicated on plan. 2. Install PVC sewer pipe according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F1668. 3. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe installation Manual." 4. Install HDPE piping per manufacturer's recommendation. 3.4 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use PVC or cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast- iron valve boxes for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 inches by 18 inches by 6 inches. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade. C. Set cleanout frames and covers in pavement with tops 1/8 inch below pavement surface. 3.5 MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891. C. Cast-in-place manholes are prohibited. D. Manholes: 1. Construct manholes in accordance with drawings and applicable agency having jurisdiction standards. Carry pipe through manhole with split pipe. 2. Slope floor of manhole from centerline of pipe to maximum of 2 inches above top of pipe at face of manhole. Shape invert when manhole base is poured to conform exactly to lower half of pipe. STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-8 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Form or shape inverts smooth and clean, with no obstructions. Allow insertion of an expandable plug in pipe. Construct side branches with radii as large as possible to connect to main invert. 4. Extend concrete base ring minimum 3 inches above top of pipe. 5. Place future extension of pipe from manholes in manhole base. Shape invert with pipe extended to outside face of manhole base and terminated with bell of pipe as close as practical to manhole base. 6. Do not place precast manhole sections on manhole base for two days minimum after placement of concrete base. Thoroughly clean top of formed concrete base ring prior to placing manhole barrel sections. 7. Place a complete and continuous roll of sealant in groove or keyway of concrete base ring in sufficient quantity that when precast manhole barrel is placed there will be no voids. Join each succeeding precast manhole barrel in similar manner. Install sealant in groove side of tongue and groove joints. 8. Trim away all excess material and repair all lifting holes. E. Manhole Rings and Covers: 1. Set tops of frames and covers 1/8 inch below finished surFace of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 1 inch (25 mm) above finished surFace elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where finished surFace will be completed after manhole construction, set top of cone where a maximum of two courses of brick will be required to adjust ring and cover to final grade. Final elevations of lid will be adjusted with bricks, mortar or precast concrete rings with a minimum of 6 inches and a maximum of 18 inches of adjustment. 3.6 INLETS, OUTLETS AND CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION A. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 1. Precast concrete in accordance with drawings and applicable agency having jurisdiction standards. Comply with applicable requirements of Division 03 Section "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2. Construct inverts of pipe or concrete smoothed inverts same size as pipe up to centerline of pipe. Form perimeter bench as indicated. 3. Embed steel angles or other accessories as indicated or required to anchor and support frames, grates, or covers. B. Frames, Grates, Covers and Steps: Install accurately to placement dimensions shown on drawings. Anchor castings in place and set in adjustment mortar to assure a firm foundation. C. Connection to Existing Structures: 1. Cut and patch or rebuild existing manhole, catch basins, or other drainage structures as required to receive new drain lines. 2. Core drill openings to receive new pipe. Chip existing bench to provide sufficient thickness for mortar bed to form new invert. STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-9 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 3. Seal around new pipe penetration with expandable waterstop sealant, completely filling space between pipe and cut opening to provide a watertight repair. 3.7 STORM WATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION A. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated. B. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R. 3.9 TRENCH DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface. C. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives, fasteners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer. D. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4-inch (102-mm) minimum concrete around bottom and sides. E. Fasten grates to channel sections as indicated. F. Assemble channel sections with flanged or interlocking joints. 3.10 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures. 1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. Submit separate report for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-10 Lionshead Parking Entry Improvements Issue 5 - Bid Set Zehren and Associates, Inc February 12, 2014 a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity-Flow Storm Utility Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following: a. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. b. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C924 (ASTM C 924M). C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. 3.12 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping, inlets and manholes of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with potable water. END OF SECTION 33 4100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-11